Sei sulla pagina 1di 558

EUTRA/LTE

Digital Standard for


R&SSignal Generators
Operating Manual
EUTRA/LTE, LTE Rel. 9, LTE closed
loop BS Test, LTE Logfile Generation,
LTE-A Rel.10

(;<)
Operating Manual

Test & Measurement

1171.5177.12 18

This document describes the following software options:

R&SAMU-K55/-K255/-K69/-K81/-K84/-K284/-K85
1402.9405.02, 1402.9457.02, 1403.0501.02, 1403.0553.02, 1403.0818.02, 1403.0853.02,
1403.0830.02

R&SSMATE-K55/-K69/-K81/-K84/-K85
1404.7851.02, 1403.0501.02, 1404.8612.02, 1404.8829.02, 1404.8841.02

R&SSMBV-K55/-K255/-K84/-K284
1407.9203.xx, 1415.8360.02, 1415.8602.xx, 1415.8625.02

R&SSMJ-K55/-K255/-K69/-K81/-K84/-K284/-K85
1409.2206.02, 1409.2258.02, 1403.0501.02, 1409.3054.02, 1409.3360.02, 1409.3402.02,
1409.3383.02

R&SSMU-K55/-K255/-K69/-K81/-K84/-K284/-K85
1408.7310.02, 1408.7362.02, 1403.0501.02, 1408.8169.02, 1408.8475.02, 1408.8517.02,
1408.8498.02

R&SAFQ-K255/-K284
1401.5906.02, 1415.0253.02

R&SSFU-K255
2115.2366.02

2013 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG


Mhldorfstr. 15, 81671 Mnchen, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
E-mail: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&SAMU is abbreviated as R&S AMU, R&SSMATE is abbreviated as
R&S SMATE, R&SSMBV is abbreviated as R&S SMBV, R&SSMJ is abbreviated as R&S SMJ, R&SSMU is abbreviated as
R&S SMU, R&SWinIQSIM2 is abbreviated as R&S WinIQSIM2

Basic Safety Instructions


Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturers plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.
Safety labels on products
The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers.
Symbol

Meaning
Notice, general danger location

Symbol

Meaning
ON/OFF supply voltage

Observe product documentation


Caution when handling heavy equipment

Standby indication

Danger of electric shock

Direct current (DC)

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 1

Basic Safety Instructions

Symbol

Meaning

Symbol

Meaning

Warning! Hot surface

Alternating current (AC)

Protective conductor terminal

Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)

Ground

Device fully protected by double (reinforced)


insulation

Ground terminal

EU labeling for batteries and accumulators


For additional information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.

Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive


devices

EU labeling for separate collection of electrical


and electronic devices
For additonal information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.

Warning! Laser radiation


For additional information, see section
"Operation", item 7.

Signal words and their meaning


The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related, e.g.
messages relating to property damage.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 2

Basic Safety Instructions

Operating states and operating positions


The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of 10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution severity 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network, or if the power
switch is not suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product
from the AC supply network. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and
accessible at all times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the
connecting cable must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing
disconnection from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into
racks or systems, the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 3

Basic Safety Instructions

6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that apply
in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 4

Basic Safety Instructions

2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Repair and service
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 5

Basic Safety Instructions

2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells
If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 6

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Waste disposal/Environmental protection


1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales


Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al da
con los estndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el mximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados segn las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garanta de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado segn el certificado de conformidad
de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable segn los estndares tcnicos de seguridad.
Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deber
atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz est siempre a su disposicin en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas
informaciones de seguridad.
Adems queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir dao. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 7

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentacin del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentacin, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos tcnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingls. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontrara la informacin debida en la documentacin del
producto en el captulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, as
como la documentacin del producto, y entrguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daos por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Debern tenerse en cuenta todas las dems informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la proteccin de personas, que encontrarn en el captulo correspondiente de la
documentacin del producto y que tambin son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominacin de "producto", entre ellos tambin aparatos, instalaciones as
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos especficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentacin del producto.
Sealizacin de seguridad de los productos
Las siguientes seales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros.
Smbolo

Significado
Aviso: punto de peligro general
Observar la documentacin del producto

Smbolo

Significado
Tensin de alimentacin de PUESTA EN
MARCHA / PARADA

Atencin en el manejo de dispositivos de peso


elevado

Indicacin de estado de espera (standby)

Peligro de choque elctrico

Corriente continua (DC)

Advertencia: superficie caliente

Corriente alterna (AC)

Conexin a conductor de proteccin

Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)

Conexin a tierra

El aparato est protegido en su totalidad por un


aislamiento doble (reforzado)

Conexin a masa

Distintivo de la UE para bateras y


acumuladores
Ms informacin en la seccin
"Eliminacin/proteccin del medio ambiente",
punto 1.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 8

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Smbolo

Significado

Smbolo

Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos


sensibles a la electrosttica (ESD)

Significado
Distintivo de la UE para la eliminacin por
separado de dispositivos elctricos y
electrnicos
Ms informacin en la seccin
"Eliminacin/proteccin del medio ambiente",
punto 2.

Advertencia: rayo lser


Ms informacin en la seccin
"Funcionamiento", punto 7.

Palabras de seal y su significado


En la documentacin del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de seal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
Indica una situacin de peligro que, si no se evita, causa lesiones
graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situacin de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situacin de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones leves o moderadas.
Indica informacin que se considera importante, pero no en relacin
con situaciones de peligro; p. ej., avisos sobre posibles daos
materiales.
En la documentacin del producto se emplea de forma sinnima el
trmino CUIDADO.
Las palabras de seal corresponden a la definicin habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea
econmica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definicin en otras reas econmicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de seal aqu descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinacin con la correspondiente documentacin del producto y
solamente en combinacin con el producto correspondiente. La utilizacin de las palabras de seal en
combinacin con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daos en personas u objetos.
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento
El producto solamente debe ser utilizado segn lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilacin. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques elctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos debern ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevencin de accidentes.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 9

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz vlido lo que sigue:
como posicin de funcionamiento se define por principio la posicin con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de proteccin IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilizacin hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicar una tolerancia de
10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categora de sobrecarga
elctrica 2, ndice de suciedad 2.
2. No site el producto encima de superficies, vehculos, estantes o mesas, que por sus caractersticas
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalacin del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalacin de modo distinto al indicado en la documentacin del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura mxima especificada en la documentacin del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques elctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
Seguridad elctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
elctrica, pueden producirse choques elctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deber comprobar siempre que la tensin
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentacin elctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensin, tambin se debern cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de proteccin I con alimentacin mvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrn enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de proteccin
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupcin intencionada del conductor de proteccin, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupcin puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques elctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deber garantizarse la realizacin de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado tcnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexin de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexin se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexin.
El dispositivo de desconexin se debe poder alcanzar fcilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexin a la red es el dispositivo de desconexin, la longitud del cable de
conexin no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrnicos no son aptos para el corte de la red elctrica. Si se
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deber colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalacin.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si est daado el cable de conexin a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexin a red. Asegrese, mediante las medidas de proteccin y
de instalacin adecuadas, de que el cable de conexin a red no pueda ser daado o de que nadie
pueda ser daado por l, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque elctrico.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 10

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

6. Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentacin TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como mximo (utilizacin de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observacin de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podra causar fuego o choques elctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensin Ueff > 30 V se debern tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medicin adecuados, seguros, limitacin
de tensin, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexin con dispositivos informticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que stos cumplan los estndares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
vlidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que est permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto est en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes elctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daos en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deber primero conectar el conductor de proteccin fijo
con el conductor de proteccin del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexin. La instalacin y
la conexin debern ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estn provistos de fusibles, interruptor automtico ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentacin debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, as como el producto mismo, estn a salvo de
posibles daos.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensin (debida p. ej. a una cada del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de proteccin. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al
peligro de choque elctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningn objeto que no est destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques elctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicacin contraria, los productos no estn impermeabilizados (ver tambin el captulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de lquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
elctrico para el usuario o de daos en el producto, que tambin pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar fro a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque elctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentacin de tensin (p. ej. red de
alimentacin o batera). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pao suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningn concepto productos de limpieza qumicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulsicas.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 11

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentracin durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estn a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes fsicas, psquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daos de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el captulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricacin industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados Slos llamados
alrgenos (p. ej. el nquel)S. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alrgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un mdico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o dao a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulacin mecnica y/o trmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el captulo "Eliminacin/proteccin del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicacin RF, pueden a causa de su
funcin natural, emitir una radiacin electromagntica aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la proteccin de las mujeres embarazadas. Tambin las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiacin electromagntica. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligacin de evaluar y sealizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposicin a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias txicas
(gases, lquidos etc.) que pueden generar daos a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. mscaras antigs e indumentaria de proteccin.
7. Los productos con lser estn provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funcin de la
clase de lser del que se trate. Los rayos lser pueden provocar daos de tipo biolgico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiacin y debido a su concentracin extrema de potencia electromagntica.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto lser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuracin o funcin aparte de las descritas en la
documentacin del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiacin lser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagntica (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analoga con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribucin de baja tensin que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A estn destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
pueden causar perturbaciones radioelctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles
perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, as como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribucin de baja tensin que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 12

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Reparacin y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizacin para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensin de alimentacin, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque elctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparacin debern ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrn ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Despus de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deber realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
proteccin, medicin de resistencia de aislamiento, medicin de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Bateras y acumuladores o celdas
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las bateras y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de bateras y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estndar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o bateras no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y bateras deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un pao seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o bateras no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bateras en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o bateras de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o bateras no deben someterse a impactos mecnicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el lquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
mdico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o bateras que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
bateras solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las bateras y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura domstica. Las bateras o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relacin las normas nacionales de eliminacin y reciclaje.
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaucin y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevacin adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daos personales.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 13

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujecin en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. gras, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevacin. Para evitar daos personales o
daos en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevacin utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehculo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehculo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumir
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehculo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehculo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daos.
Eliminacin/proteccin del medio ambiente
1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batera o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domsticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminacin se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a travs de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atencin al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos elctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domsticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminacin de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminacin para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, dirjase a su servicio de atencin
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecnica y/o trmica cualquier producto o componente ms all del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o nquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formacin adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daos
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminacin de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminacin de residuos. Tenga en cuenta tambin en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentacin del producto. La
eliminacin incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daos a la salud o
daos al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar ms informacin sobre la proteccin del medio ambiente en la pgina web de
Rohde & Schwarz.

1171.0000.42 - 07

Page 14

Certified Quality System

ISO 9001

Certified Environmental System

ISO 14001

Sehr geehrter Kunde,

Dear customer,

Cher client,

Sie haben sich fr den Kauf


eines Rohde&Schwarz Produktes entschieden. Sie erhalten
damit ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes
Produkt. Es wurde nach den
Regeln unserer Qualitts- und
Umweltmanagementsysteme
entwickelt, gefertigt und geprft.
Rohde&Schwarz ist unter anderem nach den Managementsystemen ISO9001 und ISO14001
zertifiziert.

You have decided to buy a


Rohde&Schwarz product. This
product has been manufactured
using the most advanced methods. It was developed, manufactured and tested in compliance
with our quality management
and environmental management systems. Rohde&Schwarz
has been certified, for example, according to the ISO9001
and ISO14001 management
systems.

Der Umwelt verpflichtet

Environmental commitment

Vous avez choisi dacheter un


produit Rohde&Schwarz. Vous
disposez donc dun produit
fabriqu daprs les mthodes
les plus avances. Le dveloppement, la fabrication et les
tests de ce produit ont t effectus selon nos systmes de
management de qualit et de
management environnemental.
La socit Rohde&Schwarz a
t homologue, entre autres,
conformment aux systmes
de management ISO9001 et
ISO14001.

Energie-effiziente,

Energy-efficient

RoHS-konforme Produkte
Kontinuierliche
Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger
Umweltkonzepte
ISO14001-zertifiziertes
Umweltmanagementsystem

Continuous

Engagement cologique
Produits

efficience
nergtique
Amlioration continue de la
durabilit environnementale
Systme de management
environnemental certifi selon
ISO14001

1171.0200.11 V 05.01

products
improvement in
environmental sustainability
ISO14001-certified
environmental management
system

ISO-Qualitaets-Zertifikat_1171-0200-11_A4.indd 1

28.09.2012 10:25:08

1171020011

Quality management
and environmental
management

Customer Support
Technical support where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.

Up-to-date information and upgrades


To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.

Europe, Africa, Middle East

Phone +49 89 4129 12345


customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com

North America

Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)


customer.support@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com

Latin America

Phone +1-410-910-7988
customersupport.la@rohde-schwarz.com

Asia/Pacific

Phone +65 65 13 04 88
customersupport.asia@rohde-schwarz.com

China

Phone +86-800-810-8228 /
+86-400-650-5896
customersupport.china@rohde-schwarz.com

1171.0200.22-06.00

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

Contents
1 Preface..................................................................................................11
1.1

Documentation Overview...........................................................................................11

1.2

Typographical Conventions.......................................................................................12

2 Preamble...............................................................................................13
3 Introduction..........................................................................................15
3.1

Requirements for UMTS Long-Term Evolution........................................................15

3.2

LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme.......................................................................16

3.2.1

OFDMA Parameterization.............................................................................................18

3.2.1.1

Frame structure type 1 (FDD).......................................................................................18

3.2.1.2

Frame structure type 2 (TDD).......................................................................................19

3.2.2

Downlink Resource Grid...............................................................................................20

3.2.3

Downlink Data Transmission.........................................................................................21

3.2.4

Downlink Control Information Transmission..................................................................21

3.2.5

Downlink Reference Signal Structure and Cell Search.................................................23

3.2.5.1

Cell-specific downlink reference signals.......................................................................23

3.2.5.2

MBSFN reference signals.............................................................................................25

3.2.5.3

UE-specific reference signal.........................................................................................26

3.2.5.4

Positioning reference signals........................................................................................27

3.2.6

Downlink Physical Layer Procedures............................................................................28

3.3

LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme............................................................................28

3.3.1

SC-FDMA Parameterization..........................................................................................30

3.3.2

Uplink Data Transmission.............................................................................................30

3.3.3

Uplink Control Information Transmission......................................................................31

3.3.4

Uplink Reference Signal Structure................................................................................32

3.3.5

Uplink Physical Layer Procedures................................................................................33

3.4

LTE MIMO Concepts...................................................................................................34

3.4.1

Downlink MIMO.............................................................................................................35

3.4.1.1

Spatial Multiplexing.......................................................................................................35

3.4.1.2

Transmit Diversity.........................................................................................................37

3.4.1.3

Beamforming.................................................................................................................37

3.4.2

Uplink MIMO.................................................................................................................38

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

3.5

LTE MBMS Concepts..................................................................................................38

3.6

LTE-Advanced Introduction.......................................................................................38

3.6.1

Carrier Aggregation.......................................................................................................39

3.6.2

Enhanced Uplink SC-FDMA..........................................................................................40

4 EUTRA/LTE Parameterization.............................................................43
4.1

OFDMA Parameterization...........................................................................................43

4.2

Reference Signals.......................................................................................................43

4.3

Synchronization Signal (SYNC).................................................................................44

4.4

Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)........................................................................44

4.5

Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH)............................................45

4.6

Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH)....................................................45

4.7

Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH).........................................................46

4.8

Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH)..........................................................................46

4.9

Data Allocations..........................................................................................................46

4.10

Modulation Mapping...................................................................................................47

4.11

MIMO............................................................................................................................47

4.12

SC-FDMA Parameterization........................................................................................48

4.13

Demodulation Reference Signal (DRS).....................................................................48

4.14

Sounding Reference Signal (SRS).............................................................................48

4.15

Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)..............................................................49

4.16

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)...........................................................49

4.17

Data Allocation............................................................................................................49

4.18

Modulation Mapping...................................................................................................50

5 R&S Signal Generator Specific Information......................................51


5.1

Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator.......................................................51

5.1.1

Downlink........................................................................................................................51

5.1.2

Uplink............................................................................................................................52

5.1.3

DCI Conflict Handling....................................................................................................53

5.2

Subframes Handling in the R&S Signal Generator..................................................55

5.2.1

Copy/Paste Subframe...................................................................................................55

5.2.2

Number of Configurable Subframes..............................................................................55

5.2.3

Four Configurable Frames in Uplink and Downlink Direction........................................55

5.2.3.1

Uplink Direction.............................................................................................................56

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

5.2.3.2

Downlink Direction........................................................................................................58

5.3

Power Setting..............................................................................................................59

5.3.1

General Power Settings................................................................................................59

5.3.2

Downlink Power Settings..............................................................................................60

5.3.3

Uplink Power Settings...................................................................................................61

6 Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests..................................63


6.1

Exemplary Testing Scenario......................................................................................63

6.2

Feedback Modes.........................................................................................................64

6.2.1

Binary Mode..................................................................................................................65

6.2.2

Serial Mode...................................................................................................................65

6.2.3

Serial 3x8 Mode............................................................................................................65

6.2.4

Structure of a serial and 3x8 serial feedback command...............................................66

6.3

Timing Aspects...........................................................................................................68

6.3.1

Parameterization of the feedback timing.......................................................................68

6.3.1.1

Timing for binary mode with 3GPP Distance Mode, serial or serial 3x8 mode.............68

6.3.1.2

Maximum number of serial feedback commands..........................................................69

6.3.1.3

Timing for binary mode with Direct Response Distance Mode.....................................69

6.3.2

Uplink Timing................................................................................................................70

6.3.2.1

General timing rules......................................................................................................72

6.4

Avoiding Synchronization Problems........................................................................72

6.5

Limitation.....................................................................................................................74

7 EUTRA/LTE User Interface..................................................................75


7.1

Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals.........................................................................75

7.2

LTE Logfile Generation...............................................................................................81

7.2.1

Signal Processing Chains and Logging Points.............................................................81

7.2.2

Output Files...................................................................................................................84

7.2.2.1

File Names....................................................................................................................84

7.2.2.2

Extended Logfiles Contents..........................................................................................87


Extended DCI Logfile....................................................................................................88
Extended UCI Logfile....................................................................................................90

7.2.3

Working with the Logfile Generation Functionality........................................................91

7.2.4

Logfile Generation Settings...........................................................................................92

7.3

Test Setups/Models....................................................................................................95

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

7.4

General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings......................................................96

7.4.1

DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration...........................................................................98

7.4.2

MBSFN Settings..........................................................................................................103

7.4.3

Physical Settings.........................................................................................................116

7.4.4

TDD Frame Structure Settings....................................................................................118

7.4.5

Scheduling Settings....................................................................................................118

7.4.6

MIMO..........................................................................................................................119

7.4.7

Cell Specific Settings..................................................................................................121

7.4.8

Downlink Reference Signal Structure.........................................................................124

7.4.9

Synchronization Signal Settings..................................................................................125

7.4.10

Positioning Reference Signal Settings........................................................................125

7.5

DL Frame Configuration Settings............................................................................127

7.5.1

General Frame Configuration Settings........................................................................128

7.5.2

Subframe Configuration Settings................................................................................129

7.5.3

DL Resource Allocation Table ....................................................................................130

7.6

Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings.......................................................137

7.6.1

Allocation Settings.......................................................................................................138

7.6.2

Precoding Settings......................................................................................................138

7.6.3

Scrambling Settings....................................................................................................142

7.6.4

Channel Coding Settings............................................................................................142

7.7

Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration...........................144

7.7.1

Precoding Settings......................................................................................................145

7.7.2

PCFICH Settings.........................................................................................................146

7.7.3

PHICH Settings...........................................................................................................147

7.7.4

PDCCH Settings.........................................................................................................149

7.7.5

PDCCH Format Variable.............................................................................................153

7.7.6

DCI Format Configuration...........................................................................................158

7.8

User Configuration Settings....................................................................................169

7.9

Antenna Port Mapping Settings...............................................................................172

7.10

Dummy Data Configuration Settings......................................................................175

7.11

OFDMA Timeplan......................................................................................................176

7.12

General UL Settings..................................................................................................177

7.12.1

Physical Settings.........................................................................................................178

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

7.12.2

TDD Frame Structure Settings....................................................................................180

7.12.3

Cell Specific Settings..................................................................................................181

7.12.4

UL Reference Signals.................................................................................................182

7.12.5

PRACH Settings..........................................................................................................183

7.12.6

PUSCH Structure........................................................................................................185

7.12.7

PUCCH Structure........................................................................................................185

7.12.8

SRS Structure.............................................................................................................188

7.13

UL Frame Configuration Settings............................................................................189

7.13.1

General Scheduling Configuration..............................................................................189

7.13.2

Subframe Configuration..............................................................................................191

7.13.3

UL Allocation Table.....................................................................................................192

7.14

User Equipment Configuration................................................................................196

7.14.1

Common Settings........................................................................................................199

7.14.2

FRC Configuration......................................................................................................201

7.14.3

Realtime Feedback Configuration Settings.................................................................203

7.14.4

HARQ Statistics..........................................................................................................207

7.14.5

Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).................................................................208

7.14.6

Reference Signal Structure.........................................................................................211

7.14.7

SRS Structure.............................................................................................................212

7.14.8

PRACH Power Ramping.............................................................................................219

7.14.9

PRACH Configuration.................................................................................................219

7.15

Enhanced PUSCH Settings......................................................................................221

7.15.1

Common PUSCH Settings..........................................................................................222

7.15.2

Frequency Hopping.....................................................................................................223

7.15.3

Channel Coding / Multiplexing....................................................................................223

7.16

Enhanced PUCCH Settings......................................................................................226

7.16.1

Common Settings........................................................................................................227

7.16.2

Channel Coding / Multiplexing....................................................................................227

7.17

SC-FDMA Timeplan...................................................................................................229

7.18

TDD Timeplan............................................................................................................230

7.19

Filter/Clipping/Power Settings.................................................................................232

7.19.1

Time Domain Windowing Settings..............................................................................232

7.19.2

Filter Settings..............................................................................................................233

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

7.19.3

Clipping Settings.........................................................................................................237

7.19.4

Time Domain Windowing Settings..............................................................................238

7.19.5

Power Settings............................................................................................................238

7.20

Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings.................................................................................241

7.20.1

Trigger In.....................................................................................................................242

7.20.2

Timing Configuration...................................................................................................247

7.20.3

Marker Mode...............................................................................................................248

7.20.4

Marker Delay...............................................................................................................249

7.20.5

Clock Settings.............................................................................................................250

7.20.6

Global Settings............................................................................................................252

8 Test Case Wizard...............................................................................253


8.1

Introduction to Conformance Testing.....................................................................253

8.1.1

UE Conformance Testing............................................................................................253

8.1.2

BS Conformance Testing............................................................................................254

8.1.3

Repeater Conformance Testing..................................................................................255

8.2

Basic Configuration..................................................................................................255

8.3

Supported Test Cases..............................................................................................255

8.3.1

Generic Structure of the Description of the Implemented Test Cases........................257

8.4

Standard Test Setups...............................................................................................257

8.4.1

Standard Test Setup - One Path.................................................................................257

8.4.2

Standard Test Setup - Two Paths...............................................................................258

8.4.3

Test Setup - Diversity Measurements.........................................................................259

8.4.4

Test Setup - Four Rx Antennas...................................................................................259

8.5

General Considerations............................................................................................260

8.6

User Interface............................................................................................................263

8.6.1

General Settings.........................................................................................................264

8.6.2

Wanted Signal and Cell Specific Settings...................................................................267

8.6.3

Apply...........................................................................................................................269

8.7

Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)...............................................269

8.7.1

Prior Considerations....................................................................................................269

8.7.2

Introduction to the Unwanted Emissions Tests...........................................................270

8.7.3

Test Case 6.7: Transmitter Intermodulation................................................................272

8.8

Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)....................................................278

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

8.8.1

Prior Considerations....................................................................................................278

8.8.2

General Workflow for Carrying Out a Receiver Test...................................................279

8.8.3

Interfering Signal Settings...........................................................................................280

8.8.4

Test Case 7.2: Reference Sensitivity Level................................................................283

8.8.5

Test Case 7.3: Dynamic range....................................................................................285

8.8.6

Test Case 7.4: In-channel selectivity (ICS).................................................................288

8.8.7

Test Case 7.5A: Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS).................................................291

8.8.8

Test Case 7.5B: Narrow-band blocking......................................................................293

8.8.9

Test Case 7.6: Blocking..............................................................................................296

8.8.10

Test Case 7.8: Receiver intermodulation ...................................................................300

8.9

Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)...............................................304

8.9.1

Prior Considerations....................................................................................................304

8.9.2

Realtime Feedback Configuration, AWGN and Propagation Condition Settings........306

8.9.3

Test Case 8.2.1: PUSCH in multipath fading propagation conditions.........................308

8.9.4

Test Case 8.2.2: UL timing adjustment.......................................................................311

8.9.5

Test Case 8.2.3: HARQ-ACK multiplexed on PUSCH................................................316

8.9.6

Test Case 8.2.4: High Speed Train conditions............................................................318

8.9.7

Test Case 8.3.1: ACK missed detection for single user PUCCH format 1a................322

8.9.8

Test Case 8.3.2: CQI performance requirements for PUCCH format 2......................324

8.9.9

Test Case 8.3.3: ACK missed detection for multi user PUCCH format 1a..................327

8.9.10

Test Case 8.4.1: PRACH false alarm probability and missed detection.....................332

9 Remote-Control Commands.............................................................337
9.1

Primary Commands..................................................................................................338

9.2

Filter/Clipping/Power Settings.................................................................................343

9.2.1

Filter Settings..............................................................................................................343

9.2.2

Clipping Settings.........................................................................................................350

9.2.3

Power Settings............................................................................................................351

9.3

Clock Settings...........................................................................................................354

9.4

Timing Configuration................................................................................................357

9.5

Trigger Settings.........................................................................................................357

9.6

Marker Settings.........................................................................................................365

9.7

General EUTRA/LTE Settings..................................................................................370

9.8

General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings.................................................................371

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EUTRA/LTE

Contents

9.9

General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings......................................................................384

9.10

DL Frame Configuration...........................................................................................397

9.11

DL MBFSN Settings..................................................................................................408

9.12

DL Carrier Aggregation Settings.............................................................................418

9.13

Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH, PMCH Settings.............................................................421

9.14

Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Configuration..........................................430

9.15

UL Frame Configuration...........................................................................................461

9.16

UL Enhanced Settings..............................................................................................467

9.17

Configure User..........................................................................................................476

9.18

Dummy Data Configuration......................................................................................480

9.19

User Equipment.........................................................................................................482

9.20

Realtime Feedback....................................................................................................499

9.21

LTE Logfiles Generation...........................................................................................504

9.22

Test Case Wizard Remote-Control Commands......................................................507

A References..........................................................................................523
List of Commands..............................................................................525
Index....................................................................................................537

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

10

EUTRA/LTE

Preface
Documentation Overview

1 Preface
1.1 Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S Signal Generator consists of the following parts:

Online Help system on the instrument,

"Quick Start Guide" printed manual,

Documentation CD-ROM with:


Online help system (*.chm) as a standalone help,

Operating Manuals for base unit and options,

Service Manual,

Data sheet and specifications,

Links to useful sites on the R&S internet.

Online Help
The Online Help is embedded in the instrument's firmware. It offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming. The
online help contains help on operating the R&S Signal Generator and all available
options.
Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format
on the Documentation CD-ROM. It provides the information needed to set up and start
working with the instrument. Basic operations and an example of setup are described.
The manual includes also general information, e.g., Safety Instructions.
Operating Manuals
The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide. Operating Manuals
are provided for the base unit and each additional (software) option.
These manuals are available in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documentation
CD-ROM delivered with the instrument. In the Operating Manual for the base unit, all
instrument functions are described in detail. Furthermore, it provides an introduction to
remote control and a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples. Information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages is also given.
In the individual option manuals, the specific instrument functions of the option are
described in detail. For additional information on default settings and parameters, refer
to the data sheets. Basic information on operating the R&S Signal Generator is not included in the option manuals.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

11

EUTRA/LTE

Preface
Typographical Conventions

Service Manual
The Service Manual is available in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documentation
CD-ROM delivered with the instrument. It describes how to check compliance with rated
specifications, on instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It
contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replacement of modules.
This manual can also be orderd in printed form (see ordering information in the data
sheet).
Release Notes
The release notes describe new and modified functions, eliminated problems, and last
minute changes to the documentation. The corresponding firmware version is indicated
on the title page of the release notes. The current release notes are provided in the
Internet.
Web Helps
Web helps are provided for the base unit and each additional (software) option. The
content of the web helps correspond to the user manuals for the latest product versions.
The web help is an additional file format that offers quick online access. They are not
intended to be downloaded but rather to access the required information directly form the
R&S website.
Web helps are available at the R&S website, on the R&S Signal Generator product page
at the "Download > Manuals" area.

1.2 Typographical Conventions


The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention

Description

"Graphical user interface elements"

All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks.

KEYS

Key names are written in capital letters.

File names, commands,


program code

File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distinguished by their font.

Input

Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.

Links

Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.

"References"

References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation


marks.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

12

EUTRA/LTE

Preamble

2 Preamble
All supported features are in line with 3GPP Release 10, i.e. the following official 3GPP
specifications are implemented:

3GPP TS 36.211, Version 10.2.0

3GPP TS 36.212, Version 10.2.0

3GPP TS 36.213, Version 10.2.0

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

13

EUTRA/LTE

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

Preamble

14

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
Requirements for UMTS Long-Term Evolution

3 Introduction
Currently, UMTS networks worldwide are being upgraded to high speed downlink packet
access (HSDPA) in order to increase data rate and capacity for downlink packet data. In
the next step, high speed uplink packet access (HSUPA) will boost uplink performance
in UMTS networks. While HSDPA was introduced as a 3GPP Release 5 feature, HSUPA
is an important feature of 3GPP Release 6. The combination of HSDPA and HSUPA is
often referred to as HSPA.
However, even with the introduction of HSPA, the evolution of UMTS has not reached its
end. HSPA+ will bring significant enhancements in 3GPP Release 7. The objective is to
enhance the performance of HSPA-based radio networks in terms of spectrum efficiency,
peak data rate and latency, and to exploit the full potential of WCDMA based 5 MHz
operation. Important features of HSPA+ are downlink multiple input multiple output
(MIMO), higher order modulation for uplink and downlink, improvements of layer 2 protocols, and continuous packet connectivity.
In order to ensure the competitiveness of UMTS for the next 10 years and beyond, concepts for UMTS long term evolution (LTE) have been investigated. The objective is a
high-data-rate, low-latency and packet-optimized radio access technology. Therefore, a
study item was launched in 3GPP Release 7 on evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access
(EUTRA) and evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access network (EUTRAN). LTE/EUTRA
will then form part of 3GPP Release 8 core specifications.
This introduction focuses on LTE/EUTRA technology. In the following, the terms LTE or
EUTRA are used interchangeably.
In the context of the LTE study item, 3GPP work first focused on the definition requirements, e.g. targets for data rate, capacity, spectrum efficiency, and latency. Also commercial aspects such as costs for installing and operating the network were considered.
Based on these requirements, technical concepts for the air interface transmission
schemes and protocols were studied. Notably, LTE uses new multiple access schemes
on the air interface: orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) in downlink
and single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) in uplink. Furthermore,
MIMO antenna schemes form an essential part of LTE. In an attempt to simplify protocol
architecture, LTE brings some major changes to the existing UMTS protocol concepts.
Impact on the overall network architecture including the core network is being investigated in the context of 3GPP system architecture evolution (SAE).

3.1 Requirements for UMTS Long-Term Evolution


LTE is focusing on optimum support of packet switched (PS) services. Main requirements
for the design of an LTE system are documented in 3GPP TR 25.913 [1] and can be
summarized as follows:

Data Rate: Peak data rates target 100 Mbps (downlink) and 50 Mbps (uplink) for 20
MHz spectrum allocation, assuming two receive antennas and one transmit antenna
are at the terminal.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

15

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Throughput: The target for downlink average user throughput per MHz is three to
four times better than Release 6. The target for uplink average user throughput per
MHz is two to three times better than Release 6.

Spectrum efficiency: The downlink target is three to four times better than Release
6. The uplink target is two to three times better than Release 6.

Latency: The one-way transit time between a packet being available at the IP layer
in either the UE or radio access network and the availability of this packet at IP layer
in the radio access network/UE shall be less than 5 ms. Also C-plane latency shall
be reduced, e.g. to allow fast transition times of less than 100 ms from camped state
to active state.

Bandwidth: Scaleable bandwidths of 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz shall be


supported. Also bandwidths smaller than 5 MHz shall be supported for more flexibility.

Interworking: Interworking with existing UTRAN/GERAN systems and non-3GPP


systems shall be ensured. Multimode terminals shall support handover to and from
UTRAN and GERAN as well as inter-RAT measurements. Interruption time for handover between EUTRAN and UTRAN/GERAN shall be less than 300 ms for realtime
services and less than 500 ms for non-realtime services.

Multimedia broadcast multicast services (MBMS): MBMS shall be further


enhanced and is then referred to as E-MBMS.

Costs: Reduced CAPEX and OPEX including backhaul shall be achieved. Costeffective migration from Release 6 UTRA radio interface and architecture shall be possible. Reasonable system and terminal complexity, cost, and power consumption
shall be ensured. All the interfaces specified shall be open for multivendor equipment
interoperability.

Mobility: The system should be optimized for low mobile speed (0 to 15 km/h), but
higher mobile speeds shall be supported as well, including high speed train environment as a special case.

Spectrum allocation: Operation in paired (frequency division duplex / FDD mode)


and unpaired spectrum (time division duplex / TDD mode) is possible.

Co-existence: Co-existence in the same geographical area and co-location with


GERAN/UTRAN shall be ensured. Also, co-existence between operators in adjacent
bands as well as cross-border co-existence is a requirement.

Quality of Service: End-to-end quality of service (QoS) shall be supported. VoIP


should be supported with at least as good radio and backhaul efficiency and latency
as voice traffic over the UMTS circuit switched networks.

Network synchronization: Time synchronization of different network sites shall not


be mandated.

3.2 LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme


The downlink transmission scheme for E-UTRA FDD and TDD modes is based on conventional OFDM. In an OFDM system, the available spectrum is divided into multiple
carriers, called subcarriers, which are orthogonal to each other. Each of these subcarriers
is independently modulated by a low rate data stream.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

16

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

OFDM is used as well in WLAN, WiMAX and broadcast technologies like DVB. OFDM
has several benefits including its robustness against multipath fading and its efficient
receiver architecture.
The following figure 3-1 shows a representation of an OFDM signal (3GPP TR 25.892
[2]). In this figure, a signal with 5 MHz bandwidth is shown, but the principle is of course
the same for the other E-UTRA bandwidths. Data symbols are independently modulated
and transmitted over a high number of closely spaced orthogonal subcarriers. In E-UTRA,
downlink modulation schemes QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM are available.
In the time domain, a guard interval may be added to each symbol to combat inter-OFDMsymbol-interference due to channel delay spread. In E-UTRA, the guard interval is a
cyclic prefix which is inserted prior to each OFDM symbol.

Fig. 3-1: Frequency-Time Representation of an OFDM Signal (3GPP TR 25.892 [2])

In practice, the OFDM signal can be generated using the inverse fast Fourier transform
(IFFT) digital signal processing, as described in 3GPP TS 25.892, Feasibility Study for
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) for UTRAN enhancement (Release
6). The IFFT converts a number N of complex data symbols used as frequency domain
bins into the time domain signal. Such an N-point IFFT is illustrated in figure 3-2, where
a(mN+n) refers to the nth subchannel modulated data symbol, during the time period
mTu < t (m+1)Tu.

Fig. 3-2: OFDM useful symbol generation using an IFFT (3GPP TR 25.892 [2])

The vector sm is defined as the useful OFDM symbol. It is the time superposition of the
N narrowband modulated subcarriers. Therefore, from a parallel stream of N sources of

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

17

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

data, each one independently modulated, a waveform composed of N orthogonal subcarriers is obtained, with each subcarrier having the shape of a frequency sinc function
(see figure 3-1).
The figure 3-3 illustrates the mapping from a serial stream of QAM symbols to N parallel
streams, used as frequency domain bins for the IFFT. The N-point time domain blocks
obtained from the IFFT are then serialized to create a time domain signal. Not shown in
the figure is the process of cyclic prefix insertion.

Fig. 3-3: OFDM Signal Generation Chain (3GPP TR 25.892 [2])

In contrast to an OFDM transmission scheme, OFDMA allows the access of multiple


users on the available bandwidth. Each user is assigned a specific time-frequency
resource. As a fundamental principle of E-UTRA, the data channels are shared channels,
i.e. for each transmission time interval of 1 ms, a new scheduling decision is taken
regarding which users are assigned to which time/frequency resources during this transmission time interval.

3.2.1 OFDMA Parameterization


Two radio frame structures, one for FDD (frame structure type 1) and one for TDD (frame
structure type 2) mode are defined. These EUTRA frame structures are described in
3GPP TS 36.211 [3].
3.2.1.1

Frame structure type 1 (FDD)


The FDD frame structures type 1 is based on a 10 ms radio frame that is divided into 20
equally sized slots of 0.5 ms. A subframe consists of two consecutive slots, so one radio
frame contains 10 subframes.
The figure below illustrates frame structure type 1 (Ts is expressing the basic time unit
corresponding to 30.72 MHz). Frame format 1 is applicable to both full and half duplex
FDD.

Fig. 3-4: Frame format 1 (FDD mode)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

18

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

For information on the related settings, refer to "Duplexing" on page 79, chapter 7.5,
"DL Frame Configuration Settings", on page 127 and chapter 7.11, "OFDMA Timeplan", on page 176.
3.2.1.2

Frame structure type 2 (TDD)


The TDD frame format 2 is also based on a 10 ms radio frame, but the frame is divided
into two half-frames, 5 ms each. Each half-frame consists of five 1 ms long subframes,
which are reserved either for downlink or uplink transmission or are caring special information (see figure below).

Fig. 3-5: Frame format 2 (TDD mode), 5 ms switching periodicity

All non-special subframes are divided into two 0.5 ms long slots. The special subframes
consist of three fields DwPTS (Downlink Pilot Timeslot), GP (Guard Period) and UpPTS
(Uplink Pilot Timeslot) which length can vary in specified limits so that the total special
subframe's length is maintained constant (1 ms). The 3GPP specification defines nine
special subframe configurations per cyclic prefix type that specified the allowed DwPTS/
GP/UpPTS lengths' combinations.
The 3GPP specification defines seven different uplink-downlink configurations, i.e.
defines the downlink-to-uplink switch-point periodicity (5 ms or 10 ms) and the allowed
combination of downlink, uplink and special slots. In all the uplink-downlink configurations
and for any downlink-to-uplink switch-point periodicity, subframe 0, subframe 5 and
DwPTS are always reserved for downlink transmission and UpPTS and the subframe
following the special subframe are always reserved for uplink transmission.
The table below shows the supported uplink-downlink configurations according to TS
36.211 [3], where "D" denotes a subframe reserved for downlink transmission, "U"
denotes a subframe reserved for uplink transmission, and "S" denotes the special subframe.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

19

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Fig. 3-6: Uplink-downlink configurations

For information on the related settings, refer to "Duplexing" on page 79, chapter 7.4.4,
"TDD Frame Structure Settings", on page 118 and chapter 7.18, "TDD Timeplan",
on page 230.

3.2.2 Downlink Resource Grid


The figure 3-7 shows the structure of the downlink resource grid for the duration of one
subcarriers with a spacdownlink slot. The available downlink bandwidth consists of
ing of f = 15 kHz. In the case of multi-cell MBMS transmission, a subcarrier spacing of
f = 7.5 kHz is also possible.
can vary in order to allow for scalable bandwidth operation up to 20 MHz. Initially, the bandwidths for LTE were explicitly defined within layer
1 specifications. Later on a bandwidth agnostic layer 1 was introduced, with
for the
different bandwidths to be specified by 3GPP RAN4 to meet performance requirements,
e.g. for out-of-band emission requirements and regulatory emission limits.

Fig. 3-7: Downlink Resource Grid (3GPP TS 36.211 [3])

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

20

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

One downlink slot consists of


OFDM symbols. To each symbol, a cyclic prefix (CP)
is appended as guard time, compare figure 3-1.
depends on the cyclic prefix length.
The generic frame structure with normal cyclic prefix length contains
= 7 symbols.
This translates into a cyclic prefix length of TCP5.2s for the first symbol and TCP4.7s
for the remaining 6 symbols. Additionally, an extended cyclic prefix is defined in order to
cover large cell scenarios with higher delay spread and MBMS transmission. The generic
= 6 OFDM symframe structure with extended cyclic prefix of TCP-E16.7s contains
bols (subcarrier spacing 15 kHz). The generic frame structure with extended cyclic prefix
of TCP-E33.3s contains
= 3 symbols (subcarrier spacing 7.5 kHz). The table 3-1
gives an overview of the different parameters for the generic frame structure.
Table 3-1: Parameters for Downlink Generic Frame Structure
Configuration

Number of symbols

Cyclic Prefix length,


samples

Cyclic Prefix length, us

Normal cyclic prefix

160 for first symbol

5.2 us for first symbol

144 for other symbols

4.7 us for other symbols

f=15 kHz
Extended cyclic prefix
f=15 kHz

512

16.7 us

Extended cyclic prefix


f=7.5 kHz

1024

33.3 us

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.11, "OFDMA Timeplan",
on page 176 and chapter 7.18, "TDD Timeplan", on page 230.

3.2.3 Downlink Data Transmission


Data is allocated to the UEs in terms of resource blocks. A physical resource block consists of 12 (24) consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain for the f=15 kHz
(f=7.5 kHz) case. In the time domain, a physical resource block consists of DL Nsymb
consecutive OFDM symbols, see figure 3-7. NDLsymb is equal to the number of OFDM
symbols in a slot. The resource block size is the same for all bandwidths, therefore the
number of available physical resource blocks depends on the bandwidth. Depending on
the required data rate, each UE can be assigned one or more resource blocks in each
transmission time interval of 1 ms. The scheduling decision is done in the base station
(eNodeB). The user data is carried on the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.6, "Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH
and PMCH Settings", on page 137.

3.2.4 Downlink Control Information Transmission


Control Information is mapped to the resource elements in terms of resource elements
groups (REG). A REG consists of four consequent resource elements within one resource
block which are not used for cell-specific reference signals. Thus, there are two types of
resource blocks, resource blocks containing three REGs and resource blocks containing
only two REGs.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

21

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Two REGs are available within the OFDM symbols with allocated reference signals, i.e.
the OFDM symbol 0 in the first slot in a subframe, as well as in the OFDM symbol 1 in
case of four-antenna system. Three REGs are then available in the OFDM symbols 2,
as well as in the OFDM symbol 1 in case of one- or two-antenna system (see figure 3-8 and figure 3-9).

Fig. 3-8: Resource elements groups (REG)

Three physical DL channels are carrying the control information: the Physical Control
Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH), the Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel
(PHICH) and the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH).

The PCFICH carries the information about the number of OFDM Symbols used for
transmission of PDCCH in a subframe and is mapped to four REGs within the first
OFDM Symbol.

The PHICH carries the HARQ ACK/NACK messages and is transmitted in terms of
PHICH groups. A PHICH group uses three REGs. For normal CP, a PHICH group
consists of up to eight ACK/NACK messages. Four ACK/NACK messages are carried
by one PHICH group if an extended CP is used.
For frame format 1 and non-MBSFN transmission, the PHICH can be transmitted over
only the first OFDM symbol (this is the so called normal PHICH duration) or in case
of extended PHICH duration, over the first three OFDM symbols.

Downlink control signaling on the Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) is


used to convey the scheduling decisions to individual UEs. The PDCCH is located in
the first OFDM symbols of a slot.
The maximum number of OFDM symbols used for the transmission of a PDCCH is
determined by the number of RB used, i.e. for channel bandwidth with less than or
equal to 10 RBs, four OFDM symbols are necessary (OFDM symbol 0...3) and
respectively for channel bandwidths greater than 10 RBs three OFDM symbols are
sufficient (OFDM symbol 0...2).
The minimum number of OFDM symbols used for the transmission of a PDCCH is
determined by the PHICH duration and the channel bandwidth.
The PDCCH is mapped to the REGs not used for PHICH and PCFICH and transmitted
on one or several control channel elements (CCEs), where a CCE corresponds to 9
REGs.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

22

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

For information on the related settings, refer to "PHICH Duration" on page 123 and
chapter 7.7, "Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration",
on page 144.

3.2.5 Downlink Reference Signal Structure and Cell Search


The downlink reference signal structure is important for cell search, channel estimation
and neighbor cell monitoring.
For the LTE downlink, four types of reference signals are defined:

Cell-specific downlink reference signals


The cell-specific reference signal are common signals in a cell, that are intended for
all UE within this cell.

chapter 3.2.5.2, "MBSFN reference signals", on page 25


These reference signals are used for channel estimation and demodulation of signals
transmitted by means of MBSFN.

UE-specific reference signal


These reference signals are intended for a specific user.

chapter 3.2.5.4, "Positioning reference signals", on page 27

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.4.8, "Downlink Reference Signal
Structure", on page 124.
3.2.5.1

Cell-specific downlink reference signals


The figure 3-9 shows the principle of the downlink reference signal structure for oneantenna, two-antenna, and four-antenna transmission (antenna ports 0 .. 3). Specific
predefined resource elements in the time-frequency domain carry the reference signal
sequence. Besides first reference symbols, there may be a need for second reference
symbols. The different colors in the figure represent the sequences transmitted from up
to four transmit antennas.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

23

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Fig. 3-9: Downlink Reference Signal Structure (Normal Cyclic Prefix)

The reference signal sequence carries the cell identity. There are 504 unique physical
layer cell identities, grouped into 168 unique physical cell identity groups that contain
three unique identities each. Each reference signal is generated as a pseudo-random
sequence that depends on the physical layer cell identity.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

24

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Frequency hopping can be applied to the downlink reference signals. The frequency
hopping pattern has a period of one frame (10 ms).
During cell search, different types of information need to be identified by the handset:
symbol and radio frame timing, frequency, cell identification, overall transmission bandwidth, antenna configuration, and cyclic prefix length.
Besides the reference signals, synchronization signals are therefore needed during cell
search. EUTRA uses a hierarchical cell search scheme similar to WCDMA. This means
that the synchronization acquisition and the cell group identifier are obtained from different SYNC signals. Thus, a primary synchronization signal (P-SYNC) and a secondary
synchronization signal (S-SYNC) are defined with a pre-defined structure. They are
transmitted on the 72 center subcarriers (around DC subcarrier) within the same predefined slots (twice per 10 ms) on different resource elements, see figure 3-10. This figure
is taken from 3GPP TS 36.211, Physical Channels and Modulation (Release 8).

Fig. 3-10: P-SYNC and S-SYNC Structure (Normal CP; 1.25MHz bandwidth)

As additional help during cell search, a common control physical channel (CCPCH) is
available which carries BCH type of information, e.g. system bandwidth. It is transmitted
at predefined time instants on the 72 subcarriers centered around the DC subcarrier.
In order to enable the UE to support this cell search concept, it was agreed to have a
minimum UE bandwidth reception capability of 20 MHz.
For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.4.9, "Synchronization Signal
Settings", on page 125.
3.2.5.2

MBSFN reference signals


MBSFN reference signals are defined fro extended cyclic prefix only. The MBSFN reference signals are transmitted on antenna port 4 and only when the PMCH is transmitted.
The figure 3-11 shows the resource elements used by the MBSFN reference signal in
case of f=15 kHz .

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

25

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Fig. 3-11: MNSFN reference signal structure (extended cyclic prefix, carrier spacing 15 KHz)

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.4.2, "MBSFN Settings",
on page 103.
3.2.5.3

UE-specific reference signal


These reference signals are intended for a specific user and mapped to predefined
PDSCH RBs of this particular user. The resource elements predefined for the UE-specific
RS do not overlap with the resource elements reserved for the cell-specific reference
signals.
In case of single-antenna transmission, the UE-specific reference signals are transmitted
on antenna port 5, 7 or 8. If a spatial multiplexing is applied, the UE-specific reference
signals are transmitted on antenna ports 7 and 8.
The UE-specific RS are intended to be used for channel estimation and demodulation
instead of the common reference signals. One typical example of the application of UEspecific RS is the channel estimation and demodulation in case of beamforming transmission, also called transmission using antenna port 5.
In contrary to the common RS that are not precoded, the UE-specific RS are precoded
in the same way as the PDSCH they are mapped to.
The following figures show the mapping of the UE-specific reference signals to the
resource elements.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

26

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Downlink Transmission Scheme

Fig. 3-12: UE-specific reference signals, antenna port 5 (normal cyclic prefix)

Fig. 3-13: UE-specific reference signals, antenna ports 7 and 8 (normal cyclic prefix, downlink subframe)

3.2.5.4

Positioning reference signals


The positioning reference signals are transmitted only in downlink subframes configured
for positioning reference signals transmission. Positioning reference signals are transmitted on antenna port 6.
The figure 3-14 shows the mapping of the positioning reference signals for the one and
two PBCH antenna ports case (normal cyclic prefix). Refer to the specification for information about the mapping in all other cases.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

27

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme

Fig. 3-14: Mapping of PRS (normal cyclic prefix), one and two PBCH antenna ports.

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.4.10, "Positioning Reference
Signal Settings", on page 125 .

3.2.6 Downlink Physical Layer Procedures


For E-UTRA, the following downlink physical layer procedures are especially important:

Cell search and synchronization


See above.

Scheduling
Scheduling is done in the base station (eNodeB). The downlink control channel
PDCCH informs the users about their allocated time/frequency resources and the
transmission formats to use. The scheduler evaluates different types of information,
e.g. quality of service parameters, measurements from the UE, UE capabilities, and
buffer status.

Link adaptation
Link adaptation is already known from HSDPA as adaptive modulation and coding.
Also in E-UTRA, modulation and coding for the shared data channel is not fixed, but
rather is adapted according to radio link quality. For this purpose, the UE regularly
reports channel quality indications (CQI) to the eNodeB.

Hybrid automatic repeat request (ARQ)


Downlink hybrid ARQ is also known from HSDPA. It is a retransmission protocol. The
UE can request retransmissions of incorrectly received data packets.

3.3 LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme


During the study item phase of LTE, alternatives for the optimum uplink transmission
scheme were investigated. While OFDMA is seen optimum to fulfill the LTE requirements
in downlink, OFDMA properties are less favorable for the uplink. This is mainly due to

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

28

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme

weaker peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) properties of an OFDMA signal, resulting in


worse uplink coverage.
Thus, the LTE uplink transmission scheme for FDD and TDD mode is based on SC-FDMA
(Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access) with cyclic prefix. SC-FDMA signals
have better PAPR properties compared to an OFDMA signal. This was one of the main
reasons for selecting SC-FDMA as LTE uplink access scheme. The PAPR characteristics
are important for cost-effective design of UE power amplifiers. Still, SC-FDMA signal
processing has some similarities with OFDMA signal processing, so parameterization of
downlink and uplink can be harmonized.
There are different possibilities how to generate an SC-FDMA signal. DFT-spread-OFDM
(DFT-s-OFDM) has been selected for EUTRA. The principle is illustrated in the figure
below. This figure is taken from 3GPP R1-050584, "EUTRA Uplink Numerology and
Design".
For DFT-s-OFDM, a size-M DFT is first applied to a block of M modulation symbols.
QPSK, 16QAM and 64 QAM are used as uplink EUTRA modulation schemes, the latter
being optional for the UE. The DFT transforms the modulation symbols into the frequency
domain. The result is mapped onto the available subcarriers. In EUTRA uplink, only
localized transmission on consecutive subcarriers is allowed. An N point IFFT where N>M
is then performed as in OFDM, followed by addition of the cyclic prefix and parallel to
serial conversion.

Fig. 3-15: Block Diagram of DFT-s-OFDM (Localized Transmission)

The DFT processing is therefore the fundamental difference between SC-FDMA and
OFDMA signal generation. This is indicated by the term DFT-spread-OFDM. In an
SCFDMA signal, each sub-carrier used for transmission contains information of all transmitted modulation symbols, since the input data stream has been spread by the DFT
transform over the available sub-carriers. In contrast to this, each sub-carrier of an
OFDMA signal only carries information related to specific modulation symbols.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

29

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme

3.3.1 SC-FDMA Parameterization


The EUTRA uplink structure is similar to the downlink. An uplink radio frame consists of
20 slots of 0.5 ms each, and 1 subframe consists of 2 slots. The slot structure is shown
in the figure below. This figure is taken from 3GPP TS 36.211, Physical Channels and
Modulation (Release 8).
SC-FDMA symbols, where
= 7 for the normal cyclic prefix and
Each slot carries
= 6 for the extended cyclic prefix. SC-FDMA symbol number 3 (i.e. the 4th symbol
in a slot) carries the reference signal for channel demodulation.

Fig. 3-16: Uplink Slot Structure

Also for the uplink, a bandwidth agnostic layer 1 specification has been selected. The
table below shows the configuration parameters in an overview table.
Configuration

Normal cyclic prefix

Number of symbols

f=15 kHz
Extended cyclic prefix
f=15 kHz

Cyclic Prefix length in


samples

Cyclic Prefix length in

160 for first symbol

5.2 us for first symbol

144 for other symbols

4.7 us for other symbols

512

16.7 us

us

For information on the related settings, refer to "Link Direction" on page 79, chapter 7.4.4, "TDD Frame Structure Settings", on page 118, .chapter 7.17, "SC-FDMA
Timeplan", on page 229 and chapter 7.18, "TDD Timeplan", on page 230.

3.3.2 Uplink Data Transmission


In uplink, data is allocated in multiples of one resource block. Uplink resource block size
in the frequency domain is 12 sub-carriers, i.e. the same as in downlink. However, not all
integer multiples are allowed in order to simplify the DFT design in uplink signal processing. Only factors 2, 3, and 5 are allowed.
The uplink transmission time interval (TTI) is 1 ms (same as downlink).
User data is carried on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

30

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.12.6, "PUSCH Structure",
on page 185, chapter 7.14.5, "Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)",
on page 208 and chapter 7.15, "Enhanced PUSCH Settings", on page 221.

3.3.3 Uplink Control Information Transmission


In uplink, the control information is carried by the Physical Uplink Shared Channel
(PUSCH) or by the Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), depending on whether an
uplink resource has been assigned to the user or not.
Control information (CQI reports and ACK/NACK information related to data packets
received in the downlink) is multiplexed with the PUSCH, if the user has been granted
with UL-SCH transmission.
The PUCCH carries uplink control information, e.g. CQI reports, HARQ ACK/NACK information or Scheduling Requests (SR), in case the user has not been assigned an UL-SCH
transmission. The PUCCH is transmitted on a reserved frequency region at the edges of
the total available bandwidth in the UL. One PUCCH resource comprises a pair of
resource blocks within slot 0 and 1 that are located in the upper and the lower part of the
spectrum. PUCCH is allocated as shown on the figure 3-17 (taken from 3GPP TS 36.211,
Physical Channels and Modulation (Release 8)).

Fig. 3-17: PUCCH Mapping

According to 3GPP 36.211, seven PUCCH formats are defined (see table 3-2).
Table 3-2: PUCCH formats
PUCCH format

Description

Physical Bits

Modulation
Scheme

ODFM Symbols used for


DRS

ODFM Symbols used for


DRS

(normal CP)

(extended CP)

Scheduling
Request

2, 3, 4

2, 3

1a

ACK/NACK

BPSK

2, 3, 4

2, 3

1b

ACK/NACK for
MIMO

QPSK

2, 3, 4

2, 3

CQI

20

QPSK

1, 5

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

31

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme

PUCCH format

Description

Physical Bits

Modulation
Scheme

ODFM Symbols used for


DRS

ODFM Symbols used for


DRS

(normal CP)

(extended CP)

2a

CQI and ACK/


NACK

21

QPSK+BPSK

1, 5

2b

CQI and ACK/


22
NACK for MIMO

QPSK+QPSK

1, 5

ACK/NACK if
DL carrier
aggregatin with
more than 2
cells

QPSK

1, 5

48

The different PUCCH formats are mapped to the reserved PUCCH region, so that there
can be only one resource block per slot that supports a combination of PUCCH formats
1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b.
For simultaneous transmission of multiple users on the PUCCH, different PUCCH
resource indices are used. Multiple users are distinguished within one resource block by
using different cyclic shifts (CS) of the CAZAC (Constant Amplitude Zero Auto-Correlation) sequence. For PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b additionally three different orthogonal cover
sequences (OC) can be used. For the different PUCCH formats, different number of
PUCCH resource indices are available within a resource block (see table below). The
actual number of the used orthogonal sequences is additionally determinate by the
parameter delta_shift, used to support working by different channel conditions.
PUCCH format

PUCCH resource indices

number available within a


resource block

1/1a/1b

N(1)_PUCCH

36 for normal CP
24 for extended CP

2/2a/2b

N(2)_PUCCH

12

N(3)_PUCCH

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.12.7, "PUCCH Structure",
on page 185 and chapter 7.16, "Enhanced PUCCH Settings", on page 226.

3.3.4 Uplink Reference Signal Structure


Uplink reference signals are used for two different purposes: on the one hand, they are
used for channel estimation in the eNodeB receiver in order to demodulate control and
data channels. On the other hand, the reference signals provide channel quality information as a basis for scheduling decisions in the base station. The latter purpose is also
called channel sounding.
The uplink reference signals are based on CAZAC (Constant Amplitude Zero Auto- Correlation) sequences.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

32

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE Uplink Transmission Scheme

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.12.4, "UL Reference Signals",
on page 182, chapter 7.12.8, "SRS Structure", on page 188, chapter 7.14.6, "Reference
Signal Structure", on page 211 and chapter 7.14.7, "SRS Structure", on page 212.

3.3.5 Uplink Physical Layer Procedures


For EUTRA, the following uplink physical layer procedures are especially important:
Non-synchronized random access
The random access may be used to request initial access, as part of handover, when
transiting from idle to connected, or to re-establish uplink synchronization. The structure
is shown in the figure below. This figure is taken from 3GPP TS 36.211, Physical Channels and Modulation (Release 8).

Fig. 3-18: Random Access Structure, principle

Multiple random access channels may be defined in the frequency domain within one
access period TRA in order to provide a sufficient number of random access opportunities.
For the random access, a preamble is defined as shown in the figure below. This figure
is taken from 3GPP TS 36.211, Physical Channels and Modulation (Release 8). The
preamble length depends on the preamble format. The preamble bandwidth is 1.08 MHz
(72 subcarriers). Higher layer signaling controls in which subframes the preamble transmission is allowed, and the location in the frequency domain. Per cell, there are 64 random access preambles. They are generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

33

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE MIMO Concepts

Fig. 3-19: Random Access Preamble

The random access procedure uses open loop power control with power ramping similar
to WCDMA. After sending the preamble on a selected random access channel, the UE
waits for the random access response message. If no response is detected then another
random access channel is selected and a preamble is sent again.
For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.12.5, "PRACH Settings",
on page 183, chapter 7.14.8, "PRACH Power Ramping", on page 219 and chapter 7.14.9, "PRACH Configuration", on page 219.
Uplink scheduling
Scheduling of uplink resources is done by eNodeB. The eNodeB assigns certain time/
frequency resources to the UEs and informs UEs about transmission formats to use.
Scheduling decisions affecting the uplink are communicated to the UEs via the Physical
Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) in the downlink. The scheduling decisions may be
based on QoS parameters, UE buffer status, uplink channel quality measurements, UE
capabilities, UE measurement gaps, etc.
Uplink link adaptation
As uplink link adaptation methods, transmission power control, adaptive modulation and
channel coding rate, as well as adaptive transmission bandwidth can be used.
Uplink timing control
Uplink timing control is needed to time align the transmissions from different UEs with
the receiver window of the eNodeB. The eNodeB sends the appropriate timing-control
commands to the UEs in the downlink, commanding them to adapt their respective transmit timing.
Hybrid automatic repeat request (ARQ)
The Uplink Hybrid ARQ protocol is already known from HSUPA. The eNodeB has the
capability to request retransmissions of incorrectly received data packets.

3.4 LTE MIMO Concepts


Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) systems form an essential part of LTE in order to
achieve the ambitious requirements for throughput and spectral efficiency. MIMO refers
to the use of multiple antennas at transmitter and receiver side.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

34

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE MIMO Concepts

3.4.1 Downlink MIMO


For the LTE downlink, a 2x2 configuration for MIMO is assumed as baseline configuration, i.e. 2 transmit antennas at the base station and 2 receive antennas at the terminal
side. Configurations with 4 or more antennas are also being considered.
Different MIMO modes are envisaged. It has to be differentiated between spatial multiplexing and transmit diversity, and it depends on the channel condition which scheme to
select.
For information on the related settings, refer to

3.4.1.1

chapter 7.4.6, "MIMO", on page 119

chapter 7.6.2, "Precoding Settings", on page 138

chapter 7.9, "Antenna Port Mapping Settings", on page 172.

Spatial Multiplexing
Spatial multiplexing allows transmitting different streams of data simultaneously on the
same downlink resource block(s). These data streams can belong to one single user
(single user MIMO / SU-MIMO) or to different users (multi user MIMO / MU-MIMO). While
SU-MIMO increases the data rate of one user, MU-MIMO allows increasing the overall
capacity. Spatial multiplexing is only possible if the mobile radio channel allows it. The
figure below shows the principle of spatial multiplexing, exploiting the spatial dimension
of the radio channel which allows transmitting the different data streams simultaneously.

Fig. 3-20: Spatial multiplexing

In the figure above, each transmit antenna transmits a different data stream. Each receive
antenna may receive the data streams from all transmit antennas. The channel (for a
specific delay) can thus be described by the following channel matrix H:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

35

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE MIMO Concepts

In this general description, Nt is the number of transmit antennas, Nr is the number of


receive antennas, resulting in a 2x2 matrix for the baseline LTE scenario. The coefficients
hij of this matrix are called channel coefficients from transmit antenna j to receive antenna
i, thus describing all possible paths between transmitter and receiver side.
The number of data streams that can be transmitted in parallel over the MIMO channel
is given by min {Nt, Nr} and is limited by the rank of the matrix H. The transmission quality
degrades significantly in case the singular values of matrix H are not sufficiently strong.
This can happen in case the 2 antennas are not sufficiently de-correlated, for example in
an environment with little scattering or when antennas are too closely spaced.
Codewords and spatial layers
A block of information bits that can be separately procesed bofore it is transmitted in a
subframe, is called codeword [17].
A spatial layer indicates the number of spatial streams that can be simultaneously transmitted [17]. The number of layers for transmission is less than or equal to the number of
transmit antenna ports and depends on the rank of the matrix H.
In LTE, up to 2 codewords can be transmitted simultaneously and mapped onto different
layers. There is a fixed mapping between codewords to layers.
Precoding
Precoding on transmitter side is used to support spatial multiplexing, see figure below.
This is achieved by applying a precoding matrix W to the signal before transmission. The
figure is taken from [3] 3GPP TS 36.211, Physical Channels and Modulation (Release
8).

Fig. 3-21: Precoding principle

The optimum precoding matrix W is selected from a predefined "codebook" which is


known at eNodeB and UE side. Unitary precoding is used, i.e. the precoding matrices
are unitary: WHW = I. The UE estimates the radio channel and selects the optimum precoding matrix. The optimum precoding matrix is the one which offers maximum capacity.
The UE provides feedback on the uplink control channel regarding the preferred precoding matrix (precoding vector as a special case). Ideally, this information is made available
per resource block or at least group of resource blocks, since the optimum precoding
matrix varies between resource blocks. Figure below gives an overview of EUTRA downlink baseband signal generation including the above-mentioned steps relevant for MIMO
transmission. This figure is taken from [3] 3GPP TS 36.211, Physical Channels and
Modulation (Release 8).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

36

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE MIMO Concepts

Fig. 3-22: Overview of downlink baseband signal generation

Transmission modes
LTE defines the following transmission modes for the PDSCH [5].
Table 3-3: Transmission modes overview

3.4.1.2

Transmission mode

Transmission scheme

Tx Mode 1

Single-antenna transmission (antenna port 0), no MIMO

Tx Mode 2

Transmit diversity

Tx Mode 3

Transmit diversity
Open-loop spatial multiplexing with large delay CDD

Tx Mode 4

Transmit diversity
Closed-loop spatial multiplexing

Tx Mode 5

Transmit diversity
Multi-user MIMO

Tx Mode 6

Transmit diversity
Closed-loop spatial multiplexing using a single transmission layer

Tx Mode 7 (Beamforming)

Single-antenna port transmission; antenna port 5

Tx Mode 8

Dual layer transmission; antenna port 7 and 8


Single-antenna port; antenna port 7 or 8

Transmit Diversity
Instead of increasing data rate or capacity, MIMO can be used to exploit diversity. Transmit diversity schemes are already known from WCDMA release 99 and will also form part
of LTE as one MIMO mode. In case the channel conditions do not allow spatial multiplexing, a transmit diversity scheme will be used instead, so switching between these two
MIMO modes is possible depending on channel conditions. Transmit diversity is used
when the selected number of streams (rank) is one.

3.4.1.3

Beamforming
The beamforming is a method to shape the transmitted signal in the receiver's direction.
In LTE, the beamforming is defined as transmission mode 7 (Tx Mode 7). Beamforming
uses the special virtual antenna port 5 and is also called antenna port 5 transmission.
The channel estimation in a beamforming scenario is based on the UE-specific reference
signal.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

37

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE MBMS Concepts

3.4.2 Uplink MIMO


Uplink MIMO schemes for LTE will differ from downlink MIMO schemes to take into
account terminal complexity issues. For the uplink, MU-MIMO can be used. Multiple user
terminals may transmit simultaneously on the same resource block. This is also referred
to as spatial domain multiple access (SDMA). The scheme requires only one transmit
antenna at UE side which is a big advantage. The UEs sharing the same resource block
have to apply mutually orthogonal pilot patterns.
To exploit the benefit of two or more transmit antennas but still keep the UE cost low,
antenna subset selection can be used. In the beginning, this technique will be used, e.g.
a UE will have two transmit antennas but only one transmits chain and amplifier. A switch
will then choose the antenna that provides the best channel to the eNodeB.

3.5 LTE MBMS Concepts


Support of MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services) is an essential requirement
for LTE. The so-called E-MBMS will therefore be an integral part of LTE.
In LTE, MBMS transmissions may be performed as single-cell transmission or as multicell transmission. In case of multi-cell transmission the cells and content are synchronized
to enable for the terminal to soft-combine the energy from multiple transmissions. The
superimposed signal looks like multipath to the terminal. This concept is also known as
Single Frequency Network (SFN). The EUTRAN can configure which cells are part of an
SFN for transmission of an MBMS service. The MBMS traffic can share the same carrier
with the unicast traffic or be sent on a separate carrier. For MBMS traffic, an extended
cyclic prefix is provided. In case of subframes carrying MBMS SFN data, specific reference signals are used (see chapter 3.2.5.2, "MBSFN reference signals", on page 25).
MBMS data is carried on the MBMS traffic channel (MTCH) as logical channel. The
MBMS control information is conveyed by the MBMS control channel MCCH. Both logical
channels, the MTCH and the MCCH, are mapped onto the physical multicast channel
PMCH in the multi-cell transmission case and on the PDSCH in case a single-cell transmission is used.
For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.4.2, "MBSFN Settings",
on page 103.

3.6 LTE-Advanced Introduction


In September 2009 the 3GPP Partners made a formal submission to the ITU proposing
that LTE Release 10 & beyond (LTE-Advanced) should be evaluated as a candidate for
IMT-Advanced.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

38

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE-Advanced Introduction

This description gives a brief description only of the LTE-A features currently covered by
the software option R&S SMx/AMU-K85. The full set of LTE-Advanced features is described in [20].
For a complete LTE-Advanced technology introduction and an insight description of the
LTE-A features, refer to the following Rohde & Schwarz documents:

Withe Paper 1MA169 "LTE-Advanced Technology Introduction" [18]

Application Note 1MA166 LTE-Advanced Signals Generation and Analysis [19]

The last two documents can be found in the official Rohde & Schwarz internet site >
Download Area > Application Notes: http://www2.rohde-schwarz.com/en/service_and_support/Downloads/Application_Notes/

3.6.1 Carrier Aggregation


To fulfill the requirements to even higher data rates as in the LTE Rel. 8, the LTE-A Rel.
10 specification uses the aggregation of multiple LTE carrier. Two or more component
carrier (CC) are grouped in order to support wider transmission bandwidths up to
100MHz. To an LTE REl. 8 terminal, each component carrier will appear as an LTE carrier, while an LTE Rel 10 terminal can exploit the total aggregated bandwidth. As backward compatibility is fulfilled, a LTE-advanced cell can serve both LTE Rel 8 and LTE Rel
10 terminals simultaneously.
Spectrum deployment may be either contiguous with adjacent component carriers, or
non-contiguous with non-adjacent component carriers (see figure 3-23). The individual
component carriers may belong to the same frequency band (intra-band) or even to different frequency bands (inter-band). Component carriers transmitted by the same eNodeB provide the same cell coverage.

Fig. 3-23: Carrier aggregation [18]

The LTE-A specification defines two different approaches about informing the UE about
the scheduling for each band: a separate PDCCH for each carrier or a common PDCCH
for multiple carriers (cross-carrier scheduling).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

39

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE-Advanced Introduction

Fig. 3-24: LTE-A scheduling approaches

In the dedicated/non-cross-carrier approach, the PDCCH on a component carrier assigns


PDSCH resources on the same component carrier. The used PDCCH structure is identical to the LTE Rel. 8/9 PDCCH structure.
In the cross-carrier approach, the PDCCH on a component carrier assigns resources on
one of multiple component carriers. The component carriers are identified by the new
introduced DCI field, the CIF (carrier indicator field).
For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.4.1, "DL Carrier Aggregation
Configuration", on page 98, chapter 7.7, "Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH
Channel Configuration", on page 144 and chapter 7.8, "User Configuration Settings",
on page 169.

3.6.2 Enhanced Uplink SC-FDMA


The LTE-A Rel 10 enhances the uplink transmission scheme compared to the LTE Rel.
8 uplink with the following:

Control-data decoupling
In LTE Rel 8/9 a UE only uses physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) when it does
not have any data to transmit on PUSCH. I.e. if a UE has data to transmit on PUSCH,
it would multiplex the control information with data on PUSCH. This is not longer valid

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

40

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE-Advanced Introduction

in LTE-Advanced, which means that simultaneous PUCCH and PUSCH transmission


is possible in uplink direction.

Non-contiguous data transmission


LTE-Advanced extends the uplink transmission scheme by allowing clustered
PUSCH, i.e. the uplink transmission is not anymore restricted to the use of consecutive subcarriers, but clusters of resource blocks may be allocated (two "Sets" of
consecutive PUSCH resource block groups according to resource allocation type 1
as defined in TS 36.213).

Fig. 3-25: LTE release 8 and LTE-A Release 10 UL transmission schemes [18]

For information on the related settings, refer to chapter 7.13, "UL Frame Configuration
Settings", on page 189 and chapter 7.14, "User Equipment Configuration",
on page 196.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

41

EUTRA/LTE

Introduction
LTE-Advanced Introduction

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

42

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
OFDMA Parameterization

4 EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
4.1 OFDMA Parameterization

OFDMA physical layer parameterization is based on a bandwidth agnostic layer 1.


However, current 3GPP specifications focus on the channel bandwidth listed in
table 4-1.
Additionally, a user defined channel bandwidth can be configured. To configure the
bandwidth of the signal to be generated, the desired number of resource blocks can
be specified in a range from 6 to 110 resource blocks with a granularity of 1. This
results in bandwidths from 1.095 MHz19.815 MHz.

Table 4-1: Channel Bandwidth for FDD mode according to 3GPP TS 36.804
Physical Settings

1.4 MHz

3 MHz

5 MHz

10 MHz

15 MHz

20 MHz

Physical Settings

12

25

50

75

100

Physical Settings

73

181

301

601

901

1201

Physical Settings

128, 256,
512,
1024,
2048

256, 512,
1024,
2048

512,
1024,
2048

1024,
2048

1536,
2048

2048

Both frame structure, frame structure type 1 for FDD and frame structure type 2 for
TDD, are supported.

For frame structure 2 (TDD mode), all special subframe configurations and all uplinkdownlink configurations as defined in the 3GPP specification are supported.

Both normal and extended cyclic prefix can be selected for a subcarrier spacing of
15 kHz. Parameterization of cyclic prefixes is according to 3GPP TS 36.211.
Note:
In this version, subcarrier spacing is 15 kHz. Subcarrier spacing of 7.5 kHz will be
supported in a later version.

Resource block size is 12 subcarriers in the frequency domain and, depending on


the cyclic prefix length, 7 or 6 consecutive OFDM symbols in the time-domain.
Note:
Resource block size of 24 subcarriers will be supported in a later version.

4.2 Reference Signals

LTE defines one reference signal per downlink antenna port (see table).
In the R&S Signal Generator, the mapping of the logical antenna ports 4 to 8 to the
physcal Tx-antennas is configurable.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

43

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
Synchronization Signal (SYNC)

Antenna Port

Reference Signal

AP0 - AP3

Cell-specific Reference Signals (CS-RS)

AP4

MBSFN-RS

AP5

UE-specific Reference Signals (DM-RS): single-layer

AP6

Positioning Reference Signals (PRS)

AP7-AP8

UE-specific Reference Signals (DM-RS): up to 2 layers

There is a direct mapping of the CS-RS, i.e. antenna port 0 is mapped to Tx-antenna
1 solely, antenna port 1 is mapped to Tx-antenna 2 and so on.

R&S Signal Generator offers to select the physical Tx-antenna to simulate (1, 2, 3,
or 4), and adjust the correct reference signal pattern accordingly. An example for the
possible distribution of downlink reference signals for the normal cyclic prefix is shown
in figure 3-9. The reference signal pattern for the extended cyclic prefix is also done
according to 3GPP TS 36.211.

Availability of secondary CS-RS reference signal, subcarrier offset of the reference


signal sequence in the frequency domain and existence of empty resource elements
depend on the antenna selected.

Reference signal sequences are generated as a pseudo-random sequence. This


sequence is determinate by the cell ID, i.e. the combination of 168 physical cell identity groups and the 3 physical layer identities within each physical layer group.

Generation of reference signals for antenna port 4-8 depend on the availability of
MBSFN, PRS and beamformed PDSCHs.

4.3 Synchronization Signal (SYNC)

Primary and secondary synchronization signal (P-SYNC and S-SYNC) are supported.

In the FDD mode, the P-SYNC and S-SYNC are located on the last two OFDM symbols of slot (see figure 3-10). By default, the synchronization signals are transmitted
in slots 0 and 10 of the radio frame.

P-SYNC and S-SYNC are transmitted within the center 72/64 subcarriers. Resource
blocks containing P-SYNC/ S-SYNC thus have less resource elements available for
user data allocation.

By default, P-SYNC and S-SYNC are enabled but the synchronization signals can
be disabled independently in the signal generator.

Power of the P-SYNC and S-SYNC can be set independently in the signal generator.

4.4 Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)

By default, the PBCH is located over 4 consecutive OFDM symbols in the first four
OFDM symbols (symbol number 0 .. 3) of slot 1 of subframe 0 for normal CP. The

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

44

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH)

default location of the four PBCH symbols for extended CP start in the second OFDM
symbol (symbol number 2..5) of slot 1 of subframe 0. The figure 4-1 shows the default
location of PBCH in case of normal CP.

Fig. 4-1: Default location of PBCH for normal CP

PBCH repetition interval is once per frame of 10 ms. Position of PBCH within the
subframe 0 is according to 3GPP TS 36.211. However, R&S Signal Generator allows
modification of the PBCH in terms of PBCH start symbol within the radio subframe
(0..13 for normal CP) and length in symbols (1..14 for normal CP).

PBCH is QPSK modulated; scrambling and channel coding can be additionally activated or deactivated.

If channel coding is activated, one block of data (Transport Block Size of 24) is coded
jointly and then spread over four frames. Hence, the ARB "Sequence Length" has to
be set accordingly to be a multiple of four.

PBCH is occupying the center 72 subcarriers around DC subcarrier.

4.5 Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH)

PCFICH is QPSK modulated; scrambling can be additionally activated or deactivated.

PCFICH is layer mapped and precoded according to 3GPP TS 36.211.

The power of the PCFICH is configurable.

4.6 Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH)

PHICH is BPSK modulated.

PHICH is layer mapped and precoded according to 3GPP TS 36.211.

Different orthogonal sequences are used for the PHICHs within the same PHICH
group.

The power of the PHICH is configurable.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

45

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)

4.7 Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH)

PDCCH is layer mapped, precoded and mapped to the resource elements (incl. permutation and cyclically shifting) according to 3GPP TS 36.211.

The power of the PDCCH is configurable.

All DCI formats are supported and can be configured with full flexibility.

4.8 Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH)


In this version of the firmware, the following limitations apply:

The simulated BS belongs to only one MBSFN areas.


All radio resources reserved for MBSFN subframes are assigned to one MBSFN area,
i.e. the MBSFN Area fills all MBSFN subframes signaled by SIB Type 2.

Only one MBSFN-SubframeConfig is configurable.

One MCCH per MBSFN is supported. The MCCH is mapped to the first active MBFSN
subframe within one MCCH repetition period.

The parameters "Radio frame allocation offset", "MCCH offset" and "Notification offset" are set to identical values in order to simplify the MBSFN configuration.

4.9 Data Allocations

The Physical Resource Block size is 12 subcarriers in the frequency domain for all
bandwidth options.

Localized transmission is assumed.


For localized transmission, the numbering of resource blocks starts with the left-most
(lower frequency) used subcarriers of the frequency band. The numbering starts with
zero. With the FFT-shift, the DC carrier is moved to the first position, which is required
to be conform to the standard IFFT input. This is illustrated in the figure 4-2.

Fig. 4-2: Numbering of Resource Blocks

According to 3GPP 36.211, the modulated data symbols are mapped onto the subcarriers first along the frequency axis starting with the lowest resource block number,
then along the available OFDM symbols. This is true also for non-adjacent resource
blocks for the same user. This is illustrated in the figure below.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

46

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
Modulation Mapping

Fig. 4-3: Data symbol numbering

In case pre-defined symbols (e.g. reference symbols, P-SYNC/S-SYNC, PBCH) are


transmitted in a subframe, the number of available data symbols for user data allocation is reduced in a resource block.

Data allocation can be changed for each subframe.

PDSCH is scrambled, channel coded, precoded and layer mapped according to


3GPP TS 36.211. Additionally, channel coding configuration can be changed per
PDSCH data allocations.

4.10 Modulation Mapping


The modulation mapping in downlink is done according to 3GPP TS 36.211. All modulation schemes of 3GPP TS 36.211 are supported.

4.11 MIMO

R&S Signal Generator supports all downlink precoding schemes of 3GPP TS 36.211.

R&S Signal Generator supports all downlink layer mapping schemes of 3GPP TS
36.211.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

47

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
SC-FDMA Parameterization

4.12 SC-FDMA Parameterization

SC-FDMA physical layer parameterization is based on a bandwidth agnostic layer 1.


However, current 3GPP specifications focus on the channel bandwidths listed in
table 4-1.
Additionally, a user defined channel bandwidth can be configured. To configure the
bandwidth of the signal to be generated, the desired number of resource blocks can
be specified in a range from 6 to 110 resource blocks with a granularity of 1. This
results in bandwidths from 1.08 MHz19.8 MHz.

Both frame structures according to 3GPP TS 36.211 are supported.

Both normal and extended cyclic prefix are supported.

4.13 Demodulation Reference Signal (DRS)

If the uplink demodulation reference signal (DRS) is multiplexed with the PUSCH, the
DRS is carried within the 3rd or 4th SC-FDMA symbol of a slot (i.e. symbol number
l = 2 or l=3), depending on the cyclic prefix type. If the DRS is multiplexed with the
PUCCH, the SC-FDMA symbol the uplink DRS is carried within depends on the
PUCCH format and the cyclic prefix (see table 3-2).

The demodulation reference signal (DRS) spans the same bandwidth as the data
allocation.

The generation of DRS sequence is according to 3GPP TS 36.211. A CAZAC


sequence is used and the DRS is derived from a Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence using
the extension method.

4.14 Sounding Reference Signal (SRS)

The generation of SRS sequence is according to 3GPP TS 36.211.

Orthogonality of the SRS signal can also be achieved when using different SRS cyclic
shifts.

No PUSCH is transmitted in the symbol where the sounding reference signal is transmitted.

PUCCH and SRS are not transmitted in the same subframe, except the transmission
of SRS and PUCCH format 1, 1a, 1b or 3 in the same subframe is explicitly enabled
for a UE.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

48

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)

4.15 Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH)


If R&S FSQ Signal Analyzer is used for signal analysis of signal generated by the R&S
Signal Generator equipped with option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE, be aware that up
to Release 2.1 of the LTE Option FSQ-K101 the two resource blocks at each edge of the
spectrum are not analyzed.

Position of PUCCH can be configured in terms of PUCCH region.

The content of PUCCH can be set individually for each TTI.

All seven PUCCH formats as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.211 are supported.

One of 12 cyclic shifts (5 for PUCCH format 3) and for PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b one
of three orthogonal codes can be selected indirectly by choosing the appropriate
PUCCH index.

For configuration of multi user PUCCH tests according to 3GPP TS 36.141, annex
A9, set the n_PUCCH parameter to the value defined in table A.9-1, column "RS
orthogonal cover / ACK/NACK orthogonal cover". The R&S Signal Generator calculates and configures automatically the values defined in the columns "Cyclic shift
index" and "Orthogonal cover index".

4.16 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

All PRACH configurations for random access preamble timing for preamble format
0-4 and frame structure type 1 and 2 are supported.

4.17 Data Allocation

Both resource allocation types type 0 and type 1 are supported

Frequency hopping is supported.

Resource block size is 12 subcarriers in the frequency domain.

A generation of uplink signals for up to 4 UEs is supported.

Data can be allocated per subframe.

Channel coding is performed according to 3GPP 36.212.

TTI length is 1 ms.

The modulated data symbols are mapped onto the resource elements according to
3GPP 36.211.

Numbering of subcarriers is done according to the figure 4-4.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

49

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE Parameterization
Modulation Mapping

Fig. 4-4: Numbering of the subcarriers

The baseband signal is shifted in the frequency domain by half a subcarrier distance.
According to 3GPP 36.211, the spectral shift is carried out symbolwise, i.e. per SCFDMA symbol.

4.18 Modulation Mapping

The modulation mapping in uplink is done according to 3GPP TS 36.211. All modulation schemes of 3GPP TS 36.211 are supported.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

50

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

5 R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


The different topics discussed in the following give essential information for better understanding and effective work with R&S Signal Generator equipped with options EUTRA/
LTE R&S SMx/AMU-K55/-K255/-K69/-K81/-K84/-K85. The topics provide information
about some specific functions of the R&S Signal Generator.

5.1 Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator


In 3GPP TS 36.211 [3], physical signals and physical channels are defined for the
EUTRA/LTE system. Therefore the available resources in the time-frequency domain are
shared by the different signals and different kinds of allocations (comparable to the different channel types in the 3GPP FDD mode).

5.1.1 Downlink
In the current R&S Signal Generator release, the following types of signals and channels
for the downlink are supported:

Reference Signal

Primary Synchronization Signal (P-SYNC)

Secondary Synchronization Signal (S-SYNC)

Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH)

Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH), including PCFICH and PHICH

Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH)

Reserved channel

Due to the concept of the R&S Signal Generator different situations may appear that need
clarification. If several signals and/or channels (of the same or different type) partly share
the same resources, a decision has to be made what bits are really mapped to the affected
subcarriers. The general rule here is that the signal or channel with the higher priority is
transmitted completely while the affected subcarriers are stamped out of the lower priority
signal or channel respectively. Note that this reduces the number of available physical
bits of a signal/channel.
The actual size of a certain allocation is displayed in the column Physical Bits of the
resource allocation table.
The following picture shows the priorities of the different signal and channel types.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

51

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

Fig. 5-1: Priority of different allocations, channels and signals in the downlink

Overlapping of signals and/or channels with different priorities


In case signals and/or channels (e.g. P-SYNC and PDSCH) of different priorities
overlap, no conflict is displayed in the resource allocation table, as the signal/channel
with the higher priority is transmitted completely.

Overlapping of allocations with the same priority


If different allocations of the same priority are overlapping, the one with the lower
allocation index (i.e. which comes first) in the resource allocation table is treated with
higher priority. In this case the reduced allocation is marked in the conflict column of
the resource allocation table.

There is no way to configure a signal with overlapping reference signal and P-SYNC/SSYNC.

If PRS and MBSFN is configured to be in the same subframe, MBSFN is skipped and
PRS is transmitted solely.
If a PDSCH is configured to overlap partially with the PRS bandwidth in a PRS subframe,
the PRS in these resource blocks are skipped then (see example "Overlapping PDSCH,
PRS and MBSFN" on page 126).

5.1.2 Uplink
In the uplink implementation of the R&S Signal Generator it is possible to configure different user equipments (UEs) to use the same physical resources. The signals of the
different UEs are simply added, but nevertheless a conflict is indicated in the resource
allocation table.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

52

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

Although a conflict is also displayed if the PUSCH and PUCCH allocations of one UE are
overlapping, the signals of both allocations are added. However, a conflict can occur
between the sounding reference signal of a certain UE and the PUSCH of another UE.

5.1.3 DCI Conflict Handling


The R&S Signal Generator allows you to configure multiple scheduling messages with
their corresponding PDCCHs per subframe. Using the DCI table in the Enhanced
PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration dialog, the position of the DCI/
PDCCH inside the multiplexed bit stream can be freely configured by setting the appropriate CCE index.
Since the number of CCEs for each PDCCH may vary, the 3GPP specification TS 36.211
[3], chapter 6.8.1 defines some restriction on the aggregation of CCEs. An aggregation
of eight CCEs for instance can only start on CCE numbers evenly dividable by eight. The
same principle applies to the other aggregation levels. If this restriction is not fulfilled or
two CCEs are overlapping, a conflict is displayed for the DCI/PDCCH with the greater
number. This DCI/PDCCH is not considered by the multiplexing, i.e. it is not transmitted.
The operations "Append", "Insert", "Delete", "Up", "Down" and "Resolve Conf." are provided for flexibly configuration of valid DCIs and for resolving of conflicts.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

53

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

Example:
In this example, the DCI table of a control channel with a total "Number of 26 Available
CCEs" is configured.
The reason for the conflict displayed for the second DCI/PDCCH is that the CCEs allocated for the second DCI/PDCCH are overlapping with the CCEs used by the first one.
The second DCI/PDCCH is ignored by the multiplexing.

One of the ways to overcome this problem and to resolve the DCI conflict is to use the
Resolve Conflicts function of the software. The built-in algorithm re-assigns automatically
the CCE values depending on the configured "Search Space"; previously configured CCE
values will not be maintained. The calculated signal is suitable for receiver tests that
demand conflict free CCEs but have no requirements on explicit CCE values. If the conflict can not be resolved automatically, the values are left unchanged.
If however there is a requirement for CCE Indexes with explicit values, the corrections
can be performed manually. In this example for example, set the CCE index of the third
DCI/PDCCH to 4.

Now the CCEs used by the two subsequent DCIs/PDCCHs are not overlapping and the
two DCIs/PDCCHS are configured to be transmitted consecutive, i.e. there is no gap
between them ("No. Dummy CCEs" = 0).
The figure below shows the resulting PDCCH after multiplexing for this example.

If "Activate Carrier Aggregation > ON", the parameter DCI Table determines the component carrier the corresponding User is mapped to. For this reason, there is no DCI conflict,
if in the example above the second DCI belongs to a User enabled on an SCell.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

54

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Subframes Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

5.2 Subframes Handling in the R&S Signal Generator


In the following the subframes handling concept and implementation in the R&S Signal
Generator is explained.

5.2.1 Copy/Paste Subframe


In order to simplify the configuration of the EUTRA/LTE signal the user has the possibility
to copy and paste settings from one subframe to another. Note that beside the cyclic
prefix length only the structure of PDCCH and PDSCH allocations for the downlink and
the PUSCH and PUCCH allocations for the uplink are copied. P-SYNC/S-SYNC, PBCH,
PRACH and Sounding Reference Signals are not considered. This is due to the fact that
the P-SYNC/S-SYNC are configured globally in the "General DL Settings" menu and can
therefore not be overwritten in the "Frame Configuration - DL" menu; the PBCH can only
be configured in subframe 0 and can therefore also not be overwritten. Respectively, the
Sounding Reference Signal and the PRACH are configured individually for each user
equipment in the User Equipment Configuration dialog.
Copying allocations from a subframe without P-SYNC/S-SYNC/PBCH to one with PSYNC/S-SYNC/PBCH and vice versa might lead to conflict situations. In this case the
rules discussed in chapter 5.1, "Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator",
on page 51 become effective.
However, configurations can occur where in different subframes allocations which are
identical by means of scheduled resource blocks have a different amount of physical bits
available, due to the out stamping of overlapping subcarriers.

5.2.2 Number of Configurable Subframes


Another possibility to simplify the configuration of the EUTRA/LTE signal for the user is
to configure only a small number of subframes manually and then let the EUTRA/LTE fill
the remaining signal periodically with the configured subframes. Internally the Copy/
Paste Subframe functionality is used, so again only the structure of the PDCCH/PDSCH
in downlink and the PUCCH/PUSCH in uplink are copied, but no P-SYNC/S-SYNC/
PBCH/PRACH or sounding reference signals.

5.2.3 Four Configurable Frames in Uplink and Downlink Direction


The R&S Signal Generator supports the configuration of up to four frames in uplink and
downlink direction. However, there is a limitation for the maximum number of the real
configurable subframes in this four frames depending on the transmission direction and
several other parameters.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

55

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Subframes Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

5.2.3.1

Uplink Direction
In uplink direction, the maximum number of the real configurable uplink subframes
depends on the selected Duplexing mode (TDD or FDD), TDD Frame Structure Settings and whether realtime feedback is enabled or not.
The maximum number of configurable subframes changes as function of the parameters
in the following way:

For Disabled Realtime Feedback


In FDD duplexing mode, the maximum number of configurable subframes is 40
subframes, where the maximum number of 40 subframes is available for
sequence lengths of at least four frames

In a TDD frame only the uplink subframes are enabled for configuration. The
maximum number of the configurable subframes is determined by the selected
"UL/DL Configuration" and the possible values are listed in the corresponding
column in the cross-reference table below.

For Enabled Realtime Feedback, the maximum number of configurable uplink subframes for the PUSCH channel of the first user equipment (UE 1) is determined by
the "Number of HARQ Processes", that itself also depends on the duplexing mode
and the UL/DL configuration.
For an overview of the possible values, see the corresponding column in the crossreference table 5-1.

The current subframe to be configured is selected by means of the parameter Subframe.


The configurable range ("Number of configurable uplink subframes") can be configured
independently for the individual user equipments. Furthermore, for Release 10 user
equipments, the range can be configured independently for the PUCCH and the PUSCH
channel.
Subframes behind the configurable range of the corresponding UE or channel are displayed as read-only.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

56

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Subframes Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

Table 5-1: Value range for the parameter Number of Configurable UL Subframes
"Duplexing
mode"

"UL/DL
Configuration"

UL subframes in the
first four frames

Number of Number of Value range for the parameUL subHARQ pro- ter "Number of Configuraframes
cesses
ble UL Subframes"
per frame

(see figure 3-6)

TDD

2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9,

disabled
realtime
feedback

enabled realtime feedback

1 .. 24

1, 7

1 .. 16

1, 2, 4

1 .. 8

1, 2

1 .. 12

1, 3

1 .. 8

1, 2

12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19,


22, 23, 24, 27, 28, 29,
32, 33, 34, 37, 38, 39
1

2, 3, 7, 8,
12, 13, 17, 18,
22, 23, 27, 28,
32, 33, 37, 38

2, 7,
12, 17,
22, 27,
32, 37

2, 3, 4,
12, 13, 14,
22, 23, 24,
32, 33, 34

2, 3,
12, 13,
22, 23,
32, 33

2, 12, 22, 32

1 .. 4

2, 3, 4, 7, 8,

1 .. 20

1, 2, 3, 6

10

1 .. 40

1, 2, 4 ,8

12, 13, 14, 17, 18,


22, 23, 24, 27, 28,
32, 33, 34, 37, 38
FDD

0 .. 39

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

57

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Subframes Handling in the R&S Signal Generator

Example:

5.2.3.2

For selected FDD duplexing mode, disabled realtime feedback and Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes set to 13, "Subframes" 0 ... 12 are configurable. Subframes from 13 on are readonly.

For selected TDD duplexing mode, "UL/DL Configuration = 6" and disabled realtime
feedback the "Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" is in the range 1 .. 20 (see
table 5-1).
If for instance the "Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" is set to 10, the following 10 subframes are configurable: 2,3,4,7,8,12,13,14,17,18.
These are the first 10 uplink subframes. All other subframes (downlink subframes,
special subframes and subframes from 19 on) are readonly.

For selected TDD duplexing mode, "UL/DL Configuration = 6" and enabled realtime
feedback, up to 6 HARQ processes can be configured and therefore1, 2, 3 or 6 configurable uplink subframes are available for the PUSCH channel of the first user
equipment.
If for instance the "Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" is set to 6, the following
6 subframes are configurable: 2,3,4,7,8,12.
These are the first 6 uplink subframes. All other subframes (downlink subframes,
special subframes and subframes from 13 on) are readonly.

Downlink Direction
In downlink direction, the maximum number of the real configurable subframes depends
on the selected Duplexing mode (TDD or FDD), TDD Frame Structure Settings, whereas
in downlink direction the special subframes are also configurable (in addition to the
downlink subframes).
Since the realtime feedback functionality is an uplink feature, the maximal number of the
configurable subframes in downlink direction is not additionally limited by the number of
HARQ processes.
The subframe to be configured is selected by means of the parameter Subframe Selection. The maximum value for this parameter is then determined by the number of the last
configurable subframe (see also table 5-2).
Table 5-2: Value range for the parameter Number of Configurable DL Subframes
DuplexUL/DL Configuraing mode tion

DL and Special subframes in


the first four frames
(see figure 3-6)

TDD

0, 1, 5, 6,

Number of DL
and special subframes per
frame

Value range for the


parameter Number
of Configurable DL
Subframes

1 .. 16

1 .. 24

10, 11, 15, 16,


20, 21, 25, 26,
30, 31, 35, 36
1

0, 1, 4, 5, 6, 9
10, 11, 14, 15, 16, 19
20, 21, 24, 25, 26, 29,
30, 31, 34, 35, 36, 39

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

58

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Power Setting

DuplexUL/DL Configuraing mode tion

DL and Special subframes in


the first four frames
(see figure 3-6)

0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9

Number of DL
and special subframes per
frame

Value range for the


parameter Number
of Configurable DL
Subframes

1 .. 32

1 .. 28

1 .. 32

1 .. 36

1 .. 20

10

1 .. 40

10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19


20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29,
30, 31, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 39
3

0, 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
10, 11, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
20, 21, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 31, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39

0, 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
10, 11, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
20, 21, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 31, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39

0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 31, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39

0, 1, 5, 6, 9
10, 11, 15, 16, 19,
20, 21, 25, 26, 29,
30, 31, 35, 36, 39

FDD

0 .. 39

5.3 Power Setting


The R&S Signal Generator equipped with option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE
(R&S SMx/AMU-K55/K255) provides several possibilities to adjust the power level of the
generated LTE signal as well as to adjust the relations between the power levels of the
channels and signals in the LTE signal itself.

5.3.1 General Power Settings


The general power settings are as follow:

Output level (Pout) of the instrument


To adjust the value, select "Status bar > Level".

Power Offset Relative to Level Display is a parameter related to the level of the signal
at the output of the baseband part of the instrument. The parameter sets the relative
power offset of the selected baseband path compared to the power level displayed

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

59

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Power Setting

in the header of the instrument. A value of 0 dB refers to the level set in the main
"Level" settings; a negative value lowers the level of the selected baseband.
Use this parameter to adjust the baseband output power compared to the baseband
power of the other baseband if the performed test case requires the signals of UEs
with different SNR and the same AWGN block is used. An example of such a test
scenario are the Multi user PUCCH tests as defined in the 3GPP specification
TS 36.141.

5.3.2 Downlink Power Settings


In downlink direction, the value displayed in the "Level" display defines the RMS level of
the output signal calculated upon several frames. In the FDD duplexing mode, the displayed RMS and the PEP values are valid for the whole frame, while in TDD duplexing
mode, the calculation is based only on the downlink parts of the frame, i.e. the DL subframes and the DwPTS (see also parameter "Power Reference" on page 239).
Additionally to the general power settings, the following settings are influencing the power
of the output signal in downlink direction:

Downlink Reference Signal Structure

Synchronization Signal Settings, Synchronization Signal Settings

PBCH Power and PDSCH Power

PCFICH Settings,PHICH Settings , PDCCH Settings

Cell Specific Settings (Cell Specific Settings) and Cell Specific Settings

All DL power configurations are set relative to each other and the absolute power level
of one resource element during one sub-frame depends on the configuration during the
remaining sub-frames. If for instance the PDCCH power is set to 2 dB and a certain
PDSCH has a power of -3 dB, this means that the power level of the PDCCH sub-carriers
is with 5 dB higher than the power level of the PDSCH sub-carriers.
The basis for the calculation of the absolute power level of the channels and the signals
in DL direction is the power of one reference signal resource element. The value is displayed in the General DL Settings dialog by means of the parameter Downlink Reference
Signal Structure. Use this parameter to configure a specific absolute power of one Reference Signal's sub-carrier, like for example to set a required SNR defined for a 15kHz
sub-band.
To calculate the absolute power value a single Reference Signal sub-carrier, consider
the general power settings and the relative RS Power.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

60

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Power Setting

Example:
For the default setting of this firmware, the values of the related parameters are as follow:
"Level" = - 30 dB
"RS Power per RE relative to Level Display" = - 27.78 dB
"Power Offset relative to Level Display" = 0 dB
The absolute power level of a single Reference Signal sub-carrier is the sum of these
three values, i.e. -57.78 dBm.
If for instance the value of the PDSCH power is changed to - 3 dB, the absolute power
level of a PDSCH sub-carrier calculated based on the absolute power level of a single
Reference Signal is than -60.78 dBm.

5.3.3 Uplink Power Settings


Additionally to the General Power Settings, the following settings are influencing the
power of the output signal in uplink direction:

Power Reference

Power factors for PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH/SRS

DRMS Power Offset (available for PUSCH and PUCCH)

UE Power

While generating an uplink signal, the power displayed in the "Level" display defines the
current RMS level at the output. The RMS and PEP values however are calculated based
upon different parts of the signal depending on the selected Power Reference in the
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings dialog.

"Power Reference" = "Frame RMS Power" (UL FDD) or "UL Part of Frame RMS
Power" (UL TDD)
In the FDD duplexing mode, the displayed RMS and the PEP values ("Level" and
"PEP") are valid for the whole frame, while in TDD duplexing mode, the calculation
is based only on the uplink parts of the frame, i.e. the UL subframes and the UpPTS.

Note: The absolute power of a single subframe depends also on the signal within of
the remaining subframes.

"Power Reference" = "UE Burst RMS Power" (UL FDD and UL TDD)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

61

EUTRA/LTE

R&S Signal Generator Specific Information


Power Setting

The displayed "Level" and "PEP" values are measured only for a certain burst of a
single UE. See the description of the parameter Power Reference for description of
the decision algorithm and how the reference bursts are selected.

Use this mode to simplify the setting up of the SNR required for the test cases defined
in the 3GPP specification TS 36.141, in case the PUSCH is not transmitted in every
subframe.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

62

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Exemplary Testing Scenario

6 Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


The EUTRA/LTE uplink realtime feedback functionality requires the additional option
R&S SMx/AMU-K69 Closed Loop BS Tests. This option extends the EUTRA/LTE option
R&S SMx/AMU-K55 with the possibility to perform closed loop performance tests with
feedback as defined in 3GPP TS 36.141, chapter 8.
The Realtime Feedback Configuration is enabled only for UE1 in instruments equipped
with the option R&S SMx/AMU-K69.

Realtime Feedback Configuration is not available for the R&S Signal Generator SMBV
and for the simulation software R&S WinIQSIM2.
This feature allows the DUT to dynamically control the transmission of channel coded
data packets. By means of the feedback sent from the DUT to the R&S SMx/AMU, ACK/
NACK signaling (HARQ feedback) and timing adjustment is possible, similar to the feedback sent from a base station to a user equipment by means of the air interface (PDCCH/
PHICH channels).
By means of ACK/NACK commands, the DUT can control the channel coding configuration (i.e. the redundancy version) of the transmitted PUSCH packets in real time. The
behavior of the R&S SMx/AMU is similar to the behavior of the HARQ entity / the HARQ
processes of a real user equipment (according to 3GPP TS 36.321).
By means of timing adjustment/timing advance commands, the DUT can request time
shifts of the uplink signal generated by the R&S SMx/AMU and thus causing a delay or
advance of the uplink signal in real time (according to 3GPP TS 36.213).

6.1 Exemplary Testing Scenario


The testing specifications in TS 36.141, chapter 8, specifies the test setups. For example,
the test "Performance requirements for UL timing adjustment" (TS 36.141, section 8.2.2)
can be setup according to the figure 6-1.
One single R&S SMU/AMU is sufficient.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

63

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Feedback Modes

Fig. 6-1: Exemplary test scenario

If your instrument is equipped with internal fading and AWGN generators, no more test
equipment is required to perform the performance requirement test measurements. The
simulation of the propagation conditions according to the specified test scenarios is achieved by selecting the required fading profiles and an additive white Gaussian noise. For
more detailed description about the available fading profiles and how to work with the
fading simulator, refer to the description "Fading Simulator".
The feedback is transmitted from the DUT to the R&S SMx/AMU by means of the serial
protocol (serial mode). The test setup requires a 10 MHz external reference line between
the DUT and R&S SMx/AMU, and a common trigger source (downlink timing) for synchronization of the R&S SMx/AMU and the DUT.

1 = Baseband A generates the signal of the moving UE


2 = Baseband B generates the signal of the stationary UE

6.2 Feedback Modes


The test setups for performance verification require a feedback line from the DUT (base
station) to the signal source. The R&S SMx/AMU provides two interfaces for the necessary feedback line, a binary and a serial one, and two connectors, the LEVATT connector

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

64

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Feedback Modes

and the USER1 connector. Both interfaces are suitable for HARQ feedback tests; for
testing of an UL timing adjustment however, a connection over a serial feedback line has
to be established.
The input impedance of the connectors and the low/high threshold voltage are configurable parameters. Use the "Global Trigger/Clock Settings" dialog and adjust the parameters "Threshold Trigger/Control Input" and "Impedance Trigger/Control Input" as
required.

6.2.1 Binary Mode


A binary line carries the information in form of a high and low voltage level and is sufficient
for the transmission of ACK and NACK commands. In the binary mode, the instrument
detects the voltage level at the input connector and depending on the configuration (see
parameter "ACK Definition" on page 205), the input level is interpreted as ACK or NACK.

6.2.2 Serial Mode


The serial line carries the information in form of commands where a command consists
of 16 data bits (D0..D15), 1 start bit (low level) and 1 stop bit (high level). No parity bit
has to be transmitted. The least significant bit (D0) is transmitted first.
The feedback commands are transmitted with a "Serial Rate" of 115.2 kbps, 1.6 Mbps or
1.92 Mbps. Between two consecutive commands or before the very first command, the
line has to be held on high level (idle).

6.2.3 Serial 3x8 Mode


In this mode, a command does not consist of one singular serial packet, but consists of
three serial packets.

Fig. 6-2: Structure of one feedback command in "Serial 3x8" mode

Each of the three packets consists of one start bit (low level), eight serial bits and one
stop bit (high level). No parity bits have to be transmitted. The sixteen data bits D0 ... D15
are distributed among the three times eight serial bits according to figure. The remaining
serial bits must have specified low or high levels according to the figure for synchronization purposes.
The three serial packets of the feedback commands are transmitted with a "Serial
Rate" of 115.2 kbps, 1.6 Mbps or 1.92 Mbps. Between two consecutive packets or
between two consecutive commands or before the very first command, the line has to be
held on high level (idle).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

65

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Feedback Modes

6.2.4 Structure of a serial and 3x8 serial feedback command


The table 6-1 shows the structure and the meaning of the 16 data bits (D0..D15) in a
feedback command, where D15 refers to the most significant bit.
Table 6-1: Structure of one feedback command
D15-D14

D13-D11

D10-D0

BB Selector

Message Type Selector

Message Bits

The BB Selector (D15-D14) determines for which of the baseband blocks the feedback command is for.
The R&S SMU/AMU can be equipped with up to two baseband blocks, where each
baseband block can simulate one UE with closed loop feedback. The BB selector
takes value in the range from 0 to 3 and can be arbitrarily assigned to each baseband
block. Therefore, you can send different feedback commands to different baseband
blocks over one feedback line.
Alternatively, several baseband blocks that use the same BB selector can share the
feedback commands, even if these baseband blocks are in different instruments
connected to the same feedback line.

The Message Type Selector (D13-D11) determines the message type and the command that is signaled (see table 6-2).

Table 6-2: Message types


Message Type
Selector

Message Type

Description

HARQ Feedback Auto

Carries only ACK/NACK feedback.


The redundancy version (RV) to be used in the next
PUSCH transmission of the affected HARQ process is
determined automatically

HARQ Feedback with RV Carries ACK/NACK feedback and a request for a specific
request
redundancy version (RV). This RV is then applied in the
next PUSCH transmission of the affected HARQ process.
This command causes the instrument's HARQ process
logic to "jump" to the first occurrence of the requested
redundancy version in the configured redundancy version
sequence (according to the HARQ process description in
3GPP TS 36.321).

Timing Advance Command (Absolute)

Requests an absolute timing advance of the uplink signal

Timing Adjustment Command (Relative)

Requests a relative timing adjustment of the uplink signal

Combined HARQ Feedback Auto and Relative


Timing Adjustment Command

Combination of the both commands "HARQ Feedback


Auto" and the "Timing Adjustment (Relative)".

reserved

5-7

The instrument behaves exactly as if the HARQ feedback


and the timing adjustment would be sent in two separate
commands

Message Bits (D10-D0)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

66

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Feedback Modes

The figure 6-3 gives an overview of the structure of the different commands and the
information they carry.

Fig. 6-3: Message bits

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

67

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Timing Aspects

Example:
The figure below depicts the example of a serial feedback command with the following
settings:

BB Selector = 01

Message Type Selector = 000, i.e. HARQ Feedback Auto

ACK/NACK bit = 1, i.e. ACK is transmitted

Message Bits D3-D4 are reserved for FDD mode.

The least significant bit (LBS) is transmitted first.

Fig. 6-4: Example of a serial feedback command (HARQ Feedback Auto)

6.3 Timing Aspects


The available number of messages per subframe in the downlink timing depends on the
feedback line used. A binary feedback line allows only one feedback message per subframe in downlink timing, whereas zero, one ore several feedback messages can be sent
over the serial or the serial 3x8 one.

6.3.1 Parameterization of the feedback timing


The parameterization of the feedback timing deppends on the "Feedback Mode" (binary,
serial or serial 3x8) and the selected "Distance Mode" (3GPP or direct response).
6.3.1.1

Timing for binary mode with 3GPP Distance Mode, serial or serial 3x8 mode
The figure bellow illustrates the parameterization of the feedback timing. The example
shows timing of feedback commands carrying the information that would be sent in a
PDCCH/PHICH channel in downlink subframe n, in comparison to the downlink signal of
the air interface. It is a prerequisite that the base station and the instrument are synchronized by means of a common trigger source and a 10 MHz reference line.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

68

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Timing Aspects

Fig. 6-5: Parameterization of the feedback timing

The exact timing of the feedback commands can be adjusted by the parameter Additional
User Delay.

6.3.1.2

In binary mode, an "Additional User Delay" of 0 means, the instrument reads the
binary feedback at the point in time that coincides with the beginning of the subframe
(in downlink timing), in which the respective information would be sent in the PDCCH/
PHICH channels over the air interface.
Note that the feedback level has to be held constant from 0.1 ms before this point in
time until 0.1 ms after this point in time.
For binary mode, the additional user delay can vary between -1.00 and 2.99 subframes.

In serial and serial 3x8 mode, an "Additional User Delay" of 0 means that all serial
feedback commands that contain information which would be sent in the PDCCH/
PHICH channels in one specific subframe, have to be sent inside a 0.8 ms time span
starting 0.1 ms after the beginning of this PDCCH/PHICH subframe (downlink timing)
and ending 0.1 ms before the end of this PDCCH/PHICH subframe.
For serial and serial 3x8 mode, the additional user delay can vary between -1.00 and
1.99 subframes.

Maximum number of serial feedback commands


The serial feedback commands and the individual serial packets of the serial 3x8 feedback command can be transmitted asynchronously inside the serial feedback span.
Technically, the instrument is able to process a maximum number of 40 serial commands
in one serial feedback span, independently from the baseband selectors. For Serial
Rate of 115.2 kbps, the number of commands is further limited due to their length and
the low bit rate. A maximum number of 5 commands fit into the 0.8 ms serial feedback
span. Up to three commands consisting each of three serial packets can be transmitted
within the 0.8 ms while using the serial 3x8 feedback.

6.3.1.3

Timing for binary mode with Direct Response Distance Mode


In binary mode, there is also another possibility for determining the uplink subframe, in
which the signaled feedback has the desired effect. In this "Direct Response Distance
Mode", the influenced uplink subframe is calculated from the position of the last sent
uplink packet of a HARQ process (see the examle on figure 6-6).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

69

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Timing Aspects

Supposing an initial timing advance of 0, an additional user delay of 0 would mean, that
the binary feedback to a specific uplink HARQ packet is expected by the instrument at
the point in time that coincides with the beginning of this uplink subframe, which does not
make sense. Therefore, for the "Direct Response Distance Mode", the allowed range of
the parameter "Additional User Delay" starts with +1.00 subframes.
The uplink subframe in which the signaled HARQ feedback has the desired effect is the
next uplink subframe corresponding to the HARQ process the feedback was for.
Note that the feedback level has to be held constant from 0.1 ms before until 0.1 ms after
the point in time when the instrument expects the binary feedback.

Fig. 6-6: Timing of feedback commands in Direct Response Distance Mode (Example for FDD).

6.3.2 Uplink Timing


The uplink subframe in which the signaled feedback has the desired effect is calculated
from the downlink subframe number n, according to 3GPP TS 36.213, section 4.2.3 (timing adjustment/timing advance commands) and chapter 8 (HARQ feedback commands).
This does not apply if binary mode with direct response distance mode is used.
The figure bellow depicts the principle of the uplink timing by means of an example of a
FDD mode with 8 active HARQ processes.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

70

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Timing Aspects

Fig. 6-7: Timing of feedback commands for serial or serial 3x8 mode (Example for FDD).

In FDD, due to invariant DL and UL subframe configuration and continuous DL and UL


transmission, the retransmission of data occurs in a predefined time after the initial transmission. In TDD however, such a fixed relation is not possible and the time varies
depending on the active UL/DL configuration.

A timing adjustment command corresponding to downlink subframe n causes a


timing adjustment of the uplink signal at the beginning of uplink subframe n+6.

A HARQ feedback command corresponding to downlink subframe n causes an


adjustment of the redundancy version in:
uplink subframe n+4, if FDD is used without subframe bundling operation and if
there is a PUSCH transmission scheduled in uplink subframe n+4.

uplink subframe n+k, with k given in table 8-2 of TS 36.213, if TDD is used with
UL/DL configurations 1 to 6 without subframe bundling operation and if there is
a PUSCH transmission scheduled in uplink subframe n+k

uplink subframe determined by the bits D4-D3 of the HARQ feedback command,
"HARQ Feedback Auto" or "HARQ Feedback with RV request" (see table 6-2),
in case of TDD transmission with UL/DL configuration 0.

Note that for binary HARQ feedback, both the subframes n+k and n+7 are modified, in case of TDD transmission with UL/DL configuration 0.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

71

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Avoiding Synchronization Problems

6.3.2.1

General timing rules


The first HARQ feedback recognized by the instrument after triggering is the feedback
responding to the first uplink PUSCH transmission. For example, if a PUSCH is scheduled
in uplink subframe 0 and if FDD without subframe bundling is used, the first HARQ feedback recognized by the instrument is the one affecting uplink subframe 8.
If no HARQ feedback command is received for a specific HARQ process in serial mode,
the instrument behaves as if NACK was signaled in a "HARQ Feedback Auto" command.
If there is a conflict between several HARQ feedback commands (because they would
affect the same uplink PUSCH transmission), only the last received HARQ feedback
command is considered.
The first timing advance or timing adjustment command that is recognized by the instrument after triggering is the one causing a timing adjustment at the beginning of uplink
subframe 8.
If no timing advance or timing adjustment command is received, then no timing adjustment is applied, (i.e. the timing advance in subframe n+6 will not be modified). If there is
a conflict between several timing advance or timing adjustment commands (because they
would affect the same uplink subframe), only the last received timing advance / adjustment command is considered.
If the serial or serial 3x8 mode is used, the serial line has to be held idle (high) during
downlink subframe 0.

6.4 Avoiding Synchronization Problems


In order to be able to successfully decode the transmitted uplink packets, both the signal
generator and the device under test have to keep track of the redundancy versions used
in the HARQ processes, because the device under test has to know which redundancy
version to expect at a certain point in time (subframe). Using the Assume ACK until first
received ACK command functionality may be necessary especially if the generator is
triggered by a normal frame marker of the device under test (DUT) and if the device under
test already is expecting uplink transmissions before the generator is triggered.
Examples
Consider the following examples:

"Redundancy Version Sequence" = 0,2,3,1

"Maximum Number of Transmissions" = 4

One HARQ process is shown

The device under test already is expecting uplink transmissions before the generator is
triggered. But as no uplink transmissions take place before the generator starts its signal
output, the device under test will not be able to successfully decode packets and therefore
will expect retransmissions with different redundancy versions. After triggering the generator by a frame marker, the following situation occurs, if - for example - the DUT expects
RV 3 after the generator was triggered.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

72

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Avoiding Synchronization Problems

Example: Disabled parameter "Assume ACK until first received ACK command"
The following table shows the situation after triggering the generator if the parameter
"Assume ACK until first received ACK command" is disabled.
The generator schedules a new
transmission with RV 0.

The DUT expects a retransmission The DUT sends a NACK to the


with RV 3.
generator.

The generator received NACK and The DUT expects a retransmission The DUT sends a NACK to the
schedules a retransmission with
with RV 1.
generator.
RV 2.
The generator received NACK and The DUT reached the maximum
schedules a retransmission with
number of transmissions and
RV 3.
expects a new transmission with
RV 0.

The DUT sends a NACK to the


generator.

The generator received NACK and The DUT expects a retransmission The DUT sends a NACK to the
schedules a retransmission with
with RV 2.
generator.
RV 1.
The generator reached the maxiThe DUT expects a retransmission The DUT sends a NACK to the
mum number of transmissions and with RV 3.
generator.
schedules a new transmission with
RV 0.

The generator and the DUT would keep on being out of synchronization.
Example: Enabled parameter "Assume ACK until first received ACK command"
This situation described in the first example does not occur if the generator is triggered
by the device under test at a point in time when the DUT expects new transmissions (e.g.
by a special marker indicating this). However, if only a frame marker is available from the
DUT, the "Assume ACK until first received ACK command" functionality can be enabled,
and the above example changes.
The generator schedules a new
transmission with RV 0.

The DUT expects a retransmission The DUT sends a NACK to the


with RV 3.
generator.

The generator ignores the NACK


The DUT expects a retransmission The DUT sends a NACK to the
and schedules a new transmission with RV 1.
generator.
with RV 0.
The generator ignores the NACK
The DUT reached the maximum
and schedules a new transmission number of transmissions and
with RV 0.
expects a new transmission with
RV 0.

The DUT sends an ACK to the generator.

The generator received ACK and


The DUT expects a new transmis- The DUT sends an ACK to the genschedules a new transmission with sion with RV 0.
erator.
RV 0.
The generator received ACK and
The DUT expects a new transmis- The DUT sends an ACK to the genschedules a new transmission with sion with RV 0.
erator.
RV 0.

Now the generator and the DUT are synchronized.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

73

EUTRA/LTE

Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests


Limitation

6.5 Limitation
Although an arbitrary data source can be selected, the used user data before the channel
coding is the same in all subframes for all HARQ processes and for all transmissions.
If for instance a Transport Block Size of 47520 is configured and the Data Source is set
to PN9, then the first 47520 bits of the PN9 sequence are used as an input for all HARQ
processes (even after an ACK), regardless of the performed transmission. However,
since different redundancy versions are applied during the channel coding, the bit stream
at the output of the channel coder is different for the different retransmissions.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

74

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals

7 EUTRA/LTE User Interface


To access the dialog for setting the EUTRA/LTE digital standard, select "Baseband block
> EUTRA/LTE" or use the menu tree under "Baseband".

7.1 Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals


The dialog is split into several sections for configuring the standard. The upper menu
section is where the EUTRA/LTE digital standard is enabled and reset, the default settings are called, and where the generated waveform file can be selected.

The middle menu section is where EUTRA/LTE related settings such as the link direction
and the sequence length can be selected.

The buttons in the lower menu section lead to submenus to configure the EUTRA/LTE
signal and setting the filter, trigger, and clock parameters.

State
Activates or deactivates the EUTRA/LTE standard.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

75

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals

Activating this standard disables all the other digital standards and digital modulation
modes.
In case of two-path instruments, this affects the same path.
Note: For two path instruments and configured antenna in path A for path B, enabling
the LTE signal simulation will disable all other digital standards and digital modulation
modes even in the path B.
The EUTRA/LTE signal is generated according to the performed settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:STATe on page 338
Set to Default
Calls the default settings.
Parameter

Values

Duplexing

FDD

Link Direction

Downlink (OFDMA)

Sequence Length

1 Frame

DL Channel Bandwidth

10 MHz

Physical Resource Block Bandwidth

12 * 15 kHz

Number Of Resource Blocks per Slot

50

Occupied Bandwidth /MHz

9.015

Sampling Rate /MHz

15.360

FFT Size

1024

Cell ID

Cyclic Prefix

Normal

PHICH Duration

Normal

Global MIMO Configuration

1 TxAntenna

Simulated Antenna

Antenna 1

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:PRESet on page 339
Save/Recall...
Calls the "Save/Recall" menu.
From the "Save/Recall" menu, the "File Select" windows for saving and recalling EUTRA/
LTE configurations and the "File Manager" is called.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

76

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals

EUTRA/LTE configurations are stored as files with the predefined file extension
*.eutra. The file name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable.
The complete settings in the "EUTRA/LTE" dialog are saved and recalled.
"Recall
EUTRA/LTE
Setting"

Opens the "File Select" window for loading a saved EUTRA/LTE configuration.
The configuration of the selected (highlighted) file is loaded by pressing
the "Select" button.

"Save EUTRA/
LTE Setting"

Opens the "File Select" window for saving the current EUTRA/LTE signal configuration.
The name of the file is specified in the "File name" entry field. The file
is saved by pressing the "Save" button.

"File Manager"

Calls the "File Manager".


The "File Manager "is used to copy, delete, and rename files and to
create new directories.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:CATalog on page 340
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:LOAD on page 340
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:STORe on page 341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:STORe:FAST on page 341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:DEL on page 340
Data List Management
Calls the "Data List Management" menu. This menu is used to create and edit a data list.

All data lists are stored as files with the predefined file extension *.dm_iqd. The file
name and the directory they are stored in are user-definable.
The data lists must be selected as a data source from the submenus under the individual
function.
Note: All data lists are generated and edited by means of the SOURce:BB:DM subsystem
commands. Files containing data lists usually end with *.dm_iqd. The data lists are
selected as a data source for a specific function in the individual subsystems of the digital
standard.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

77

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals

Example: Creating and editing the data list:


SOUR:BB:DM:DLIS:SEL "eutra"
SOUR:BB:DM:DLIS:DATA 1,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,1,1,1,0,0,0
SOUR:BB:DM:DLIS:DATA:APP 1,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,1,1,1,0,0
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:DATA
on page 405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
DSELect on page 405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:DATA on page 479
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:DSELect on page 479
Generate Waveform File
Calls the "Generate Waveform" dialog used to store the current EUTRA/LTE signal as
ARB signal in a waveform file.
This file can be loaded in the "ARB" dialog and processed as multi carrier or multi segment
signal.
The file is stored with the predefined file extension *.wv. The file name and the directory
it is stored in are user-definable.
Note: Even for enabled Realtime Feedback (see chapter 7.14.3, "Realtime Feedback
Configuration Settings", on page 203), the waveform file is generated as if this functionality is disabled.
Note: The Sequence Length of the generated ARB file is determined by the parameter
SFN Restart Period
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:WAVeform:CREate on page 342
Test Case Wizard
Opens the Test Case Wizard dialog (see chapter 8, "Test Case Wizard", on page 253).
Logfile Generation
Opens the dialog for configuring the settings for generation of logfiles (see chapter 7.2,
"LTE Logfile Generation", on page 81).
Note: Logfile Generation requires an additional SW option and is enabled only for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K81.
3GPP Version
Displays the current version of the 3GPP standard.
The default settings and parameters provided are oriented towards the specifications of
the version displayed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:BB:EUTRa:VERSion? on page 342

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

78

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals

Duplexing
Selects the duplexing mode. The duplexing mode determines how the uplink and downlink signals are separated.
"TDD"

In TDD mode, the same frequency is used for both directions of transmission (uplink and downlink). With one baseband, either only downlink
or only uplink can be generated.

"FDD"

In FDD mode, different frequencies are used for downlink and uplink
directions.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DUPLexing on page 339
Link Direction
Selects the transmission direction.
"Downlink
(OFDMA)"

The transmission direction selected is base station to user equipment.


The signal corresponds to that of a base station. For the downlink, the
physical layer mode is always set to OFDMA.

"Uplink (SCFDMA)"

The transmission direction selected is user equipment to base station.


The signal corresponds to that of a user equipment. For the uplink, the
physical layer mode is always set to SC-FDMA.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LINK on page 339
Sequence Length
Sets the sequence length of the signal in number of frames. One frame corresponds to
10 ms. The signal is calculated in advance and output in the arbitrary waveform generator.
The maximum number of frames is calculated as follows:
Max. No. of Frames = Arbitrary waveform memory size/(sampling rate x 10 ms).
If the Realtime Feedback functionality is enabled, the signal of UE1 does not depend on
the sequence length, since this signal is not calculated in advance. The configuration of
the sequence length is then only required, if also the signal of UE2, UE3 or UE4 is used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SLENgth on page 341
Test Setups/Models
Calls dialog for selecting one of the test models defined in the 3GPP specification TS
36.141 and the self-defined test setups.
The dialog is described in chapter 7.3, "Test Setups/Models", on page 95.
Remote command:
n.a.
General DL Settings/ General UL Settings
The name of the button depends on the chosen link direction.
Calls the "General DL Settings / General UL Settings" dialog for configuring the EUTRA/
LTE system.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

79

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Main Dialog for EUTRA/LTE Signals

The dialogs are described respectively in chapter 7.4, "General DL Settings / General
TDD DL Settings", on page 96 and chapter 7.12, "General UL Settings",
on page 177.
Remote command:
n.a.
Frame Configuration
Calls the "Frame Configuration" dialog for configuring the allocation of the resource
blocks to the different users, as well as the configuration of the users.
The dialog depends on the chosen link direction. The menu is described in chapter 7.5,
"DL Frame Configuration Settings", on page 127 and chapter 7.13, "UL Frame Configuration Settings", on page 189 respectively.
Remote command:
n.a.
Filtering/Clipping/Power...
Calls the menu for setting baseband filtering, clipping and the general power settings.
The current filter and the clipping state are displayed next to the button.
The menu is described in chapter 7.19, "Filter/Clipping/Power Settings", on page 232.
Remote command:
n.a.
Trigger/Marker
(R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only)
Calls the dialog for selecting the trigger mode and trigger source, for configuring the
marker signals, and for setting the time delay of an external trigger signal. This dialog is
described in chapter 7.20, "Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings", on page 241.
The currently selected trigger mode and trigger source are displayed next to the button.
Remote command:
n.a.
Execute Trigger
Executes trigger manually. A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal trigger source and a trigger mode other than "Auto" have been selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXECute on page 359
Arm
Stops signal generation. This button appears only with "Running" signal generation in the
"Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger" trigger modes.
Signal generation can be restarted by a new trigger (internally with "Execute Trigger" or
externally).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute on page 358

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

80

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Clock
(R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only)
Calls the menu for selecting the clock source and for setting a delay.
This menu is described in chapter 7.20.5, "Clock Settings", on page 250.
Remote command:
n.a.

7.2 LTE Logfile Generation


Logfile generation functionality requires the additional option R&S SMx/AMU-K81.

This functionality enables you to generate logfiles for exchanging intermediate results of
different logging points in the signal processing chain. Analysing the content of the logfiles
may help to verify the signal processing chain in both the DL and UL direction. The intermediate results provide a basis for enhanced debugging. To verify the FEC implementation of the DUT for instance, the coded bitstream from the instrument can be loaded
into a Rx software module for offline analysis in a simulation environment, or it can be
compared to the bitstreams from a Tx software module. Due to the full remote control of
this functionality, optimization of the design flow with process automatization can be
achived, too.

7.2.1 Signal Processing Chains and Logging Points


Logfile generation can be enabled after a completed processing step of the selected
channel, at the so called logging point. Logging points (PTxx) are available after each
completed processing stage up to the "Precoding", as shown on the figures bellow.
The results of the "Resource Element Mapping/OFDM Mapper" are not logged!
For detailed information about the signal processing of all channels, refer to the corresponding 3GPP specification.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

81

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Signal Processing in Downlink

Fig. 7-1: Transport channel processing for DL-SCH (according to 3GPP TS 36.212)

Fig. 7-2: Overview of physical channel processing (according to 3GPP TS 36.211)

The table 7-1 gives an overview of the logging point available for the DL channels.
Table 7-1: Available logging points per DL channel
Point/
Channel

PT00

PT01

PT02

PT03

PT04

PT05

PT06

PT07

PT08

PT09

TB

TBCRC

CBCRC

CC

RM

CBCON

SCR

MOD

MAP

PREC

PDSCH

PBCH 1)

PCFICH 1)

PHICH 1)

X 2)

X 2)

X 2)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

82

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Point/
Channel

PT00

PT01

PT02

PT03

PT04

PT05

PT06

PT07

PT08

PT09

TB

TBCRC

CBCRC

CC

RM

CBCON

SCR

MOD

MAP

PREC

PDCCH 1)

X 3)

X 3)

X 3)

X 3)

PMCH1)

1)

the channel has one codeword and one code block

2)

an individual file is generated per PHICH group

3)

an individual file is generated per DCI

Signal Processing in Uplink

Fig. 7-3: Transport channel processing for UL-SCH (according to 3GPP TS 36.212)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

83

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Fig. 7-4: Overview of uplink physical channel processing (according to 3GPP TS 36.211)

Refer to table 7-2 for an overview of logging points available for the UL channels.
Table 7-2: Available logging points per UL channel
Point PT00
/
TB
Chan
nel

PT01

PT02

PT03

PT04

PT05

PT06

PT07

PT08

PT09

PT10

PT11

PT12

TBCR
C

CBCR
C

CC

RM

CBCO
N

MUX

CHI

SCR

MOD

MAP

PREC

DFT PREC

PUS
CH

In the uplink direction, logging points PT10 and PT11 are reserved for future use.

7.2.2 Output Files


The instrument stores the output logfiles in a user-defined network directory, selected
with the parameter Output Path. The logfiles are named according to the naming conventions described in chapter 7.2.2.1, "File Names", on page 84. Description of the
available file formats is given bellow.
File Formats
Generally, the logfiles are generated in two file formats:

Bitstream
The logfile contains a sequence of "1" and "0"; one value per line
The logfile of the PHICH contains also the entry "-" that corresponds to DTX.

IQ Samples
The logfile contains pairs of I and Q samples; one I or Q sample per line

File format IQ Samples is used for the logfiles generated for the logging points "Modulation Mapping", "Layer Mapping" and "Precoding". The other logfiles are output in a Bitstream format.
An exception are the extended DCI/UCI logfiles (see "Extended DCI Logfile"
on page 88 and "Extended UCI Logfile" on page 90).
7.2.2.1

File Names
The generated logging files are named according to the following naming structure:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

84

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

[<Preamble>_]<Frame#>_<Subframe#>_<Channel>[_<User/
Allocation#>|<DCI#>|<Group#>]_<Point#>[_<CW#>|<LAY#>|<ANT#>]_
<PointName>[_<CodeBlock#>].dat
An exception are the extended DCI/UCI logfiles. The file names of these two logfiles are
as follow:
[<Preamble>_]ExtendedDciLog.txt and
[<Preamble>_]ExtendedUciLog.txt
Table 7-3: Description of the File Name Structure
Description

Value Range

<Preamble>

Optional user-defined preamble

<Frame#>

Frame Number

F000 .. F873

<Subframe#>

Subframe Number

SF0 .. SF9

<Channel>

Channel Name

DL: PBCH | PCFICH | PHICH | PDCCH |


PDSCH | PMCH
UL: PUSCH

<User/
Allocation#>

PDSCH allocation only

<DCI#>

PDCCH allocation only

USER1 .. USER4
ALL000 .. ALL101
DCI00 .. DCI19

each PDCCH DCI is logged individually


<Group#>

PHICH Group

Group00 | Group01

an individual file is generated for each


PHICH group
<Point#>

Logging Point Number

see table 7-4

<CW#>

PDSCH allocation only

CW0 | CW1

Codeword
<LAY#>

Layer Number

LAY1 | LAY2

<ANT#>

Antenna Number

ANT1 .. ANT4

<PointName>

Logging Point designation

see table 7-4

<CodeBlock#>

PDSCH allocation only

CB00 .. CB20

There is a fixed cross-reference between the logging point number and the logging point
designation (see table 7-4).
Table 7-4: Logging Points Overview
<Point#>

<PointName>

Description

PT00

TB

Bits of the Transport Block

PT01

TBCRC

Bits after Transport Block CRC

PT02

CBCRC

Bits after Code Block CRC


One file per code block is generated

PT03

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

Bits after Channel Coding (one file per code block)

85

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

<Point#>

<PointName>

Description

CCSys

Systematic Bits

CCPar1

Parity 1 Bits

CCPar2

Parity 2 Bits

CCTotal

PDSCH and PUSCH allocation only


Complete bit-stream after channel coding, incl. systematic,
parity 1 and parity 2 bits

PT04

RM

Bits after Rate Matcher (one file per code block)

PT05

CBCON

Bits after Code Block Concatenation

PT06

DL: SCR

Bits after Scrambling

UL: MUX

Bits after Data and Control Multiplexing

DL: MOD

IQ-Samples after Modulation

UL: CHI

Bits after channel interliever

DL: MAP

IQ-Samples after Layer Mapping (one file per layer)

UL: SCR

Bits after Scrambling

DL: PREC

IQ-Samples after Precoding (one file per antenna)

UL: MOD

IQ-Samples after Modulation

PT10

UL: MAP

Reserved for future use

PT11

UL: PREC

PT12

UL: DFT_PREC

PT07

PT08

PT09

IQ-Samples after DFT

Example: List of the output logfiles for PDSCH


The following output files are generated for one PDSCH channel, configured on a allocation with index ALL002 in the third subframe (SF2) of the first frame (F000). The
instrument is configured to generate a MIMO signal with two antennas (PREC_ANT1 and
PREC_ANT2). Channel coding and scrambling are enabled (CCPar1, CCPar2, CCSys,
CCTotal and SCR). Two codewords (CW0 and CW1) and two layers (LAY0 and LAY1) are
used; three code blocks per code (CB00, CB01, CB02) are generated.
All logging points are enabled and a preamble (20100825Log) is selected.
<User/
Allocation#>_<Point#>[_<CW#>|<LAY#>|<ANT#>]_<PointName>[_<CodeBlock#>].dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT00_CW0_TB.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT00_CW1_TB.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT01_CW0_TBCRC.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT01_CW1_TBCRC.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT02_CW0_CBCRC_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT02_CW1_CBCRC_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT02_CW0_CBCRC_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT02_CW1_CBCRC_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT02_CW0_CBCRC_CB02.dat

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

86

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT02_CW1_CBCRC_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCPar1_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCPar1_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCPar1_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCPar1_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCPar1_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCPar1_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCPar2_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCPar2_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCPar2_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCPar2_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCPar2_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCPar2_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCSys_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCSys_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCSys_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCSys_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCSys_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCSys_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCTotal_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCTotal_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCTotal_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCTotal_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW0_CCTotal_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT03_CW1_CCTotal_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT04_CW0_RM_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT04_CW1_RM_CB00.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT04_CW0_RM_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT04_CW1_RM_CB01.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT04_CW0_RM_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT04_CW1_RM_CB02.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT05_CW0_CBCON.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT05_CW1_CBCON.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT06_CW0_SCR.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT06_CW1_SCR.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT07_CW0_MOD.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT07_CW1_MOD.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT08_LAY0_MAP.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT08_LAY1_MAP.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT09_ANT1_PREC.dat
20100825Log_F000_SF2_PDSCH_ALL002_PT09_ANT2_PREC.dat

7.2.2.2

Extended Logfiles Contents


The instrument generates only one logfile with extended information regarding the DCI/
UCI mapping.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

87

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Extended DCI Logfile


An Extended DCI Logfile summarizes the information for the whole generated signal and
may contains information for more than one frame. The information is grouped in rows
with different syntax.

PCFICH mapping, i.e the resource elements the PCFICH REGs are mapped to
<Frame#>, <Subframe#>,
PCFICH: REG-Idx=<REG#>: Subcarrier=<Subcarrier#>,
Symbol=<OFDMSymbol#>

PHICH mapping, i.e the resource elements the PHICH REGs of the individual PHICH
groups are mapped to
<Frame#>, <Subframe#>,
PHICH: Group=<Group#>: REG-Idx=<REG#>: Subcarrier=<Subcarrier#>
, Symbol=<OFDMSymbol#>

PDCCH number of useful REGs


<Frame#>, <Subframe#>, PDCCH: Colums:<Colums#>, Rows:<Rows#>,
Useful REGs:<REG#>
The Number of Useful REGs corresponds to the value displayed with the parameter
Number of available REGs (PDCCH)Number of Available REGs.

The start CCE-Index of the individual DCIs


<Frame#>, <Subframe#>, DCI: DCI Idx=<DCI#>, Start CCE-Idx=<CCE#>
The DCI Idx corresponds to the row in the DCI Table and the Start CCE-Idx is the
CCE Index for the corresponding DCI.

PDCCH mapping, i.e the resource elements the PDCCH REGs of the individual
PDCCHs are mapped to
<Frame#>, <Subframe#>,
PDCCH: Idx=<Symbol#>: REG-Idx=<REG#>: Subcarrier=<Subcarrier#>
, Symbol=<OFDMSymbol#> [--- DTX REG]
The additional information DTX REG is assigned to all Dummy PDCCH REGs (see
"Number of Dummy REGs" on page 152 ).

Sub-carrier with index 0 is the most left sub-carrier, i.e. the one belonging to the resource
block 0.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

88

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Example: Content of an Extended DCI Logfile


The instrument is configured to generate a DL LTE signal with 1.4MHz bandwidth (6 RBs),
normal Cyclic Prefix, Extended PHICH Duration and Control Region for PDCCH of 3
OFDM symbols. Two Antennas are selected, path A generate the signal of Antenna 1
and Path B, the signal of Antenna 2.
A PDCCH Format Variable is selected and the PDCCH is configured as given on the
figure bellow.

Generation of Extended DCI Logfile is enabled and the file contains the following information (only the beginning of the file is listed):
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=1, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=2, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=4, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=5, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=19, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=20, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=22, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=23, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=37, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=38, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=40, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=41, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=3: Subcarrier=55, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=3: Subcarrier=56, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=3: Subcarrier=58, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PCFICH: REG-Idx=3: Subcarrier=59, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=7, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=8, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=10, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=0: Subcarrier=11, Symbol=0
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=24, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=25, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=26, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=1: Subcarrier=27, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=48, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=49, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=50, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PHICH: Group=0: REG-Idx=2: Subcarrier=51, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Columns:32, Rows:2, Useful REGs:41
F00,SF0,DCI: DCI Idx=0: Start CCE-Idx=0

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

89

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

F00,SF0,DCI: DCI Idx=1: Start CCE-Idx=2


F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=0: REG-Idx=10: Subcarrier=0, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=0: REG-Idx=10: Subcarrier=1, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=0: REG-Idx=10: Subcarrier=2, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=0: REG-Idx=10: Subcarrier=3, Symbol=1
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=1: REG-Idx=26: Subcarrier=0, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=1: REG-Idx=26: Subcarrier=1, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=1: REG-Idx=26: Subcarrier=2, Symbol=2
F00,SF0,PDCCH: Idx=1: REG-Idx=26: Subcarrier=3, Symbol=2
.......

The figure 7-5 shows the resource allocation for this example. See also chapter 3.2.4,
"Downlink Control Information Transmission", on page 21.

Fig. 7-5: Example of Downlink Control Information Mapping

Extended UCI Logfile


The Extended UCI Logfile summarizes the information for the whole generated signal
and may contains information for more than one frame. The information is grouped in
rows with the following syntax:
<Frame#>, <Subframe#>,
PUSCH <ChannelCodingMode> Number of Bits: No.HARQ Bits=<HARQ#>,
No.RI Bits=<RI#>,No.CQI Bits=<CQI#>,
No.coded HARQ Bits=<CodedHARQ#>,No.coded RI Bits=<CodedRI#>,
No.coded CQI Bits=<CodedCQI#>,No.coded UL-SCH Bits=<UL-SCH#>

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

90

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Example:
The PUSCH carries multiplexed control information and data (UCI+UL-SCH) and the
channel is configured as shown on the figure bellow:

The first line of the logfile is:


F00,SF0,
PUSCH UCI+UL-SCH Number of Bits: No.HARQ Bits=3,No.RI Bits=2,No.CQI Bits=1
,
No.coded HARQ Bits=34,No.coded RI Bits=12,No.coded CQI Bits=4,No.coded UL-SC

7.2.3 Working with the Logfile Generation Functionality


The R&S Signal Generator generates logfiles only if the logging state is enabled. Adjusting the settings in the "Logfile Generation" dialog does not affect the content of the generated EUTRA/LTE signal and does not cause a recalculation of the signal. The generation of new logfiles is triggered by changing of a signal relevant EUTRA/LTE parameter
or by enabling/disabling the generation of EUTRA/LTE signal.
Activation of logfile generation slows down the calculation speed of the instrument.
Enable this function only if logfiles are explicitly requested.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

91

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

General Workflow
To enable the generation of logfiles proceed as follow:
1. In the "EUTRA/LTE > Logfile Generation > Output Path" dialog, select the network
directory the logfiles are saved to, e.g. <root>logfiles and select a "Logging File
Preamble", e.g. 201008Log.
Note: The network directory should be empty. Existing logfiles are overwritten.
It is recommended to use different preambles to assure that previous logfiles are not
lost.
2. If required, enable "Extended DCI/UCI Logging".
3. Select the processing chain points for that logfiles are to be generated, e.g. "Point 3:
Channel Coding".
Tip: Not all of the available logging point are relevant for all channels. The processing
of the PBCH for instance does not include the step "Code block segmentation / CRC",
i.e. even if the Logging Point "Point 2: Code block segmentation / CRC" is enabled,
no logfile is generated (see table 7-1).
No logfiles are generated also in case that the corresponding processing step is disabled in the EUTRA/LTE dialog. For example, if channel coding and/or scrambling
are disabled for some channel, no logfiles for the Point 3 and/or Point 6/Point 8 are
available for this channel as long as these processing steps are not enabled.
4. Set the "Logging State" to On to enable logfile generation.
5. Adjust the EUTRA/LTE Settings as required and enable signal generation.

7.2.4 Logfile Generation Settings


To access this dialog, select "EUTRA/LTE > General > Logfile Generation".
The dialog is divided into three main areas. The first one is where the logfile generation is enabled and the settings of the output file are configured. In the second one,
the channels are selceted for which logfiles are to be generated. The last one enables
the selection of the logging point(s) for which logfiles will be generated.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

92

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Downlink Settings

Uplink Settings

Logging State
Enables/disables logfile generation.
Note: Activation of logfile generation slows down the calculation speed of the instrument.
Enable this function only if logfiles are explicitly requested.
See also chapter 7.2.3, "Working with the Logfile Generation Functionality",
on page 91.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:STATe on page 505
Output Path
Selects the network directory the logged files are stored in.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:OUTPut on page 505

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

93

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


LTE Logfile Generation

Logging Files Preamble


An optional preamble may be added to the file name. Refer to chapter 7.2.2.1, "File
Names", on page 84 for a description of the file naming convention used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:LFP on page 505
Extended DCI/UCI Logging
Enables the generation of a logfile with extended information regarding the DCI/UCI
mapping.
For description of the content of the generated file, see "Extended DCI Logfile"
on page 88 and respectively "Extended UCI Logfile" on page 90.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:EDLogging on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:UL:EULogging on page 506
Physical Channels
Selects the channel for which logfiles are generated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:ENCC on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:PBCH on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:PDSCh on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:PMCH on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:UL:PUSCh on page 506
Enable/Disable All
Enables/disables all logging points.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:EALL on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:DALL on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:UL:EALL on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:UL:DALL on page 506
Logging Point
Enables/disables one particular logging point.
Refer to chapter 7.2.1, "Signal Processing Chains and Logging Points", on page 81 for
description on the available logging points.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:DL:LOGPoint<ch0> on page 506
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LOGGen:UL:LOGPoint<ch0> on page 506

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

94

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Test Setups/Models

7.3 Test Setups/Models


To access this dialog, select "General > Test Setups/Models".

The dialog offers quick selection and settings adjustment according to one of the
various EUTRA Test Models (E-TM) as defined in the 3GPP specification TS 36.141.
The EUTRA Test Models are defined for FDD and TDD duplexing mode.
EUTRA Test Models (E-TM) Downlink
Access a list of EUTRA Test Models (E-TM) in accordance with the 3GPP standard TS
36.141.
The DL test models are predefined configurations of LTE settings. Three main groups of
test models are defined, the E-TM1, E-TM2 and E-TM3. All test models use the following
parameters:
single antenna port, single code word, single layer and no precoding
duration of one frame
normal cyclic prefix
localized virtual resource blocks, no intra-subframe hopping for PDSCH
UE-specific reference signals are not used
The data content of the physical channels and signals are defined in the 3GPP specification. Each E-TM is defined for six different channel bandwidths, 1.4/3/5/10/15 and
20MHz. The test models are defined for specific test purpose (see table 7-5).
Table 7-5: E-TM available for selection
EUTRA Test Model

Defined for tests on

E-TM1.1

BS output power
Unwanted emissions
Transmitter intermodulation
RS absolute accuracy

E-TM1.2

ACLR
Operating band unwanted emissions

E-TM2

Total power dynamic range (lower OFDM symbol power limit at min power)
EVM of single 64QAM PRB allocation (at min power)
Frequency error (at min power)

E-TM3.1

Output power dynamics


Transmitted signal quality (Frequency error and EVM for 64QAM modulation,
at max power)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

95

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

EUTRA Test Model

Defined for tests on

E-TM3.2

Transmitted signal quality:


Frequency error

EVM for 16QAM modulation

E-TM3.3

Transmitted signal quality:


Frequency error

EVM for QPSK modulation

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:TMOD:DL on page 341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:TMOD:TDD on page 341

7.4 General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings


The "General DL Settings" dialog allows configuring the EUTRA/LTE system for transmission direction downlink, i.e. the signal of one BS or one cell.
The dialog consists of the sections DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration, MBSFN Settings,chapter 7.4.3, "Physical Settings", on page 116,TDD Frame Structure Settings,
Scheduling Settings, MIMO, Cell Specific Settings,Downlink Reference Signal Structure, Synchronization Signal Settings, Positioning Reference Signal Settings

Because the EUTRA/LTE standard defines no differences between TDD and FDD signals
on the physical layer if only one link direction is considered at once, the "General TDD
DL Settings" dialog comes with the same parameters as the "General DL Settings" dialog
and is only extended with the TDD Frame Structure Settings section.
In the "Physical Settings" section, the channel bandwidth respectively the number of
resource blocks per slot is selected. The other parameters are fixed and read-only.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

96

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

The "TDD Frame Structure" section is available only, if the TDD is selected as a duplexing
mode. In this section, the TDD frame is configured by means of adjustment of the UL/DL
configuration and the special subframe configuration.

In the "K55 Configuration" section a selection is made, whether the PDSCH Scheduling
is performed manual or according to the configuration made for the DCIs.

In the "MIMO" section the global MIMO configuration and the simulated antenna are
selected.

In the "Cell Specific Settings" section, the physical layer cell identity settings and the DL
power control settings are configured.

In the "Downlink Reference Signal Structure" and the "Synchronization Signal Settings"
sections, the power level of the reference signals and the P-/S-SYNC can be set and the
P-/S-SYNC can be enabled or disabled.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

97

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

The "Positioning Reference Signal Settings" section comprises the related settings.

7.4.1 DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration

Carrier Aggregation is an LTE-A (LTE Rel 10) feature enabled for instruments equipped
with software option R&S SMx/AMU-K85.
The "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration" dialog provides the settings for the configuration of one primary cell (PCell) and up to four secondary cells (SCell). In real system,
the RRC messages signal all the relevant system information for a certain SCell. In this
implementation, all relevant and configurable SCell settings are grouped in the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration" dialog. The remaining cell-specific settings are identical
for all component carriers.
SCell settings derivation
The settings of each SCell are calculated automatically form the configured PCell settings
and depending on the parameters in the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration" dialog.
The following list provides an overview of the restrictions and interdependencies between
related parameters if DL Carrier Aggregation is enabled:

Combination of FDD and TDD is not possible.

Simultaneous support of LTE and LTE-A users is provided


(see User Configuration Settings > Activate CA).

The following settings in the PCell are not allowed:


"Channel Bandwidth = User"

"PDSCH Scheduling = Auto/DCI"

To enable cross-carrier scheduling, the DCI formats are extended to support the CIF
field. The DCIs have to be configured individually per component carrier.
In this firmware version, the "Auto/DCI" mode is always disabled and the component
carriers of the SCells use the same frame configuration as the PCell.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

98

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Support of cross-carrier scheduling in "Auto/DCI" mode will be available in future


version.

The "Control Region for PDCCH" of all component carrier/SCells is set to the same
value, unless the 3GPP standard specifies a specific value, e.g. in special subframes
in TDD mode.
The PHICH Duration of the SCells is adjusted automatically if required, i.e. if this
parameter is set to "Extended" in the PCell, the SCell are generated with extended
PHICH duration even if the "PDCCH Start" is not set properly for the SCell.
However, the PHICH Duration in a SCell will be adjusted if the selected narrow channel bandwidth in this SCell leads to not sufficient amount of PDCCH symbols. Consequently, different channel bandwidth results in different Number of available CCEs
(PDCCH).

The parameter Number of PHICH Groups may have different values in the SCells,
because it is calculated based on the parameter "N_g".

If a SCell spans channel bandwidth with less RBs than the PCell, the instrument
ignores the allocations or part of the them that is outside the channel bandwidth.

Limitation in the maximum LTE-A bandwidth


The LTE specification defines a maximumChannel Bandwidth of 20MHz and aggregation
of up to five component carriers to achieve 100MHz bandwidth.
The R&S Signal Generator configured to generate more than one component carrier per
baseband automatically applies the multi carrier function. In this case, the maximum
bandwidth of the generated LTE-A signal is restricted by the instrument's hardware.
In R&S SMU, the RF bandwidth of multi carrier signal is limited to 80MHz.
Using the maximum sampling rate, the R&S SMBV equipped with the options R&S
SMBV-B10/K522 can internally generate multi carrier signals with up to 160 MHz RF
bandwidth.
In this description, the terms cell and component carrier (CC) are used interchangeably.

Example: Enabling Carrier Aggregation and Cross-Carrier Scheduling


Tip: In the following, a general example is provided. Only the related settings are discussed.
1. In the first instrument, select "Baseband Block A > EUTRA/LTE" and configure the
settings of the PCell as required, e.g. select one of the predefined "Test Setups/
Models".
2. To enable carrier aggregation:
a) select "General DL Settings > DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration > Activate
Carrier Aggregation > ON"
b) select "DL Frame Configuration > Configure User" and enable/disable "Activate
CA" per user as required.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

99

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

3. In the "General DL Settings > DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration > Component


Carrier Table" configure the settings of the SCells (see example on the following
figure).

4. To enable cross-carrier scheduling for a certain component carrier/SCell:


a) set the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration > schedCell Index" of this component carrier/cell to 0
In the example, the component carriers SCell#1, SCell#2 and SCell#4 can be
cross-scheduled over the PCell
b) enable the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration > CIF Present" parameter.
In this example, the component carriers SCell#1 and SCell#2 will be crossscheduled over the PCell.
c) To enable a component carrier/SCell, set "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration
> State > ON".
5. Enable LTE signal generation "EUTRA/LTE State > ON".
6. If required, use the Fading simulator to configure the propagation conditions.
7. If required, adjust the RF frequency of path A to the middle frequency of the resulting
total signal bandwidth.
8. Activate the RF output.
The instrument will generate the signal in the path A as multi carrier signal, composed
of three carrier, the PCell, the SCell#1 and SCell#2. Each of these component carrier
spans "Channel Bandwidth" = 10MHz and the SCells use carrier frequency offset with
20MHz and 35MHz respectively.
In two path instrument, the SCell#3 will be generated by the path B. The instrument
uses the internal coupled mode, i.e. path B is controlled via path A. The signal generated by path B has identical parameters with the settings made for path A; the
component carrier specific parameters, e.g. "Channel Bandwidth" are set accordingly.
The SCell#4 is disabled.
If independent fading is required for each of the component carriers, configure one component carrier/cell per path, use the "Save/Recall" function to transfer the settings file to
further instruments and adjust the component carrier settings as required.
Provided are the following settings:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

100

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Activate Carrier Aggregation


Enables/disables the generation of several component carriers.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:STATe on page 418
Component Carrier Table
The table provides the settings of the component carriers. The first row displays the settings of the PCell as configured in the "General DL Settings" dialog. The following four
rows provide the configurable settings of the up to four SCells.
Cell Index Component Carrier Table
Sets the cell index of the corresponding SCell, as specified in 36.331 [16]. The SCell
Index is required for signaling on the DCI DCI Format Configuration field.
The cell index of the PCell is always 0.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:INDex on page 420
Physical Cell ID Component Carrier Table
Sets the physical Cell ID of the corresponding SCell. The physical Cell ID of the PCell is
set by the parameter "General DL Settings > Cell ID".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:ID on page 419
Bandwidth Component Carrier Table
Sets the bandwidth of the corresponding component carrier/SCell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:BW on page 418
Baseband Component Carrier Table
Determines the baseband block that generates the selected component carrier.
Note: For two path instruments, setting this parameter to "Path B", enables LTE signal
simulation in the second path and will disable all other digital standards and digital modulation modes in this path.
Enabling path B to simulate a component carrier automatically couples path A and path
B, i.e. path B is controlled via path A. The signal generated by path B has identical
parameters with the settings made for path A; the component carrier specific parameters,
e.g. "Channel Bandwidth" are set accordingly.
If more than one component carriers are configured per baseband, the multi carrier function of the R&S Signal Generator is automatically enabled. In this case, the maximum
frequency offset "delta f" between the central frequencies of the cells is limited by the
instrument's hardware.
Note: The LTE-A signal is generated as multi carrier waveform by one baseband and
hence all the component carriers/cells can only be faded jointly.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:BB on page 418

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

101

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

delta f / MHz Component Carrier Table


Sets the frequency offset between the central frequency of corresponding SCell and the
frequency of the PCell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:DFReq on page 419
CIF Present Component Carrier Table
Defines whether theDCI Format ConfigurationCarrier Indicator Field (CIF) is included in
the PDCCH DCI formats transmitted from the corresponding SCell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:CIF on page 419
schedCell Index Component Carrier Table
Defines the component carrier/cell that signals the UL and DL grants for the selected
SCell. The signaling cell is determined by its Cell Index.
According to the LTE-A specification, cross-carrier scheduling has to be enabled per user
and per component carrier.
To enable signaling for one particular SCell on the PCell, i.e. cross-carrier scheduling,
set the "schedCell Index" to 0.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:SCINdex on page 420
PDSCH Start Component Carrier Table
Sets the starting symbol of the PDSCH for the corresponding SCell, i.e. determines the
"Control Region for PDCCH".
Note: All subframes use the same "Control region for PDCCH" as set here, regardless
of the settings of the PCell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:PSTart on page 420
Power / dB Component Carrier Table
Sets the RS EPRE (Reference Signal Energy per Resource Element) of the according
SCell relative to the RS EPRE of the PCell.
The absolute power of the RS of a cell is calculated according to the follwoing formula:
Absolute_RS_EPRECell_X = RS Power per RE relative to Level Display + "Level Display" + CA_PowerCell_X

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

102

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Example:
Set "EUTRA/LTE > Set to Default"
Set Activate Carrier Aggregation > ON
For the SCell1, set CA_PowerCell_1 = Power / dB = -5dB
Enable SCell1, i.e. set State > ON
The value of the parameter "General DL Settings > RS Power per RE relative to Level
Display" is -30.736 dB
The power displayed in the header of the instrument is "Level = -30 dBm"
Absolute_RS_EPRECell_1 = (-30.736dB) + (-30.00dBm) + (-5dB) = -65.736dBm
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:POFFset on page 420
Delay / ns Component Carrier Table
Sets the time delay of the SCell relative to the PCell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:TDELay on page 421
State Component Carrier Table
Activates/deactivates the component carrier/SCell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CA:CELL<ch0>:STATe on page 421

7.4.2 MBSFN Settings

Configuration of the "MBSFN Settings" requires the additional software option R&S SMx/
AMU-K84.
The "MBSFN Settings" section comprises the parameters necessary to configure a
MBSFN transmission. Refer to chapter 3.5, "LTE MBMS Concepts", on page 38 for
background information.
According to the MBMS LTE concept, one eNodeB may serve more than one MBSFN
areas. In this implementation, the simulated cell belongs to only one MBSFN areas.
Hence, all radio resources reserved for MBSFN subframes are assigned to one MBSFN
area.
In a LTE network, the MBSFN information is transmitted only during the specially reserved
MBSFN subframes. Almost all MBMS control information is carried by a special control
channel, the MCCH. There is one MCCH per MBSFN area. In this implementation, the
MCCH is always mapped to the first active MBSFN subframe within one MCCH repetition
period (see figure in example "MBSFN Resource Allocation" on page 106).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

103

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

A configurable "MCCH repetition period" determines how frequent the control information
is transmitted within a defined "MCCH modification period" (see figure below).

Fig. 7-6: Change of MCCH information

The MCCH carries a single message, the MBSFNAreaConfiguration message, which


provides information on the ongoing MBMS sessions and the corresponding radio resources, i.e. the mapping of the PMCHs. The BCCH also carries some of the MBMS control
information by means of the special System Information Blocks SIB Type 13 and SIB
Type 2.
For exact definition of control elements and messages such as MBSFNAreaConfiguration, please refer to 3GPP TS 36.311, v9.6.0. [16].
The following table provides an overview of the steps an UE performs to acquire the
information about the resource configuration of reserved MBSFN subframes, the position
of the MCCH within the MBSFN subframes as well as information necessary to demodulate the MCCH and to retrieve the information about the PMCH scheduling.
Table 7-6: Acquiring MBSFN information
Step

Information provided by

Description

BCCH > SIB#2

The SIB#2 contains common radio configuration information and S


ubframe Config (SIB
among other things a list (mbsfn_SubframeConfigList) with
Type 2)
scheduling information for up to 8 MBSFN allocations (MBSFNSubframeConfiguration).

MBSFN-SubframeConfiguration

User Interface

Hence, after receiving the SIB#2 each UE, also the MBSFN incapable UEs, are informed about the subframes that are reserved
for MBSFN in the downlink.
2

BCCH > SIB#13

MBSFN-AreaInfoList
MBMS-NotificationConfiguration

The SIB#13 carries the information necessary to acquire the


MBMS control information for up to 8 MBSFN areas (MBSFNAreaInfoList), as well as the common MBMS notification scheduling information (MBMS-NotificationConfiguration).

MBSFN-AreaInfoList
Parameters
MBSFN-NotificationConfig Parameters

After receiving the SIB#13 the MBSFN capable UE is able to find


the MBSFN reference signals (mbsfn-AreaID) and to detect and
demodulate the MCCH (mcch-Config and MBMS-NotificationConfiguration).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

104

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Step

Information provided by

Description

User Interface

MCCH > MBSFNAreaConfiguration

The MCCH carries the single message MBSFNAreaConfiguration that determines which of the reserved MBSFN subframes
(compare SIB#2) belong to which MBSFN area and provides a list
with configuration information for up to 15 PMCHs (PMCH-InfoList) per an MBSFN area.

Common Subframe
Allocation Period

PMCH-InfoList
CommonSF-AllocationPatternList

PMCH-InfoList Parameters

Note:The MBSFN-SubframeConfiguration is equivalent to the


summary of all CommonSF-AllocationPatternList. In this implementation, all MBSFN subframes are assigned to one MBSFN
area. Hence, MBSFN-SubframeConfiguration equates the CommonSF-AllocationPatternList and configuration of the later one is
done with the parameters of SIB#2.
The PMCH-InfoList specifies the individual PMCHs, including
MBMS sessions, used MCS, allocated subframes (sf-AllocEnd)
and the periodicity for providing MCH scheduling information on
MAC layer (mch-SchedulingPeriod).
4

PMCH

The UE receives the PMCHs.

The following figures show the signaling of MBSFN information during the acquisition
steps.

Fig. 7-7: MBSFN Signaling (step 1)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

105

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Fig. 7-8: MBSFN Signaling (steps 2 to 4)

Example: MBSFN Resource Allocation


This example shows the MBSFN resource allocation for the settings listed in the following
table. Use the default values for the other parameters.
ARB Sequence Length
The generation of a signal with cyclically repeating MBSFN pattern requires an "ARB
sequence length" equal to the "MCCH repetition period" or to the "MCCH modification
period".
The maximum value of the ARB sequence length depends on the selected channel
bandwidth and on the memory size option of the generator.

Parameter

Value

EUTRA/LTE > Duplexing

FDD

EUTRA/LTE > Sequence Length

512 Frames

General DL Settings > Channel Bandwidth

1.4 MHz

General DL Settings > MBSFN Mode

Mixed

Radio Frame Allocation Period

8 Frames

Radio Frame Allocation Offset

2 Frames

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

106

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Parameter

Value

Subframe Allocation Mode

4 Frames

Allocation value (HEX)

AAAAAA

MCCH State

On

MCCH Repetition Period

128 Frames

MCCH Modification Period

512 frames

Notification Repetition Coefficient

2 Frames

Notification Subframe Index

4, i.e. the MCCH change notification on PDCCH is


transmitted on subframe#6

Common Subframe Allocation Period

64 Frames, i.e. the PMCH scheduling is repeated


after 64 frames

Number of PMCHs

PMCH#0: SF Alloc Start/SF Alloc EndSF Alloc End

PMCH#0: MCH Scheduling Period

PMCH#1: SF Alloc End

PMCH#1: MCH Sched. Period

PMCH#2: SF Alloc End

95 (automatically calculated)

PMCH#2: MCH Sched. Period

The following figure shows the resource allocation.


SFN is the System Frame Number. By default, the SFN starts with 0 by the start value
can be adjusted with the parameter SFN Offset.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

107

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Fig. 7-9: Example of MBSFN resource allocation


Pattern subframes
Grey subframes

= Subframes not allowed to be scheduled as MBSFN subframes


= MBSFN subframes not used for MBMS transmission, i.e. regular LTE subframes that can be used for allocation of DL signal
MCCH*
= First MCCH in a new MCCH modification period
PMCH-0*/PMCH-1*/PMCH-2* = First PMCH of one MCH scheduling period.

If PRS and MBSFN is configured to be in the same subframe, MBSFN is skipped and
PRS is transmitted solely (see example "Overlapping PDSCH, PRS and MBSFN"
on page 126).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

108

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Provided are the following settings:


MBSFN Mode
Enables the MBSFN transmission and selects a mixed MBSFN Mode, i.e. the available
subframes are shared between MBSFN and regular LTE operation.
Note: Dedicated MBSFN Mode (i.e. all subframes are used for MBSFN solely) will be
supported in a later version.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:MODE on page 414
MBSFN Rho A
Defines the power of the MBSFN channels relative to the common Reference Signals.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:RHOA on page 416
UE Category
Defines the UE category as defined in 3GPP TS 36.306.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:UEC on page 417
Subframe Config (SIB Type 2)
This section comprises settings for configuration of the general MBSFN structure, i.e. it
defines which subframes are used for MBSFN transmission. In the real system, these
values are transmitted via the System Information Block (SIB) Type 2.
The parameters in this section correspond to the MBMS information element MBSFNSubframeConfig, as defined in [16].
The graph in this section displays the currently reserved MBSFN subfames. To select a
subframe as MBSFN subframe, click on this subframe.
Note: The here described parameters are for configuration of the MBSFN structure only,
the coding of the SIB#2 and the SIB#13 is not done automatically.
Also, the content of the MCCH is not generated automatically, but has to be set manually
by means of an according data source.

Radio Frame Allocation Period Subframe Config (SIB Type 2)


Radio-frames that contain MBSFN subframes occur when the following equation is satisfied:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

109

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

SFN mod radioFrameAllocationPeriod = radioFrameAllocationOffset


Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:APER on page 417
Radio Frame Allocation Offset Subframe Config (SIB Type 2)
Radio-frames that contain MBSFN subframes occur when the following equation is satisfied:
SFN mod radioFrameAllocationPeriod = radioFrameAllocationOffset
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:AOFFset on page 417
Subframe Allocation Mode Subframe Config (SIB Type 2)
Defines whether MBSFN periodic scheduling is 1 or 4 frames.
The figure in example "MBSFN Resource Allocation" on page 106 shows a MBSFN allocation composed of 4 frames. The following figure displays a MBSFN allocation with
"Subframe allocation mode" set to 1 frame.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:AMODe on page 416
Allocation value (HEX) Subframe Config (SIB Type 2)
Defines which MBSFN subframes are allocated.
This parameter is identical to the bitmap defined by the field subframeAllocation of the
MBMS information element MBSFN-SubframeConfig.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:AVAL on page 417
Area Info (SIB Type 13)
This section comprises settings for configuration of the general MBSFN area info, i.e. it
defines where to find the MCCH. In the real system, these values are transmitted via
the System Information Block (SIB) Type 13.
The parameters in this section correspond to the MBMS information elements MBSFNAreaInfoList and MBSFN-NotificationConfig, as defined in [16].
Note: The here described parameters are for configuration of the MBSFN structure only,
the coding of the SIB#2 and the SIB#13 is not done automatically.
Also the content of the MCCH is not generated automatically, but has to be set manually
by means of an according data source.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

110

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)


This section comprises the parameters of the MBMS information element MBSFN-AreaInfoList.
Area ID (N_ID_MBSFN) MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type
13)
Defines the MBSFN area ID, parameter NidMBSFN.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:ID on page 409
Non-MBSFN Region Length MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB
Type 13)
Defines how many symbols from the beginning of the subframe constitute the nonMBSFN region.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:NMRL on page 413
Notification Indicator MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type
13)
Defines which PDCCH bit is used to notify the UE about change of the MCCH applicable
for this MBSFN area. Value 0 corresponds to the least significant bit as defined for the
DCI Format 1C.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:NIND on page 413

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

111

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

MCCH State MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)


Enables/disables the MCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:STATe on page 413
MCCH Repetition Period MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type
13)
Defines the interval between transmissions of MCCH information in radio frames.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:RPER on page 412
MCCH Offset MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)
Indicates, together with the "MCCH repetition period", the radio frames in which MCCH
is scheduled. MCCH is scheduled in radio frames for which:
SFN mod "MCCH repetition period" = "MCCH offset"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:OFFS on page 412
MCCH Modification Period MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB
Type 13)
Defines periodically appearing boundaries, i.e. radio frames for which the following equation is fulfilled:
SFN mod "MCCH modification period" = 0
The contents of different transmissions of MCCH information can only be different if there
is at least one such boundary in-between them.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MPER on page 411
Allocation Value (HEX) MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type
13)
Indicates the subframes of the radio frames indicated by the "MCCH repetition period"
and the "MCCH offset", that may carry MCCH.
Note: In the current implementation, the MCCH is always mapped to the first active
MBSFN subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:AVAL? on page 409
MCCH MCS MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)
Defines the Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) applicable for the subframes indicated by the "MCCH Allocation value" and for the first subframe of each MCH scheduling
period (which may contain the MCH scheduling information provided by MAC).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MCS on page 410

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

112

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

MCCS Modulation MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)


Displays the values as determined by the "MCCH MCS".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MODulation? on page 410
MCCH Transport Block Size MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB
Type 13)
Displays the values as determined by the "MCCH MCS".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:TBSize? on page 413
MCCH Data Source MBSFN-AreaInfoList Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)
Sets the data source used for the MCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:DATA on page 410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:DLISt on page 410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:PATTern on page 412
MBSFN-NotificationConfig Parameters Area Info (SIB Type 13)
This section comprises the parameters of the MBMS information element MBSFN-NotificationConfig.
Notification Repetition Coefficient MBSFN-NotificationConfig Parameters
Area Info (SIB Type 13)
Selects the current change notification repetition period common for all MCCHs that are
configured. The notification repetition period is calculated as follow:
change notification repetition period = shortest modification period/ "Notification repetition
coefficient"
Where the shortest modification period corresponds with the value of the selected "MCCH
modification period".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NRC on page 411
Notification Offset MBSFN-NotificationConfig Parameters Area Info (SIB Type
13)
Defines, together with the "Notification Repetition Coefficient", the radio frames in which
the MCCH information change notification is scheduled, i.e. the MCCH information
change notification is scheduled in radio frames for which:
SFN mod notification repetition period = "Notification offset"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NOFFset on page 411
Notification Subframe Index MBSFN-NotificationConfig Parameters Area Info
(SIB Type 13)
Defines the subframe used to transmit MCCH change notifications on PDCCH.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

113

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

In FDD: Value 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 correspond with subframe #1, #2, #3, #6, #7 and #8
respectively
In TDD: Value 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 correspond with subframe #3, #4, #7, #8 and #9respectively
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NSI on page 412
Notification Pattern MBSFN-NotificationConfig Parameters Area Info (SIB
Type 13)
Sets the pattern for the notification bits sent on PDCCH DCI format 1c.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NPATtern on page 411
PMCH Structure
This section comprises settings for configuration of the PMCH structure, i.e. where to find
a PMCH carrying a certain MTCH. In the real system, these values are transmitted via
the MCCH (MBSFNAreaConfiguration).
The parameters in this section correspond to the MBMS information elements MBSFNAreaConfiguration and PMCH-InfoList, as defined in [16].

Common Subframe Allocation Period PMCH Structure


Defines the period during which resources corresponding with field commonSF-Alloc are
divided between the (P)MCH that are configured for this MBSFN area.
The subframe allocation patterns, as defined by commonSF-Alloc, repeat continuously
during this period.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:MTCH:CSAP on page 414
PMCH-InfoList Parameters PMCH Structure
Comprises the parameters of the PMCH-InfoList.
Number of PMCHs PMCH-InfoList Parameters PMCH Structure
Defines the number of PMCHs in this MBSFN area.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:MTCH:NPMChs on page 414

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

114

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

SF Alloc Start/SF Alloc End PMCH-InfoList Parameters PMCH Structure


Defines the first/last subframe allocated to this (P)MCH within a period identified by field
commonSF-Alloc.
The subframes allocated to (P)MCH corresponding with the nth entry in pmch-InfoList are
the subsequent subframes starting from either the subframe identified by "SF Alloc
End" of the (1)th listed (P)MCH or, for n=1, the first subframe, through the subframe
identified by "SF Alloc End" of the nth listed (P)MCH. Value 0 corresponds with the first
subframe defined by field commonSF-Alloc.
Note: Configuring the MCHs ("SF Alloc Start" values) from bottom to top. Although the
3GPP specification defines the "SF Alloc End" parameter as the only one required, in this
implementation it is mandatory to define the "SF Alloc Start" instead.
The implemented algorithm uses the selected "SF Alloc Start" and calculates automatically the "SF Alloc End" of the corresponding MCH. The algorithm applies the internal
rule, that there will be no gap between two consequent MCHs.
It is therefore recommended to configure the MCHs, i.e. define the "SF Alloc Start" values,
from bottom to the top. This workaround prevents the configuration of overlapping MCHs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:SASTart on page 416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:SAENd on page 416
MCS PMCH-InfoList Parameters PMCH Structure
Defines the value for parameter according to [5] Table 7.1.7.1-1, which defines the Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) applicable for the subframes of this (P)MCH as indicated by the field commonSF-Alloc. The MCS does however neither apply to the subframes that may carry MCCH, i.e. the subframes indicated by the field sf-AllocInfo within
System Information Block Type 13, nor for the first subframe of each MCH scheduling
period (which may contain the MCH scheduling information provided by MAC).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:MCS on page 415
MCH Scheduling Period PMCH-InfoList Parameters PMCH Structure
Defines the MCH scheduling period, i.e. the periodicity used for providing MCH scheduling information at lower layers (MAC) applicable for an MCH.
Note: The first subframe of the scheduling period may contain the MAC control element
and therefore uses MCS of MCCH (however, the data source from PMCH is still used).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:SPERiod on page 416
Data Source PMCH-InfoList Parameters PMCH Structure
Sets the data source for this PMCH/MTCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:DATA on page 415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:DLISt on page 415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:PATTern on page 415

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

115

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

7.4.3 Physical Settings


In the "Physical Settings" section, the channel bandwidth respectively the number of
resource blocks per slot is selected. The other parameters are fixed and read-only.
Channel Bandwidth
Sets the channel bandwidth of the EUTRA/LTE system.
Although the 3GPP specification bases on bandwidth agonistic layer 1 and channel
bandwidth is determined by specifying the desired number of resource blocks, the current
EUTRA standardization focuses on six bandwidths (1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 MHz).
For backward compatibility with previous version of this software, this parameter allows
the flexibility to choose, whether a user defined bandwidth or one of the pre-defined
channel bandwidths is used.
If a pre-defined channel bandwidth is selected; the actual "Number of Resource Blocks
Per Slot" is internally calculated for the selected "Channel Bandwidth" and "Physical
Resource Block Bandwidth".
The sampling rate, occupied bandwidth and FFT size are therefore determined by the
parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot". If required, the FFT Size can be
adjusted.
See also table 4-1 for an overview of this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BW on page 375
Physical Resource Block Bandwidth
Displays the bandwidth of one physical resource block.
Note: In this release, this value is fixed to 12 x 15 kHz.
Remote command:
n.a.
Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot
This parameter determines the channel bandwidth.
If the parameter "Channel Bandwidth" is set to one of the pre-defined channel bandwidths
(1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15 or 20 MHz), the value "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot" is read
only and is automatically set according to the selected channel bandwidth and "Physical
Resource Block Bandwidth".
If a user defined channel bandwidth is selected, the parameters "Number of Resource
Blocks Per Slot" and "Physical Resource Blocks Bandwidth" determine the actual channel
bandwidth.
However, the sampling rate and the occupied bandwidth are determined by the parameter
"Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot". If required, the FFT Size can be adjusted.
See also table 4-1 for an overview of this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:NORB on page 375

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

116

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

FFT Size
Sets the FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) size.
The FFT size can be freely selected for all bandwidth definitions under the following constrains:
For a specific bandwidth, all FFT sizes are applicable as long as the size is greater
than the number of occupied subcarriers.
By default, the smallest available FFT size is selected.
To decrease the number of unused guard subcarriers and the resulting sampling rate,
for channel bandwidth of 15 MHz a DFT size of 1536 is provided along with the default
FFT size of 2048.
See also table 4-1 for an overview of the cross-reference between the parameter and the
available FFT sizes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:FFT on page 376
Occupied Bandwidth
Displays the occupied bandwidth. The value is automatically set according to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:OCCBandwidth? on page 376
Sampling Rate
Displays the sampling rate. The value is automatically set according to the parameter
"Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot."
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SRATe? on page 376
Number Of Occupied Subcarriers
Displays the number of occupied subcarriers. The value is automatically set according
to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
See also table 4-1 for an overview of this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:OCCSubcarriers? on page 377
Number Of Left Guard Subcarriers
Displays the number of left guard subcarriers. This value is set automatically according
to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:LGS? on page 377
Number Of Right Guard Subcarriers
Displays the number of right guard subcarriers. This value is set automatically according
to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:RGS? on page 377

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

117

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

7.4.4 TDD Frame Structure Settings


The "TDD Frame Structure" section is available only, if the TDD is selected as a duplexing
mode. In this section, the TDD frame is configured by means of adjustment of the UL/DL
configuration and the special subframe configuration (see also chapter 3.2.1, "OFDMA
Parameterization", on page 18).
UL/DL Configuration
Sets the Uplink-Downlink Configuration number, i.e. defines which subframe is used for
downlink respectively uplink, and where the special subframes are located.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:UDConf on page 370
Configuration of Special Subframes
Sets the Special Subframe Configuration number, i.e. together with the parameter Cyclic
Prefix defines the lengths of the DwPTS, the Guard Period and the UpPTS.
The DwPTS length selected with this parameter determines the maximum number of the
OFDM symbols available for PDSCH in the special subframe.
The UpPTS length selected with this parameter determines the maximum number of the
SC-FDMA symbols available for SRS in the special subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:SPSConf on page 370

7.4.5 Scheduling Settings


In the "Scheduling" section, you define whether the PDSCH Scheduling is performed
manually or according to the configuration made for the DCIs.
PDSCH Scheduling
Determines whether the configuration and scheduling of the different PDSCH allocations
inside of the DL allocation table is performed manually or according to the configuration
made for the DCIs.
Note: Switching from "Auto/DCI" mode to "Manual" mode enables all parameters in the
DL allocation table for configuration without to change their values. Switching from
"Manual" to "Auto/DCI" mode, however, triggers a reset of the frame prior to reconfiguration of the PDSCH allocations according to the settings made for the PDCCH DCIs, i.e.
the settings made in the DL allocation table are lost.
"Manual"

In this default mode, there is no cross-reference between the settings


made for the PDCCH DCIs and the PDSCHs settings. The PDSCH
allocations have to be configured manually in the DL allocation table.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

118

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

"Auto/DCI"

Precoding for spatial multiplexing will be performed according to


3GPP TS 36.211 and the selected parameters.
This mode assures a 3GPP compliant EUTRA/LTE signal and the
PDSCH allocations are configured automatically according to the configuration of the PDCCH DCIs.
The generation of a compliant signal requires some limitations in the
configuration flexibility, especially regarding the power setting:

The value of the parameter Reference Signal Power is fixed to 0dB.

The PDSCH Rho A of each allocation belonging to a user is set as


configured with the parameter P_A for the corresponding user in
the "Configure User" dialog.

All four users are activated with enabled Scrambling and Channel
Coding.

Not all combinations of DCI Table, Users and UE_ID/n_RNTI are


allowed. The table 7-7 shows this dependency.
Table 7-7: DCI Formats dependencies
User

UE ID/n_RNTI

DCI Format

User 1 .. 4

As defined for the corresponding user

0,1,1a,1b,1d,2,2a,3,3a

P-RNTI

65534

1a,1c

SI-RNTI

65535

RA-RNTI

As defined with the parameter RA_RNTI in


the "General DL Setting" dialog

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CONF:MODE on page 372

7.4.6 MIMO
In the MIMO section, the MIMO configuration and the simulated antennas are defined.
Provided are the following settings:
Global MIMO Configuration
Determines the number of transmit antennas of the simulated EUTRA/LTE system.
Depending on this parameter, the Downlink Reference Signal Structure will be set
accordingly (see also figure 3-9).
Note: One baseband simulates one antenna.
"1 TxAntenna"

Enables single antenna port transmission.

"2 TxAntennas/ Enables a multiple antenna transmission. The transmission mode,


4 TxAntennas" transmit diversity or spatial multiplexing, is determined per allocation
with the parameter Precoding Scheme.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

119

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

"SISO + BF"

This mode combines a 1 Tx-antenna Single Input Single Output (SISO)


transmission with beamforming (BF).
Beamforming is a method to increase the SNR of the signal received
by the UE. In this mode, beamforming is implemented as a single layer
PDSCH which is mapped to the different antennas with individual phase
offsets. To simplify the configuration and in order to fulfill the requirements as specified in 3GPP TS 36.101, Annex A the same precoding
vector as in a MIMO case can be used.
Note: While generating signal in this mode, the antennas simulated by
path A and Path B are not MIMO antennas. The signal at the output of
both paths is the same SISO signal with the same cell-specific reference signals.
To enable the instrument to generate a transmission using antenna
port 5 signal (transmission corresponding to the UE-specific reference
signal) as defined in the 3GPP specification, set the parameter Precoding Scheme to "Beamforming (UE-spec.RS)".
In this case, the generated signal carries a combination of common
signal part (PBCH, PDCCH, cell-specific RS,...), which is identical on
all antennas, and UE-specific PDSCH, which is different on the antennas due to the applied precoding.
Note that, although the generation of a beamformed signal requires
more than one antenna, for the UE it appears as a SISO signal.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:CONFiguration on page 372
Simulated Antenna
Determines the simulated antenna in case the Global MIMO Configuration is set to 1 TX
Antenna.
The configuration of the Downlink Reference Signal structure is set accordingly (see
figure 3-9).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTenna on page 372
Simulated Antenna Path A
Determines the simulated antenna for path A. The configuration of the Downlink Reference Signal Structure is set accordingly (see also figure 3-9).
The possible values of this parameter depend on the setting of the parameter Global
MIMO Configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTA on page 373
Simulated Antenna Path B
(Available for two-path instruments only)
Determines the simulated antenna for path B.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

120

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Note: For two path instruments, setting the parameter "Simulated Antenna Path B" to
any values but "None", enables LTE signal simulation for path B and will disable all other
digital standards and digital modulation modes in this path.
Enabling path B to simulate an antenna automatically couples path A and path B, i.e.
path B is controlled via path A. The signal generated by path B has identical parameters
with the settings made for path A and the downlink reference signal's parameters "First
Reference Signal Position", "Subcarrier Offset" and "Use Second Reference Signal" are
set accordingly.
The configuration of the Downlink Reference Signal Structure is set accordingly (see also
figure 3-9).
The possible values of this parameter depend on the setting of the parameter Global
MIMO Configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTB on page 373
Antenna Port Mapping
(enabled for instruments eqquiped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284)
Opens the Antenna Port Mapping (General DL Settings) dialog for defining the mapping
of the logical antenna ports to the available physical Tx antennas.

7.4.7 Cell Specific Settings


In the "Cell Specific Settings" section, the physical layer cell identity settings and the DL
power control settings are configured.
Cell ID
Sets the cell identity.
There are 504 unique physical layer cell identities (Cell ID), grouped into 168 unique
physical cell identity groups that contain three unique identities each. The Cell ID is calculated as following:
Cell ID = 3*Physical Cell ID Group + Physical Layer ID
There is a cross-reference between the values of this three parameters and changing of
one of them results in adjustment in the values of the others.
The Cell ID determinates:
the downlink reference signal pseudo-random sequence,
the frequency shifts of the reference signal,
the S-SYNC sequence,
the cyclic shifts for PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH mapping and
the pseudo-random sequence used for scrambling.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CID on page 378
Physical Cell ID Group
Sets the physical cell identity group.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

121

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

To configure these identities within a cell ID group, set the parameter Physical Layer ID.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup on page 378
Physical Layer ID
Sets the identity of the physical layer within the selected physical cell identity group, set
with parameterPhysical Cell ID Group .
The Physical Layer ID determinates the Zadoff-Chu orthogonal sequence carried by the
P-SYNC and used for cell search.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:PLID on page 379
Cyclic Prefix (General DL Settings)
Sets the cyclic prefix length for all subframes.
The number of the OFDM symbols is set automatically.
"Normal"

Normal cyclic prefix, i.e. the DL slot contains 7 OFDM symbols.

"Extended"

Extended cyclic prefix, i.e. the DL slot contains 6 OFDM symbols.


The extended cyclic prefix is defined in order to cover large cell scenarios with higher delay spread and MBMS transmission.

"User Defined"

The cyclic prefix length can vary over the subframes. The cyclic prefix
length is set per subframe in the DL Frame Configuration menu with the
parameter Cyclic Prefix.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CPC on page 379
PDSCH P_B
Sets the parameter PDSCH P_B and defines the cell-specific ratio rho_B/rho_A according to 3GPP TS 36.213, Table 5.2-1.
The following table gives an overview of the resulting values of the parameter PBCH Ratio
rho_B/rho_A as function of the values for the parameter PDSCH P_B and the number of
configured antennas.
PDSCH P_B

1 Tx antenna

2 or 4 Tx antennas

0.000 dB

0.969 dB

-0.969 dB

0.000 dB

-2.218 dB

-1.249 dB

-3.979 dB

- 3.010 dB

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDSCh:PB on page 380
PDSCH Ratio rho_B/rho_A
Displays the transmit energy ratio among the resource elements allocated for PDSCH in
the OFDM symbols containing reference signal (P_B) and such not containing one (P_A).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

122

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

The value displayed is determined by the parameter PDSCH P_B and additionally
depends on the number of configured antennas.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDSCh:RATBa on page 381
PDCCH Ratio rho_B/rho_A
Sets the transmit energy ratio among the resource elements allocated for PDCCH in the
OFDM symbols containing reference signal (P_B) and such not containing one (P_A).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDCCh:RATBa on page 380
PBCH Ratio rho_B/rho_A
Sets the transmit energy ratio among the resource elements allocated for PBCH in the
OFDM symbols containing reference signal (P_B) and such not containing one (P_A).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:RATBa on page 380
PHICH Duration
Sets the PHICH duration, i.e. the allocation of the PHICH resource element groups over
the OFDM symbols.
The value selected puts the lower limit of the size of the PCFICH Settings that is signaled
by the PCFICH.
"Normal"

All resources element groups of PHICH (see Number of PHICH


Groups) are allocated on the first OFDM symbol (OFDM Symbol 0).

"Extended"

The resources element groups of PHICH are distributed over three


OFDM symbols for a normal subframe or over two symbols within a
special one.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:DURation on page 381
PHICH N_g
Sets the parameter N_g according to 3GPP TS 36.211, section 6.9.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

123

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

"1/6, , 1, 2"

The actual Number of PHICH Groups for the different subframes is calculated according to the following formula:

In FDD mode, the calculated value corresponds directly to the parameter "Number of PHICH Groups".
In TDD mode however, the resulting value for the parameter Number
of PHICH Groups is the value calculated according to the formula
above, additionally multiplied with a coefficient selected from the following table.
UL/DL

Subframe number

Configuration

The parameter "Number of PHICH Groups" is read-only.


"Custom"

Enables the selection of user-defined value for the parameter "Number


of PHICH Groups".

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:NGParameter on page 382
RA_RNTI
Sets the random-access response identity RA-RNTI.
The value selected here determined the value of the parameter UE_ID/n_RNTI in case
a RA_RNTI "User" is selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CSETtings:RARNti on page 379

7.4.8 Downlink Reference Signal Structure


In the "Downlink Reference Signal Structure" section, the power of the reference signals
is set.
For an overview of the provided power settings and detailed information on how to adjust
them, refer to chapter 5.3, "Power Setting", on page 59.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

124

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

Reference Signal Power


Sets the power of the reference signal (PRS relative).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:REFSig:POWer on page 374
RS Power per RE relative to Level Display
Displays the power of the reference signal (RS) per resource element (RE) relative to the
power value, displayed in the Level display in the header of the instrument.
Note: The displayed value is actualized only if the EUTRA/LTE signal generation is
enabled (State = On).
If a MIMO configuration is enabled, the value of this parameter is equal for all antennas;
this applies also for the antenna configured in the path B.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:REFSig:EPRE on page 374

7.4.9 Synchronization Signal Settings


In the "Synchronization Signal Settings" section, the power of the P-SYNC/S-SYNC is
set.
P-/S-SYNC Tx Antenna
Defines on which antenna port the P-/S-SYNC is transmitted.
The available values depend on the number of configured antennas.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:TXANtenna on page 374
P-SYNC Power
Sets the power of the P-SYNC allocations.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:PPOWer on page 375
S-SYNC Power
Sets the power of the S-SYNC allocations.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:SPOWer on page 375

7.4.10 Positioning Reference Signal Settings

Configuration of the PRSs requires additional SW option R&S SMx/AMU-K84.

This section comprises the setting necessary to configure the positioning reference signals (PRS). See also chapter 3.2.5.4, "Positioning reference signals", on page 27.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

125

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General DL Settings / General TDD DL Settings

If PRS and MBSFN is configured to be in the same subframe, MBSFN is skipped and
PRS is transmitted solely.
If a PDSCH is configured to overlap partially with the PRS bandwidth in a PRS subframe,
the PRS in these resource blocks are skipped then.
Example: Overlapping PDSCH, PRS and MBSFN
PRS State = ON
PRS Configuration Index = 0
Number of PRS DL Subframes (N_PRS) = 2
PRS Bandwidth = 3 MHz
MBSFN Mode = Mixed
Use the OFDMA Timeplan to show the allocation of the PRSs.

1
2
1+2
3

=
=
=
=

PDSCH and PRS are overlapping in the subframe#0


MBSFN is ignored in subframe#1
two consequent PRS subframes with 3 MHz Bandwidth
first MBSFN subframe

PRS State
Enables the generation of the PRS.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:STATe on page 383

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

126

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

PRS Configuration Index


Sets the PRS Configuration Index IPRS as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211, table 6.10.4.3-1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:CI on page 382
PRS Periodicity T_PRS
Displays the periodicity of the PRS generation (TPRS) as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211,
table 6.10.4.3-1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:TPRS? on page 384
PRS Subframe offset Delta_PRS
Displays the subframe offset of the PRS generation (DeltaPRS) as defined in 3GPP TS
36.211, table 6.10.4.3-1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:DPRS? on page 383
Number of PRS DL Subframes (N_PRS)
Defines the number of consecutive DL subframes in that PRS are transmitted.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:NPRS on page 383
PRS Bandwidth
Defines the RBs in which the PRS is transmitted.
Note: The PRS Bandwidth must not be bigger than channel bandwidth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:BW on page 382
PRS Power
Sets the power of a PRS resource element relative to the power of a common reference
signal resource element.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:POW on page 383

7.5 DL Frame Configuration Settings


The "DL Frame Configuration" dialog allows you to configure the subframes and the
OFDMA resource allocations. The "DL Frame Configuration" dialog consists of three
sections, "General Frame Configuration", "Subframe Configuration" and the "Allocation
Table".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

127

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

7.5.1 General Frame Configuration Settings


Provided are the following settings:
No Of Configurable (DL) Subframes
Sets the number of configurable subframes. Only the downlink and the special subframes
are enabled for configuration if TDD mode is selected.
All downlink/special subframes are filled periodically with the configured subframes with
the exception of the P-SYNC/S-SYNC which are set globally in the "General DL Settings" menu and the PBCH which can only be configured in subframe 0.
For more detailed information about the maximum number of configurable subframes and
for description of the dependencies between the parameters, see chapter 5.2.3, "Four
Configurable Frames in Uplink and Downlink Direction", on page 55.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CONSubframes on page 399
Reset Subframe Configuration
Resets settings of all subframes including cyclic prefix and number of used allocations
to the default values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:RSTFrame on page 399
Configure User
Calls the "Configure User" menu for configuring allocations for different users.
The menu is described in chapter 7.8, "User Configuration Settings", on page 169.
Remote command:
n.a.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

128

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

Behavior In Unscheduled REs (OCNG)


Selects either to fill unscheduled resource elements and subframes with dummy data or
DTX.
This function can be used as an OFDMA Channel Noise Generator (OCNG) according
to 3GPP TS 36.101.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BUR on page 398
Dummy Data Configuration
(Available for Dummy Data only)
Access the "Dummy Data Configuration" dialog for setting the modulation, power and
data source for the dummy data.
The menu is described in chapter 7.10, "Dummy Data Configuration Settings",
on page 175.
Remote command:
n.a.

7.5.2 Subframe Configuration Settings


Provided are the following settings:
Subframe Selection
Sets the subframe to be configured in the frame configuration table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SFSelection on page 399
Cyclic Prefix
Configuration of the cyclic prefix per subframe is only enabled, if the parameter Cyclic
Prefix is set to User Defined.
The number of the OFDM symbols per subframe is set automatically.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:CYCPrefix on page 399
No. Of Used Allocations
Sets the number of scheduled allocations in the selected subframe.
The number of available allocations depends on the allocation's content type for a subframe and the general channel bandwidth setting.
The default value depends on the existence of a PBCH channel in a subframe. In this
case the default value is set to 2, otherwise to 1; the second respectively the first allocation
is reserved for the PDCCH, regardless whether this allocation is enabled or not.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALCount on page 400

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

129

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

Copy/Paste
Copies/pastes the settings of the selected subframe. P-SYNC/S-SYNC/PBCH settings
are not considered.
For more detailed information, see chapter 5.2.1, "Copy/Paste Subframe", on page 55.
Remote command:
n.a.
Show Time Plan
Calls the time plan for the OFDMA resource allocation.
The menu is described in detail in chapter 7.11, "OFDMA Timeplan", on page 176.
Remote command:
n.a.
Configure PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH
Calls a dialog for configuring the PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH.
The dialog is described in detail in chapter 7.7, "Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH
Channel Configuration", on page 144.
Remote command:
n.a.

7.5.3 DL Resource Allocation Table


The resource allocation table is located in the lower part of the "DL Frame Configuration" menu. The resource allocation table is where the individual allocation parameters
for a subframe are set.
Allocation number
Displays the consecutive number of the allocation.
Remote command:
n.a.
Codeword
Determines whether one or two codewords use the same physical resource, and whether
codeword #1 or #2 is configured with this allocation table entry
In case the data source for an allocation is set to User, changing this parameter will set
also the parameter "Code Word" of all allocations, belonging to the same User in the
corresponding subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CODWords
on page 400
Mod.
Selects the modulation scheme for the allocation.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

130

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

In case the data source for an allocation is set to User, changing this parameter will set
also the parameter "Modulation" of all allocations, belonging to the same User in the
corresponding subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
MODulation on page 401
Enhanced Settings DL
Calls the "Enhanced Settings" dialog for configuration of precoding and channel coding
(see chapter 7.6, "Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings", on page 137).
Remote command:
n.a.
VRB Gap
Enables the utilization of Virtual Resource Blocks (VBR) of distributed type and determines whether the first or the second gap is applied, i.e. determines the distribution and
the mapping of the VRB pairs to the Physical Resource Blocks (PRB) pairs.
The VRB-to-PRB mapping and the calculation of the VRB gap values are performed
according to 3GPP TS 36.211. The specification defines two types of VRBs, a localized
distribution with a direct mapping and distributed VRBs for better frequency diversity. The
distribution of the VRBs is performed in such a way, that consecutive VRBs are not mapped to frequency-consecutive PRBs, i.e. the VRBs are spread over the frequencies. Each
single VRB pair is split into two parts and a frequency gap between these two VRB parts
is introduced, i.e. a frequency hopping on a slot basis is applied. For wider channel
bandwidths (more than 50 RBs), a second VRB gap with smaller size may be applied.
Tip: Use the "DL Time Plan" to visualize the PDSCH mapping.
The information whether localizated or distributed VBRs are applied is carried by the
PDCCH. The DCI Formats 1A/1B/1D provide the special 1-bit flag "Localized/Distributed
VBR Assignment" for this purpose. The selection whether the first or the second gap is
applied, is determined by the additional bit "Gap Value".
Note: In case a Auto DCI mode is used, the "VRB Gap" value is read-only and is set
according to the configuration of the corresponding DCI format.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

131

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

Example:
"DL Channel Bandwidth" = 10 MHz (50 RBs)
Three subframes are configured:
Subframe#0
PDSCH allocaton#2 (User2): "VRB Gap" = 0
PDSCH allocaton#3 (User4): "VRB Gap" = 0

Subframe#1
PDSCH allocaton#2 (User2): "VRB Gap" = 1
PDSCH allocaton#3 (User4): "VRB Gap" = 1
Both allocations use distributed VRBs; the first VRB gap is applied.
According to TS 36.211, the 1st VRB gap for 10 MHz channel bandwidth is 27 RBs

Subframe#2
PDSCH allocaton#2 (User2): "VRB Gap" = 1
PDSCH allocaton#3 (User4): "VRB Gap" = 2
Both allocations use distributed VRBs; the first VRB gap is applied for PDSCH allocation#2 (User2) and the second VRB gap for the allocation#3 (User4) .
According to TS 36.211, the 2nd VRB gap for 10 MHz channel bandwidth is 9 RBs

Use the "DL Time Plan" to visualize the PDSCH mapping.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

132

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

Fig. 7-10: DL Time Plan


Subframe#0 = Localized VRB, direct mapping VRB-to-PRB
Subframe#1 = Distributed VRB: 1st Gap=27 RBs applied for User2 and User4
Subframe#2 = Distributed VRB: 1st Gap=27 RBs applied for User2, 2nd Gap=9RBs applied for User4

"0"

A localized distribution is applied, i.e. the PDSCH mapping is performed on a direct VRB-to-PRB mapping.

"1"

Enables a distributed resource block allocation. The first VRB gap is


used.

"2"

Enabled for "Channel Bandwidths" grater than 50 RBs.


The mapping is based on the second (smaller) VRB gap.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:GAP
on page 401
No. RB (Resource Blocks)
Defines bandwidth of selected allocation in terms of resource blocks per slot.
In case two codewords are configured, the defined bandwidth of the allocation with the
second codeword is determinate by the selected bandwidth of the first one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
RBCount on page 402

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

133

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

No. Sym.
Sets the size of the selected allocation in OFDM symbols.
For FDD mode and content type PDSCH, this value is set automatically in a way that the
allocation always fills the complete subframe with consideration of the symbol offset.
Example:
For Cyclic Prefix with normal length (14 OFDMA Symbols) and Symbol Offset = 2 the
resulting No. Of Symbols is 12.
In case two codewords are configured, the size of the allocation with the second codeword is determinate by the size of the first one.
While configuring a special subframe for TDD mode, the maximum size of the PDSCH
allocation is determined by the selected TDD Frame Structure Settings and depends on
the selected Cyclic Prefix.
The table below shows the cross-reference between the special subframe configuration
and the maximum number of OFDM symbols available for PUSCH (DwPTS) in a special
subframe for normal and extended CP respectively.
Configuration of Special Subframe

DwPTS

DwPTS

(Normal CP)

(Extended CP)

10

11

10

12

10

11

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
SYMCount on page 402
Offs RB
Sets the start resource block of the selected allocation.
Note: If the "Auto Offset Calculation" mode is activated, this value is read only.
In case two codewords are configured, the start resource block of the allocation with the
second codeword is determinate by the selected start resource block of the first one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
RBOFfset on page 403

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

134

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

Offs Sym.
Sets the start OFDM symbol of the selected allocation.
Note: If the "Auto Offset Calculation" mode is activated, this value is read only.
For extended cyclic prefix, the maximum symbol offset is 13.
Note: According to 3GPP TS 36.211, up to first three OFDM symbols of a subframe are
reserved for control information (PDCCH). Therefore, for PDSCH allocations the maximum value is 3, regardless of the cyclic prefix length.
In case two codewords are configured, the start OFDM symbol of the allocation with the
second codeword is determinate by the selected start OFDM symbol of the first one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
SYMoffset on page 403
Auto
Sets whether automatic offset calculation is used or not.
Note: If the "Auto Offset Calculation" mode is activated, the resource block offset and
the start symbol offset are set automatically and cannot be changed.
By setting new allocations or changing the number of RBs of an existing allocation, the
Auto mode tries to distribute the allocations with activated Auto mode in an optimal manner to the available resource blocks by adjusting the parameters "Offset RB". The resulting "No. of Bits" of a certain allocation can vary, due to overlapping control channels.
If it is not possible to distribute the changed configuration to the available resources
blocks, a conflict is displayed.
Note: "Auto Offset Calculation" mode is only available for PDSCH. For PDCCH this
parameter is always off.
In case two codewords are configured, the state of the "Auto Offset Calculation" mode
of the second codeword is set to the state of the first one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:AOC
on page 404
Phys. Bits
Displays the size of the selected allocation in bits and considering the subcarriers that
are used for other signals or channels with higher priority (see chapter 5.1, "Conflict
Handling in the R&S Signal Generator", on page 51 ).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PHYSbits? on page 404
Data Source
Selects the data source for the selected allocation.
"Data lists" can be generated internally in the data editor or externally.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by means of the "Data
List Management" button.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

135

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


DL Frame Configuration Settings

If the "Pattern" data type is used, the bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" input box. The
length is limited to 64 bits.
Data sources for "User 1 .. 4" can be configured in the User Configuration Settings dialog.
For PBCH allocation with enabled parameter MIB (including SFN), the "Data Source" is
automatical set to "MIB".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:DATA
on page 405
DList/Pattern
Displays the bit pattern or selected DLISt data, depending on the selected data source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
DSELect on page 405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PATTern on page 405
Rho A
Sets the power PPDSCH respectively PPBCH for the selected allocation.
The power of the PDCCH allocation PPDCCH is read-only. The value is set in the "Enhanced
Channel Configuration" dialog of the corresponding subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
POWer on page 406
Content Type
Selects the type of the selected allocation.
Note: There can be only one PBCH in subframe 0.
The reserved channel (RSVD) can be used for simulating possible upcoming channel
types.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CONType on page 406
State
Sets the allocation to active or inactive state.
In case two codewords are configured, the state of the allocation with the second codeword is determinate by the state of the first one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
STATe on page 407
Conflict
Indicates a conflict between allocations.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

136

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

For more information, see chapter 5.1, "Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator",
on page 51.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CONFlict on page 407

7.6 Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings


The "Enhanced Settings" dialog allows you to define and configure the precoding and
the channel coding settings for the DL channels PBCH and PDSCH. The settings are
configurable on a subframe basis.
The parameters available for configuration in section "Precoding" depend on the global
MIMO configuration, the content of the allocation and the selected codeword. Because
the same precoding settings are used for both codewords, the "Precoding" section is not
displayed in the "Enhanced Settings" dialog of the second codeword.

The values of parameters "Scrambling State", "UE ID" and "Channel Coding State" are
read-only for all allocations, where a User 1..4 is selected as "Data Source". These
parameters are set in the User Configuration Settings dialog for the corresponding user.
For all allocations belonging to the same user, the "Enhanced Settings" dialog is
accessed from any allocation related to this user.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

137

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

7.6.1 Allocation Settings


Allocation #
Displays the number of the allocation and the channel type the enhanced settings are
configured for.
Remote command:
n.a.
Code Word
Displays the number of the codeword and the total number of codewords used for the
selected allocation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CODWords
on page 400

7.6.2 Precoding Settings


The parameters available for configuration in section "Precoding" depend on the global
MIMO configuration, the content of the allocation and the selected codeword. Since the
same precoding settings are used for both codewords, the "Precoding" section is not
displayed in the "Enhanced Settings" menu of the second codeword.
Precoding Scheme
Selects the precoding scheme.
This parameter is available for the first codeword only.
Note: The available selections depend on the selected Content Type and the MIMO
Configuration.
"None"

Disables precoding.

"Spatial Multiplexing"
Precoding for spatial multiplexing will be performed according to 3GPP
TS 36.211 and the selected parameters.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

138

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

"Tx Diversity"

Precoding for transmit diversity will be performed according to 3GPP


TS 36.211 and the selected parameters.

"Beamforming (UE-spec.RS)"
Sets the PDSCH to transmission mode selected with the parameter
Transmission Scheme.
"Antenna Port 4"
(for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84)
Default precoding scheme for the PMCH transmitted in MBFSN subframes.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:SCHeme on page 428
Transmission Scheme
(for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84)
Determines the transmission scheme (see also table 3-3).
"Transmission
Scheme"

Available for Global MIMO


Configuration

Description

"Single Layer (TxM


7)"

SISO+BF

Sets the PDSCH to transmission mode 7, as described in 3GPP TS 36.213, i.e. UE-specific RS will be
added to the PDSCH.

2Tx/4Tx-Antennas

This special mode is defined for transmission using


antenna port 5. In the R&S Signal Generator, antenna
port 5 is simulated by all enabled antennas, depending on the selected Global MIMO Configuration . Note
that for "SISO + BF" configuration mode, antenna port
5 is simulated by maximum two antennas.
Tip: To enable the instrument to generate a transmission using antenna port 5 signal (transmission
corresponding to the UE-specific reference signal) as
defined in the 3GPP TS 36.101, chapter 8.3, set the
parameter "Global MIMO Configuration" to "SISO +
BF".
"Dual layer (TxM 8)"

SISO+BF
2Tx/4Tx-Antennas

Sets the PDSCH to transmission mode 8, as described in 3GPP TS 36.213, i.e. UE-specific RS will be
added to the PDSCH.
In this mode antenna ports 7 and 8 are used. In the
R&S Signal Generator, antenna ports 7 and 8 are
simulated by all enabled antennas, depending on the
selected "Global MIMO Configuration".
Tip: To enable the instrument to generate a transmission using antenna port 7 and 8, set the parameter
"Global MIMO Configuration" to "SISO + BF", "2 Txantennas" or "4 Tx-antennas".

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:TRSCheme on page 429

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

139

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

Code Words
Displays the number of the codewords used for the selected allocation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CODWords
on page 400
Number of Layers
Displays the number of layers for the selected allocation. The number of available layers
depends on the selected "Content Type" and the "Precoding Scheme".
The combination of number of code words and number of layers determines the layer
mapping for the selected precoding scheme.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:NOLayers on page 427
Scrambling Identity n_SCID
Sets the scrambling identity according to 36.211, sec. 6.10.3.1.
This value is used for initialization of the sequence used for generation of the UE-specific
reference signals.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:SCID on page 428
Antenna Ports
(for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84)
Displays and configures the antenna port(s) for the selected Transmission Scheme.
In case only one code word and therefore only one layer is configured in the "Dual Layer
(TxMode 8)", the mapping of the layer to antenna port 7 or antenna port 8 is configurable.
Tip: Use this configuration possibility to configure a dual-layer multi-user MIMO (MUMIMO) scenario.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:AP on page 425
Antenna Port Mapping
(for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84)
Sets the way that the logical antenna ports are mapped to the physical Tx antennas, see
Mapping Methods.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:APM on page 426
Codebook Index
(Enabled for Precoding Scheme set to Tx Diversity or Spatial Multiplexing and codeword
1 only)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

140

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

Sets the codebook index for the selected allocation, i.e. selects the predefined pre-coder
matrix.
The number of available codebook indices depends on the Global MIMO Configuration,
i.e. the number of used antennas.
The figure bellow shows the range of the Codebook Index for Spatial Multiplexing.

The combination of codebook index and the selected Number of Layers determines the
pre-coding matrix used for precoding.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:CBINdex on page 426
Cyclic Delay Diversity
(Enabled for Precoding Scheme set to Tx Diversity or Spatial Multiplexing and codeword
1 only)
Sets the CDD for the selected allocation.
The combination of cyclic delay diversity and the selected Number of Layers determines
the precoding parameters for spatial multiplexing.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:CDD on page 426
Mapping Coordinates
Switches between the Cartesian (Real/Imag.) and Cylindrical (Magn./Phase) coordinates
representation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PRECoding:DAFormat on page 427
Mapping Table
(for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84)
Defines the mapping of the antenna ports (AP) to the physical antennas, see Mapping
Table.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

141

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

7.6.3 Scrambling Settings


Provided are the following settings:
State Scrambling (DL)
Enables/disables the bit-level scrambling.
If a "User 1..4" is selected for the Data Source in the allocation table for the corresponding
allocation, the "State Scrambling" is read only and the value is displayed as set in the
User Configuration Settings dialog for the corresponding user.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
SCRambling:STATe on page 429
UE ID/n_RNTI (PDSCH)
Sets the user equipment identifier (n_RNTI) of the user to which the PDSCH transmission
is intended. The UE ID is used to calculate the scrambling sequence.
If a "User 1..4" is selected for the Data Source in the allocation table for the corresponding
allocation, the "UE ID" is read only and the value is displayed as set in the User Configuration Settings dialog for the corresponding user.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
SCRambling:UEID on page 429

7.6.4 Channel Coding Settings


Provided are the following settings:
State Channel Coding (DL)
Enables/disables channel coding for the selected allocation and code word.
If a User "1..4" is selected for the Data Source in the allocation table for the corresponding
allocation, the "Channel Coding State" is read only and the value is displayed as set in
the User Configuration Settings dialog for the corresponding user.
A PBCH can be generated in one of the following modes:
Without channel coding, i.e. this parameter is disabled.
Dummy data or user-defined data list are used.
Channel coding with arbitrary transport block content
Channel coding is activated and parameter MIB (including SFN) is disabled.
Channel coding with real data (MIB) including SFN
Channel coding and MIB are activated.
For the PBCH allocation with activated channel coding, one block of data (Transport
Block Size of 24) is coded jointly and then spread over four frames. Hence, the ARB
sequence length has to be set accordingly to be a multiple of four.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CCODing:STATe on page 424

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

142

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PBCH, PDSCH and PMCH Settings

Type Channel Coding (DL)


Displays the used channel coding scheme and channel coding rate.
PBCH uses always tail biting convolution coding with code rate 1/3; PDSCH uses always
turbo code with code rate 1/3.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CCODing:TYPE? on page 425
Number of Physical Bits (DL)
Displays the size of the selected allocation in bits and considering the subcarriers that
are used for other signals or channels with higher priority (see chapter 5.1, "Conflict
Handling in the R&S Signal Generator", on page 51).
If a User 1...4 is selected for the Data Source in the allocation table for the corresponding
allocation, the value of the parameter "Number of Physical Bits" is the sum of the "Physical
Bits" of all single allocations that belong to the same user in the selected subframe.
The size of the PBCH allocation is fixed to 1920/4 Frames, 480/1 Frame.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PHYSbits? on page 404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:USER<ch>:PHYSbits?
on page 408
MIB (including SFN)
(for PBCH only)
Enables/disables transmission of real MIB (master information block) data, calculated
according to the values of the following "General Dl Settings" parameters:
Channel Bandwidth
PHICH Duration
"PHICH N_g" on page 123
The SFN (System Frame Number) is included as well.
If this parameter is enabled, the "Transport Block Size" is fixed to 24 and the Data
Source for the PBCH allocation is set to "MIB".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:MIB on page 422
SFN Offset
(for PBCH only)
By default, the counting of the SFN (System Frame Number) starts with 0. Use this
parameter to set a different start SFN value.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:SOFFset on page 423
SFN Restart Period
(for instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K84)
not available for R&S SMBV and R&S WinIQSIM2

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

143

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Determines the time span after which the SFN (System Frame Number) restarts.
By default, the SFN restart period is equal to the ARB sequence length. Selecting a SFN
restart period of "1024 Frames", enables the instrument to calculate the PBCH including
SFN independently from the other channels. With this setting, the SFN restarts after 1024
frames and the generation process is fully 3GPP compliant, but the calculation may take
very long time.
Tip: Use the "3GPP (1024 Frames)" mode only if 3GPP compliant SFN period is required!
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:SRPeriod on page 423
Transport Block Size/Payload (DL)
Defines the size of the transport block/payload in bits.

Since only one transport block is generated and spread over all allocations, for allocations with "Data Source" set to User 1..4, the channel coding parameters "Transport
Block Size", "Redundancy Version Index" and "IR Soft Buffer Size" are related to all
allocations that belong to the same user in the corresponding subframe.
In case a spatial multiplexing with two code words is configured, individual transport
blocks for the two code blocks are generated.
For PBCH allocations with enabled parameter MIB (including SFN), the transport
block size is fixed to 24.
Set the transport block size to 24 if a generation compliant to the 3GPP specifications
is required.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CCODing:TBSize on page 424
Redundancy Version Index (PDSCH)
Sets the redundancy version index.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CCODing:RVINdex on page 424
IR Soft Buffer Size (PDSCH)
Sets the size of the IR soft buffer for the selected transport block (N_IR from TS 36.212).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
CCODing:ISBSize on page 423

7.7 Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration


The "Enhanced Channel Configuration" dialog allows you to define and configure the
PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH settings per subframe. The subframe for which the

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

144

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH settings are currently configured is indicated in the window
name.
The parameters available for configuration in section "Precoding" depend on the Global
MIMO Configuration.

7.7.1 Precoding Settings


State (Enhanced Channels)
Enables/disables the PDCCH, PCFICH and PHICH allocation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:STATe on page 432

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

145

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Precoding Scheme (Enhanced Channels)


Selects the precoding scheme for PDCCH, PCFICH and PHICH.
"None"

Disables precoding.

"Tx Diversity"

Precoding for transmit diversity will be performed according to 3GPP


TS 36.211 and the selected parameters.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PRECoding:SCHeme
on page 432
Number of Layers (Enhanced Channels)
(Enabled for Precoding Scheme set to Tx Diversity)
Displays the number of layers for PDCCH, PCFICH and PHICH. This value is fixed to 1
for PDCCH, PCFICH and PHICH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PRECoding:NOLayers?
on page 433

7.7.2 PCFICH Settings


Provided are the following settings:
PCFICH Power
Sets the power of the PCFICH (PPCFICH).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PCFich:POWer
on page 433
Scrambling State (PCFICH)
Enables/disables the scrambling of the PCFICH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PCFich:SCRambling:
STATe on page 434
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:SCRambling:
STATe on page 437
Control Region for PDCCH
Sets the size of the control region, i.e. the number of OFDM Symbols that he region spans.
Whether 1, 2, 3 or 4 OFDM Symbols can be reserved for PDCCH depends on the parameters given in the following table.
Channel Bandwidth

No RB > 10

PHICH Duration

Duplex. Mode

OFDM Symbols in

the control region

Normal Subframe

Special Subframe

Normal

FDD

1,2,3

Normal

TDD

1,2,3

1,2

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

146

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Channel Bandwidth

No RB <=10

PHICH Duration

Duplex. Mode

OFDM Symbols in

the control region

Normal Subframe

Special Subframe

Extended

FDD

Extended

TDD

Normal

FDD

2,3,4

Normal

TDD

2,3,4

Extended

FDD

3,4

Extended

TDD

3,4

The size of the control region can vary per subframe.


Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BW on page 375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:DURation on page 381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PCFich:CREGion
on page 434

7.7.3 PHICH Settings


Provided are the follwoing settings:
Number of PHICH Groups
Displays the number of available PHICH groups, depending on the value of the parameter
PHICH N_g.
This parameter is enabled for configuration only if the parameter "PHICH N_g" is set to
"Custom".

For normal CP, one PHICH group consists of 8 ACK/NACK messages from several
users.
For extended CP, 4 ACK/NACK messages from several users are carried by on
PHICH group.

Each PHICH group uses 3 resource element groups (REGs); hence the total number of
REGs used for PHICH is 3 times the number of PHICH groups.
The number of the available OFDM symbols for the allocation of this total number of REGs
depends on the selection made for the parameter PHICH Duration (normal or extended).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:NOGRoups
on page 436
Power Mode
Determines whether all PHICH in a PHICH group are send with the same power or enables the adjustment of each PPHICH individualy.
The parameter Power Info displays the power values of the configured PHICHs.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

147

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

"Constant"

The power of a PHICH (PPHICH) in a PHICH group is set with the parameter Power.

"Individual"

The power of the individual PHICHs is set in the PHICH Power Config
dialog.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:PMODe on page 435
PHICH Power
Sets the power of one PHICH (PPHICH) in a PHICH group, i.e. the total power of one PHICH
group is the sum of the power of the transmitted PHICHs within this group.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:POWer on page 435
ACK/NACK Pattern Group 0 .. 9
Sets the ACK/NACK pattern for the corresponding PHICH group.
A "1" indicates an ACK, a "0" - a NACK, a "-" indicates DTX.
DTX means that the corresponding PHICH is not transmitted, i.e. the orthogonal
sequence is not used.
Since the number of ACK/NACK messages carried by a PHICH group depends on the
Cyclic Prefix, a pattern group consists of 8 or 4 values for normal and extended CP
respectively.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:ANPattern<ch0>
on page 436
Power Info
Displays the power values of the configured PHICHs.
Remote command:
n.a.
Power Settings Config.
Opens the "PHICH Power Config". dialog to configure the power of the PHICHs individualy.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

148

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

"ACK/NACK
Pattern Group"

Displays the ACK/NACK pattern group the values are adjusted for.

"PHICH 0..7"

Sets the power of the individual PHICHs

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:GROup<ch0>:
ITEM<user0>:POW on page 435

7.7.4 PDCCH Settings


Provided are the following settings:
PDCCH Power
Sets the power of the PDCCH (PPDCCH).
The value set with this parameter is also displayed in the allocation table for the corresponding allocation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:POWer on page 436
Scrambling State (PDCCH)
Enables/disables the scrambling of the PDCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:SCRambling:
STATe on page 437
Number of Bits (PDCCH)
Defines the number of bits allocated for PDCCH.
The number of bits available for PDCCH allocation depends on the selected
Channel Bandwidth
Global MIMO Configuration
Number of PHICH Groups

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

149

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

PHICH Duration
Control Region for PDCCH

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:BITS on page 437
Number of available REGs (PDCCH)
Defines the number of the REGs that are available for the PDCCH allocation.
The number of REGs available for PDCCH allocation depends on the Number of Bits
available for PDCCH (#BitsPDCCH) and is calculated as follow:
#REGs availablePDCCH = #BitsPDCCH / 8
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:AVRegs
on page 437
Number of available CCEs (PDCCH)
Defines the number of the control channel elements (CCEs) that are available for the
PDCCH allocation.
The PDCCH is mapped to the REGs not used for PHICH and PCFICH and transmitted
on one or several CCEs, where a CCE corresponds to 9 REGs, i.e. the number of the
available CCEs is calculated as follow:
#CCEs availablePDCCH = #REGs available PDCCH / 9
Note: If "Activate Carrier Aggregation > ON", the paramter "Number of available CCEs
(PDCCH)" displays information about the PCell.
Information related to the SCells is displayed by the corresponding parameter Number
of Dummy CCEs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:AVCCes
on page 438
PDCCH Format
Sets the PDCCH format.
The PDCCH format determines how many CCEs (control channel elements) will be used
for the transmission of the PDCCH, i.e. determines how many PDCCHs (#PDCCH) can
be transmitted.
The table below gives an overview of the supported PDCCH Formats, as defined in the
3GPP specification.
The figure below shows the distribution of the PDCCH over the CCEs for the different
formats.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

150

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

"Variable"

Select this mode to enable full flexibility by the configuration of the


downlink control information (DCI) format and content (see chapter 7.7.5, "PDCCH Format Variable", on page 153).

"-1"

R&S Signal Generator's proprietary format for legacy support.


This format corresponds to the transmission of one PDCCH on all available REGs, i.e.

REGs available PDCCH = #REGs allocated PDCCH,

#PDCCH = 1,

#DummyREGs = 0.

"0"

One PDCCH is transmitted on one CCE, i.e. #REG=1.

"1"

One PDCCH is transmitted on two CCEs, i.e. #REG=18.

"2"

One PDCCH is transmitted on four CCEs, i.e. #REG=36.

"3"

One PDCCH is transmitted on eight CCEs, i.e. #REG=72.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:FORMat
on page 438
Number of PDCCHs
(for "PDCCH Format" different than "Variable")
Sets the number of PDCCHs to be transmitted.
The maximum number PDCCH that can be transmitted on the available REGs for PDCCH
depends on the number of REGs (#REG) reserved for the transmission of one PDCCH,
i.e. depends on the selected PDCCH Format and is calculated as follow:
#PDCCH = REGs available PDCCH / #REG.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:NOPDcchs
on page 439
Number of REGs allocated to PDCCH
(for "PDCCH Format" different than "Variable")
Defines the number of REGs that are actually allocated for PDCCH transmission (#REGs
allocatedPDCCH) and is calculated as follow:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

151

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

#REGs allocatedPDCCH = #PDCCH * #REG


Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:ALRegs
on page 440
Number of Dummy REGs
(for "PDCCH Format" different than "Variable")
Displays the number of REGs that are available for the PDCCH allocation but are not
allocated and is calculated as follow:
#DummyREGs = REGs available PDCCH - #REGs allocated PDCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:DREGs on page 440
Data Source (PDCCH)
(for "PDCCH Format" different than "Variable")
Selects the data source for PDCCH.
Data lists can be generated internally in the data editor or externally and have to have a
file extension *.dm_iqd.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by means of the "Data
List Management" button.
If the "Pattern" data type is used, the bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" input box. The
length is limited to 64 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:DATA on page 441
DList/Pattern (PDCCH)
(for "PDCCH Format" different than "Variable")
Displays the bit pattern or selected DLISt data, depending on the selected data source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:PATTern
on page 441
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:PATTern
on page 441

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

152

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

7.7.5 PDCCH Format Variable


To enable the setings described in this section, select "PDCCH Format > Variable".

Use these parameters and the DCI table to configure the multiple scheduling messages (DCIs) with the corresponding PDCCHs.
Dummy CCE REGs
Sets the behavior of the dummy REGs, i.e. determines whether dummy data or DTX is
transmitted.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:DCRegs:TRSource
on page 442
Dummy CCE Data Source
Selects the data source for the dummy CCE.
"Data lists" can be generated internally in the data editor or externally and have to have
a file extension *.dm_iqd.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by means of the "Data
List Management" button.
If the "Pattern" data type is used, the bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" input box. The
length is limited to 64 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:DCRegs:DATA
on page 442
DList/Pattern (Dummy CCE)
Displays the bit pattern or selected DLISt data, depending on the selected data source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:DCRegs:PATTern
on page 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:DCRegs:DSELect
on page 442

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

153

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Append
Adds a new row at the end of the table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:APPend
on page 444
Insert
Insert a new row before the current one.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:SITem
on page 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:INSert
on page 444
Delete
Deletes the selected row.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:SITem
on page 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:DELete
on page 444
Down/Up
Moves the selected row down or up.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:SITem
on page 443
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:DOWN
on page 444
Reset
Resets the table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:RESet
on page 445
Resolve Conflicts
The "Resolve Conf." is a built-in algorithm that re-assigns automatically the CCE values
depending on the configured "Search Space"; previously configured CCE values will not
be maintained. If the conflict can not be resolved automatically, the values are left
unchanged.
For more information on how to solve DCI conflicts, see chapter 5.1.3, "DCI Conflict
Handling", on page 53.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:SOLVe?
on page 445

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

154

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

DCI Table
Comprises the settings concerning the PDCCH content.
User DCI Table
Selects the User the DCI is dedicated to. The available DCI Format depend on the value
of this parameter.
Note: If "Activate Carrier Aggregation > ON", the Cell Index determines the component
carrier the corresponding User is mapped to. To enable one particular User in more than
one component carrier, append several table rows and enable the same User in the
different component carriers.
"User 1 .. 4"

Selects one of the four users configured in the User Configuration Settings dialog.

"P-RNTI/SRNTI/RARNTI"

A group of users is selected.

"None"

Allows free definition of all settings

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
USER on page 448
UE_ID/n_RNTI DCI Table
Displays the UE_ID or the n_RNTI for the selected PDCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
UEID on page 445
Cell Index DCI Table
Determines the component carrier the corresponding DCI is transmitted on.
This parameter refers to the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration > Cell Index". The
"Cell Index" of the PCell (Primary Cell) is always set to 0.
Example:
If the following settings are enabled in the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration" dialog,
the value range of the parameter "Cell Index" is 0, 1, 3, 5 and 7.
Component Carrier

Cell Index

PCell

SCell#1

SCell#2

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

155

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Component Carrier

Cell Index

SCell#3

SCell#4

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
CELL on page 446
DCI Format DCI Table
Sets the DCI format for the selected PDCCH.
The downlink control information (DCI) is a message used to control the physical layer
resource allocation in both the UL and DL direction and carries scheduling information
as well as uplink power control commands. The DCI is mapped on the PDCCH and
depending on the DCI message size and usage are categorized into four different formats
that are further sub-divided (see table 7-8).
Table 7-8: Overview DCI Formats
DCI Format

Purpose

DCI Format 0

PUSCH allocation information

DCI Format 1

PDSCH information with one code word

DCI Format 1A
DCI Format 1B
DCI Format 1C
DCI Format 1D
DCI Format 2/2A/2B

PDSCH information for MIMO configuration (two code


words)

DCI Format 3/3A

Uplink power control information

The fields of each DCI format are configurable parameters that can be adjusted in the
corresponding dialog box. Select Content Config to access this dialog box for the selected
"DCI Format".
Not all DCI Formats are always enabled for selection. The table below gives an overview
of the cross-reference between the available DCI Formats and the selected User.
User

DCI Format

P-RNTI/SI-RNTI/RA-RNTI

1A, 1C

User 1..4

1, 1A, 1B, 1D, 2, 2A, 2B

None

All formats

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
DCIFmt on page 445

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

156

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Search Space DCI Table


Defines the search space for the selected DCI, i.e determines the valid CCE indexes.
The search space determines the set of CCEs a UE monitors. The UE can decode only
the control information on a PDCCH that is transmitted over CCEs within the search
space this UE monitors.
Note: The 3GPP specification defines two kinds of search spaces, the common and the
UE-specific search space.
Avoid the use of the "Auto" and "Off" values; this values are provided for backwards
compatibility reasons only.
"Off"

No search space is determined, i.e. all CCEs have to be monitored.

"Auto"

Provided for backward compatibility only.


An internal mapping to the common and UE-specific search space is
applied depending on the selected user: for "User 1..4", "Auto" corresponds to "UE-spec"; in all other cases, "Auto" corresponds to "Common".

"Common"

The DCI is mapped to the common search space.


A common search space is used when all or a group of UEs are
addressed. The combination User 1 and common search space is
enabled in PCell only.

"UE-spec"

Non-common DCIs are mapped to the UE-specific search space.


Each UE has multiple UE-specific search space, determined as a function of the UE_ID and the subframe. A UE-specific search space applies
for the User set to "User 1..4".

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
SESPace on page 448
Content Config DCI Table
Opens a dialog to configure the DCI fields of the selected DCI Format.
Remote command:
n.a.
PDCCH Format (Variable) DCI Table
Sets the PDCCH format.
The PDCCH format determines how many CCEs (control channel elements) will be used
for the transmission of the PDCCH.
The table below gives an overview of the supported PDCCH Formats, as defined in the
3GPP specification.
PDCCH format

Number of CCEs

Number of REGs

Number of PDCCH bits

72

18

144

36

288

72

576

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

157

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

"0"

One PDCCH is transmitted on one CCE, i.e. #REG=1.

"1"

One PDCCH is transmitted on two CCEs, i.e. #REG=18.

"2"

One PDCCH is transmitted on four CCEs, i.e. #REG=36.

"3"

One PDCCH is transmitted on eight CCEs, i.e. #REG=72.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
PFMT on page 446
Number CCEs DCI Table
Defines the number of control channel elements used for the transmission of the PDCCH.
The value is determined by the selected PDCCH Format (Variable).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
NCCes on page 446
CCE Index DCI Table
Sets the CCE start index.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
CINDex on page 447
Number of Dummy CCEs DCI Table
Defines the number of dummy CCEs that are appended to the corresponding PDCCH.
Note: If "Activate Carrier Aggregation > ON", the "Number of Dummy CCEs" is calculated
per component carrier and depends on the selected Bandwidth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
NDCCes on page 447
Conflict (DCI) DCI Table
Indicates a conflict between two DCI formats.
For more information on how to solve DCI conflicts, see chapter 5.1.3, "DCI Conflict
Handling", on page 53.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
CONFlict? on page 448

7.7.6 DCI Format Configuration


Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)
(Requires option R&S SMx/AMU-K85 LTE-A Rel. 10)
This field is enabled if the "Activate Carrier Aggregation > ON" and for User with enabled
"Configure User > Activate CA".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

158

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

The CIF is present in each DCI Format and indentifies the component carrier that carries
the PDSCH or PUSCH for the particuliar PDCCH in the cross-carrier approach (see
figure 3-24).
According to the LTE specification, cross-carrier scheduling is enabled by higher-level
signaling. To enable cross-carrier scheduling in this implementation, enable the "DL Carrier Aggregation Configuration>CIF Present" for component carrier/cell.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
DCIConf:CIField on page 449
Bit Data
Displays the resulting bit data as selected with the DCI format parameters.
The mapping DCI format fields to the information bits is according to the 3GPP specification TS 36.212.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
DCIConf:BITData? on page 449
DCI Format 0
The DCI format 0 is used for scheduling uplink transmission on PUSCH and transmits
the information listed in the table bellow.

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

159

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"Carrier Indicator
Field (CIF)"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CIField on page 449

see "Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)"


on page 158

"PUSCH Frequency [
:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
Hopping"
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:PFHopping
on page 454
"Resource Block
Assignment and
Hopping Resource
Allocation"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RAHR on page 456

"Modulation and
Coding Scheme
and Redundancy
Version"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:MCSR on page 453

"New Data Indicator"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:NDI on page 454

"TPC Command for


PUSCH"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPCC on page 459

"Cyclic Shift for


DMRS"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CSDMrs on page 451

"UL Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:ULINdex on page 461

Enabled for TDD


mode and TDD
Frame Structure
Settings 0

"Downlink Assignment Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DLAindex
on page 452

Enabled for TDD


mode and UL/DL
Configuration 1 - 6

"CSI/CQI Request"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CSIRequest
on page 451

"Resource Allocation Type"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RAType on page 456

DCI Format 1
The DCI format 1 carries information for scheduling transmission of one code word on
PDSCH. The different fields of this format are summarized in the table bellow.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

160

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"Carrier Indicator
Field (CIF)"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CIField on page 449

see "Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)"


on page 158

"Resource Allocation Header"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RAH on page 455

Enabled for Channel Bandwidth >


10RBs

"Resource Block
Assignment"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RBA on page 456

"Modulation and
Coding Scheme"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:MCSR on page 453

"HARQ Process
Number"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:HPN on page 453

"New Data Indicator"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:NDI on page 454

"Redundancy Version"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RV on page 457

"TPC Command for


PUCCH"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPCC on page 459

"Downlink Assignment Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DLAindex
on page 452

Enabled for "TDD"


mode

DCI Format 1A
DCI format 1A is used for the compact scheduling of one PDSCH code word and random
access procedure initiated by a PDCCH order.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

161

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
The contents of DCI Format 1A are listed in the table bellow; the available fields depend
whether a PDSCH or PRACH is transmitted.
Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"Carrier Indicator
Field (CIF)"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CIField on page 449

see "Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)"


on page 158

"Mode"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:F1AMode on page 449

"Localized/Distributed VRB Assignment"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:VRBA on page 461

"GAP Value"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:GAP on page 452

"Resource Block
Assignment"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RBA on page 456

"Modulation and
Coding Scheme"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:MCSR on page 453

PDSCH Mode

"HARQ Process
Number"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:HPN on page 453

PDSCH Mode

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

Enabled for Channel Bandwidth >=


50RBs, Distributed
VBR Assignment
and User = User
1..4

162

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"New Data Indicator"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:NDI on page 454

PDSCH Mode

"Redundancy Version"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RV on page 457

PDSCH Mode

"TPC Command"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPCC on page 459

PDSCH Mode

"Downlink Assignment Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DLAindex
on page 452

PDSCH Mode
Enabled for "TDD"
mode

"Preamble Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:PRACh:PRINdex
on page 450

PRACH Mode

"PRACH Mask
Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:PRACh:MINDex
on page 450

PRACH Mode

DCI Format 1B
DCI format 1B is used for the compact scheduling of one PDSCH code word with precoding information, i.e. when MIMO operation is involved.
The precoding information consists of 2 or 4 bits for 2 and 4 antennas respectively.

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
The DCI Format 1B transmits the information listed in the table bellow.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

163

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"Carrier Indicator
Field (CIF)"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CIField on page 449

see "Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)"


on page 158

"Localized/Distributed VRB Assignment"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:VRBA on page 461

"GAP Value"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:GAP on page 452

"Resource Block
Assignment"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RBA on page 456

"Modulation and
Coding Scheme"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:MCSR on page 453

"HARQ Process
Number"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:HPN on page 453

"New Data Indicator"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:NDI on page 454

"Redundancy Version"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RV on page 457

"TPC Command"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPCC on page 459

"Downlink Assignment Index"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DLAindex
on page 452

"TPMI Information
for Precoding"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPMI on page 460

"PMI Confirmation
for Precoding"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:PMI on page 454

Enabled for Channel Bandwidth >=


50RBs, Distributed
VBR Assignment
and User = User
1..4

Enabled for TDD


mode

DCI Format 1C
DCI format 1C is used for very compact scheduling of one PDSCH code word.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

164

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
The DCI Format 1C transmits the information listed in the table bellow.
Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

GAP Value

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:GAP on page 452

Enabled for Channel Bandwidth >=


50RBs

Resource Block
Assignment

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RBA on page 456

Modulation and
Coding Scheme

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:MCSR on page 453

DCI Format 1D
DCI format 1D is used for the compact scheduling of one PDSCH code word with precoding and power offset information.

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
The DCI Format 1D transmits the information listed in the table bellow.
Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"Carrier Indicator
Field (CIF)"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CIField on page 449

see "Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)"


on page 158

Localized/Distrib

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:VRBA on page 461

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

165

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Control Information Field

SCPI command

Resource Block
Assignment

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RBA on page 456

GAP Value

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:GAP on page 452

Modulation and
Coding Scheme

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:MCSR on page 453

HARQ Process
Number

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:HPN on page 453

New Data Indicator

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:NDI on page 454

Redundancy Version

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RV on page 457

TPC Command for


PUCCH

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPCC on page 459

Downlink Assignment Index

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DLAindex
on page 452

TPMI Information
for Precoding

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPMI on page 460

Downlink Power
Offset

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DPOFfset
on page 452

Dependencies

Enabled for Channel Bandwidth >=


50RBs, Distributed
VBR Assignment
and User = User
1..4

Enabled for TDD


mode

DCI Format 2/2A/2B


The DCI Format 2 is used for scheduling PDSCH when spatial multiplexing is configured.
The DCI Format 2A is also used for the scheduling in a spatial multiplexing configuration,
but without PMI feedback. The DCI Format 2B is enabled for 2-, 4-Tx-Antennas.
Since MIMO operation requires two codewords, the modulation and coding scheme, new
data indicator and the redundancy version are signaled separately for each of the codewords. The spatial multiplexing also requires a transmission of precoding information.
The transport block to codeword mapping is performed according to the 3GPP specification, i.e. transport block 1 (TB1) is mapped to codeword 1 (CW1) and TB2 to CW2
respectively. The "Transport Block to Codeword Swap Flag "determines the mapping in
case both transport blocks are enabled. If this swap flag is enabled, the TB1 is mapped
to CW2 and vice versa.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

166

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

The fields defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
The DCI Format 2/2A/2B transmits the information listed in the table bellow.
Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

"Carrier Indicator
Field (CIF)"

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:CIField on page 449

see "Carrier Indicator Field (CIF)"


on page 158

Resource Allocation [
:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
Header
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RAH on page 455
Resource Block
Assignment

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:RBA on page 456

TPC Command for


PUCCH

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TPCC on page 459

Downlink Assignment Index

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:DLAindex
on page 452

HARQ Process
Number

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:HPN on page 453

Transport Block to
Codeword Swap
Flag

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:SWAPflag
on page 457

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

Enabled for Channel


Bandwidth > 10RBs

Enabled for TDD


mode

DCI Format 2/2A


only

167

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PCFICH, PHICH and PDCCH Channel Configuration

Control Information Field

SCPI command

Dependencies

Scrambling Identity

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:SID on page 459

DCI Format 2B only

Precoding Information

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:PRECinfo
on page 455

DCI Format 2/2A


only

"Transport Block 1"


Modulation and
Coding Scheme

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TB1:MCS on page 458

New Data Indicator

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TB2:NDI on page 458

Redundancy Version

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TB1:RV on page 458
"Transport Block 2"

Modulation and
Coding Scheme

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TB2:MCS on page 458

New Data Indicator

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TB2:NDI on page 458

Redundancy Version

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:
PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:DCIConf:TB2:RV on page 458

DCI Format 3/3A


The DCI Format 3/3A is used for the transmission of TPC Commands for PUCCH and
PUSCH with 2-bit and a single bit power adjustment respectively.

The "TPC Command" is set as a bit pattern.


The field defined in the DCI format are mapped to the information bits according to the
3GPP specification and the resulting Bit Data is displayed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:EXTC:ITEM<ch0>:
DCIConf:TPCinstr on page 460

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

168

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Configuration Settings

7.8 User Configuration Settings


The "Configure User" settings allow you to define and configure up to four scheduled user
equipments that can be freely distributed over the whole frame by setting the data source
of a certain allocation to "User 1 .. 4".
Using this feature ensures that a common data source is used for allocations of one user
equipment also in case that these allocations are non-adjacent.
Following settings are identical for all allocations belonging to the same user in one subframe:

Modulation - changing the modulation of one of the allocations belonging to a user


changes the modulation of all other allocations of the same user in the subframe.
Different modulations may be selected for the two code words of an allocation.

Complete Precoding Settings - changing the precoding settings of one of the allocations belonging to a user changes the precoding settings of all other allocations of
the same user in the subframe.

Scrambling Settings (Scrambling State and UE ID/n_RNTI) and Channel Coding


State - changing the scrambling settings and the channel coding state for one user
changes the scrambling settings and the channel coding state of all allocations of the
same user in the frame. The Scrambling State, UE ID/n_RNTI and Channel Coding
State are also displayed in the "Enhanced Settings" dialog of each allocation.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

169

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Configuration Settings

For more details, see chapter 4.9, "Data Allocations", on page 46.
User (Configure User)
Displays the consecutive number of the users.
Remote command:
n.a.
Tx Mode
(enabled for "Auto/DCI" scheduling mode)
Sets the transmission mode of the according user as defined in 3GPP TS 36.213, section
7.1.
Tx Mode 8 requires the additional SW option R&S SMx/AMU-K84.
Depending on the selection here, only valid DCI formats can be set for this user. According to the selected "Tx mode" and the selected "DCI format", the "Precoding" for the
according PDSCH allocation is set automatically. If no Tx mode is selected, i.e. "-" is set,
the range for valid DCI formats is not affected
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:TXM on page 407
UE Category
Sets the UE Category.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:UEC on page 408
Configure Ant. Mapping
For "Tx Mode 7" and "Tx Mode 8", the Antenna Port Mapping Settings dialog opens to
define the mapping of the logical antenna ports to the available physical Tx antennas.
State Scrambling (User)
Enables/disables scrambling for all allocations belonging to the selected user.
The "Scrambling State" ("Enhanced Settings" menu) of all allocations for which "User
1..4" is selected as Data Source, is set to the value set with this parameter.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:SCRambling:STATe on page 478

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

170

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Configuration Settings

State Channel Coding (User)


Enables/disables channel coding for all allocations belonging to the selected user.
The "Channel Coding State" ("Enhanced Settings" menu) of all allocations for which "User
1..4" is selected as Data Source, is set to the value set with this parameter.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:CCODing:STATe on page 478
UE ID (User)
Sets the user equipment ID. This UE ID will be used for the generation of the scrambling
sequence for the allocation, for which an "User 1..4" is selected as Data Source in the
allocation table of DL Frame Configuration Settings dialog.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:UEID on page 479
Data Source (User)
Selects the data source for the selected user.
"Data lists" can be generated internally in the data editor or externally.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by means of the "Data
List Management" button.
If the "Pattern" data type is used, the bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" input box. The
length is limited to 64 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:DATA on page 479
DList Pattern (User)
Displays the bit pattern or selected DLISt data, depending on the selected data source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:DSELect on page 479
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:PATTern on page 480
P_A
Sets PDSCH power factor according to 3GPP TS 36.213, chapter 5.2.
This power value is applied to all allocations that belong to the corresponding user. The
power of an allocation is additionally determined by the parameter "PDSCH Scheduling
Mode". In a normal operation, the power values in the allocation table are configurable
parameters. In the Auto/DCI mode however, the power value is fixed and cannot be
adjusted.
For the DCI format 1D, an additional level offset has to be considered.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:PA on page 480
Activate CA
Requires software option R&S SMx/AMU-K85 (LTE-A Rel. 10)
Enables/disables carrier aggregation for the selected user.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

171

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Antenna Port Mapping Settings

If Activate Carrier Aggregation is enabled, carrier aggregation is activated automatically


for all users, but can be deactivated afterwards.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:CA:STATe on page 480

7.9 Antenna Port Mapping Settings


Antenna Port Mapping settings are provided in the "Antenna Port Mapping (User)" dialog,
the "General DL Settings > Antenna Port Mapping" dialog and in the "Enhanced PDSCH
Settings > Precoding" section.
This dialogs comprise the settings necessary to configure the mapping of the logical
antenna ports to the physical Tx antennas. The number of physical antennas is set with
the parameter "General DL Settings > Global MIMO Configuration".
The dialog consists of two parts, a mapping table and a selection about the way the
antenna mapping is performed.
Mapping Methods
The antenna mapping can be performed according to one of the following three methods:

"Codebook"
The used precoding weights are according to the 3GPP TS 36.211, table 6.3.4.2.3-1
resp. 6.3.4.2.3-2. The selected element is defined by the selected codebook index
and the number of layers.

"Random codebook"
The precoding weights are selected randomly from the tables defined for the codebook method.

"Fixed weight"
A fixed precoding weight can be defined which will be used for all allocations of the
according User throughout the frame.

Depending on the selected mapping method, the mapping table is invisible ("Random
codebook"), read-only ("Codebook") or full configurable ("Fixed weight").
Mapping Table
The mapping table is a matrix with number of rows equal to the number of physical Tx
antennas and number of columns equal of the number of antenna ports (AP). The allowed
values are listed in the following tables.
"Global MIMO Configuration"

Number of rows

"1 TxAntenna"

1 row

"2 TxAntenna"

2 rows

"4 TxAntenna"

4 rows

"SISO + BF"

2 rows

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

172

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Antenna Port Mapping Settings

"Tx Mode"

Number of columns

Antenna Port (AP)

Tx Mode 7

AP 5

Tx Mode 8

AP 7
AP 8

Antenna Ports AP0, AP1, AP2 and AP3 are always mapped to the four Tx antennas Tx1,
Tx2, Tx3 and Tx4.
Per default, the AP4 and AP6 are mapped to Tx1.
Antenna Port Mapping (General DL Settings)
Comprises the settings for defining the mapping of the logical APs to the available physical Tx antennas.
Mapping Coordinates Antenna Port Mapping (General DL Settings)
Switches between the Cartesian (Real/Imag.) and Cylindrical (Magn./Phase) coordinates
representation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:MAPCoordinates on page 374
Mapping table Antenna Port Mapping (General DL Settings)
Defines the mapping of the antenna ports (AP) to the physical antennas, see Mapping
Table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP4:TX<ch>:IMAGinary
on page 373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP4:TX<ch>:REAL on page 373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP6:TX<ch>:IMAGinary
on page 373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP6:TX<ch>:REAL on page 373
Antenna Port Mapping (User)
Comprises the settings for defining the mapping of the logical APs to the available physical Tx antennas.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

173

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Antenna Port Mapping Settings

Antenna Port Mapping Antenna Port Mapping (User)


Defines the antenna port mapping method, see Mapping Methods.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:MODE on page 478
Codebook Index Antenna Port Mapping (User)
Sets the codebook index for mapping mode Codebook.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:CBINdex on page 477
Mapping Coordinates Antenna Port Mapping (User)
Switches between the Cartesian (Real/Imag.) and Cylindrical (Magn./Phase) coordinates
representation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:MAPCoordinates on page 477
Mapping table Antenna Port Mapping (User)
Defines the mapping of the antenna ports (AP) to the physical antennas, see also Mapping Table.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:AP5:TX<st>:IMAGinary
on page 477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:AP5:TX<st>:REAL on page 477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:AP7:TX<st>:IMAGinary
on page 477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:AP7:TX<st>:REAL on page 477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:AP8:TX<st>:IMAGinary
on page 477
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:APM:AP8:TX<st>:REAL on page 477

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

174

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Dummy Data Configuration Settings

7.10 Dummy Data Configuration Settings

In this section, the dummy data for filling the unscheduled resource blocks and subframes
are configured.
Modulation (Dummy Data)
Selects the modulation of the dummy data.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:DUMD:MODulation on page 480
Data Source (Dummy Data)
Selects the data source for the dummy data configuration.
"Data lists" can be generated internally in the data editor or externally.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by means of the "Data
List Management" button.
If the "Pattern" data type is used, the bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" input box. The
length is limited to 64 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:DUMD:DATA on page 481
Pattern (Dummy Data)
(Available for data source Pattern only)
Opens the editor for configuring a bit pattern. The length is limited to 64 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:DUMD:PATTern on page 482
Select Data List (Dummy Data)
(Available for data source Data List only)
Opens the "Load Data List" window for loading a saved dummy data list. The data list of
the selected (highlighted) file is loaded by pressing the "Select" button.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:DUMD:DSELect on page 481

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

175

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


OFDMA Timeplan

Power (Dummy Data)


Sets the power of the subcarriers allocated with dummy data.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:DUMD:POWer on page 481

7.11 OFDMA Timeplan


The "OFDMA Timeplan" dialog is called in the "Frame Configuration" dialog with the button "Show Time Plan".
The x-axis shows allocation in the time domain. The y-axis shows the resource blocks
as smallest allocation granularity in the frequency domain. One allocation to a UE can
span 1 to up to "No. of Resource Blocks" in the frequency domain.
P-SYNC/S-SYNC is automatically calculated according to the settings in General DL
Settings dialog.

First Subframe
Selects the first subframe to be displayed.
Remote command:
n.a.
No. of Subframes
Selects the number of subframes to be displayed.
Remote command:
n.a.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

176

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

View Mode
Determines whather the time plan shows the allocated Virtual Resource Blocks (VRBs)
or the Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:VIEW:MODE on page 398
Comp. Carrier
In enabled "General DL Settings > CA > Activate Carrie Aggregation > On" state, determines the time plan of which component carrier is displayed.
Show Time Plan in Dialog
Enlarges the time plan display.

7.12 General UL Settings


The General UL Settings menu allows configuring the EUTRA/LTE system for transmission direction uplink.
In the "Physical Settings" section, the channel bandwith respectively the number of
resource blocks per slot is selected.

In the "Cell Specific Settings" section, the physical layer cell identity settings and the
structure of the PUSCH, PUCCH, PRACH, SRS and the uplink reference signals are set.
The other parameters are fixed and read-only.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

177

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

7.12.1 Physical Settings


Provided are the following settings:
Channel Bandwidth (UL)
Sets the channel bandwidth of the EUTRA/LTE system.
Although the 3GPP specification bases on bandwidth agonistic layer 1 and channel
bandwidth is determined by specifying the desired number of resource blocks, the current
EUTRA standardization focuses on six bandwidths (1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 MHz).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

178

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

For backward compatibility with previous version of the implementation, this parameter
allows the flexibility to choose, whether a user defined bandwidth or one of the pre-defined
channel bandwidths is used.
If a pre-defined channel bandwidth is selected; the actual "Number of Resource Blocks
Per Slot" is internally calculated for the selected "Channel Bandwidth" and "Physical
Resource Block Bandwidth".
The sampling rate, occupied bandwidth and FFT size are therefore determined by the
parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot". If required, the FFT Size can be
adjusted.
See also table 4-1 for an overview ot this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:BW on page 385
Physical Resource Block Bandwidth (UL)
Displays the bandwidth of one physical resource block.
Note: In this release, this value is fixed to 12 x 15 kHz.
Remote command:
n.a.
Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot (UL)
This parameter determines the channel bandwidth.
If the parameter "Channel Bandwidth" is set to one of the pre-defined channel bandwidths
(1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15 or 20 MHz), the value "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot" is read
only and is automatically set according to the selected channel bandwidth and "Physical
Resource Block Bandwidth".
If a user defined channel bandwidth is selected, the parameters "Number of Resource
Blocks Per Slot" and "Physical Resource Blocks Bandwidth" determine the actual channel
bandwidth.
The sampling rate and the occupied bandwidth are determined by the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot". If required, the FFT Size can be adjusted.
See also table 4-1 for an overview ot this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:NORB on page 385
FFT Size (UL)
Sets the FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) size. The available values depend on the
selected "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
See also table 4-1 for an overview ot this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:FFT on page 386

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

179

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Occupied Bandwidth (UL)


Displays the occupied bandwidth. The value is automatically set according to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:OCCBandwidth? on page 386
Sampling Rate (UL)
Displays the sampling rate. The value is automatically set according to the parameter
"Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:SRATe on page 385
Number Of Occupied Subcarriers (UL)
Displays the number of occupied subcarriers. The value is automatically set according
to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
See also table 4-1 for an overview ot this cross-reference between the parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:OCCSubcarriers? on page 386
Number Of Left Guard Subcarriers (UL)
Displays the number of left guard subcarriers. This value is set automatically according
to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:LGS? on page 387
Number Of Right Guard Subcarriers (UL)
Displays the number of right guard subcarriers. This value is set automatically according
to the parameter "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RGS? on page 387

7.12.2 TDD Frame Structure Settings


The "TDD Frame Structure" section is available only, if the TDD is selected as a duplexing
mode. In this section, the TDD frame is configured by means of adjustment of the UL/DL
configuration and the special subframe configuration (see also chapter 3.2.1, "OFDMA
Parameterization", on page 18).
UL/DL Configuration
Sets the Uplink-Downlink Configuration number, i.e. defines which subframe is used for
downlink respectively uplink, and where the special subframes are located.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:UDConf on page 370

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

180

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Configuration of Special Subframes


Sets the Special Subframe Configuration number, i.e. together with the parameter Cyclic
Prefix defines the lengths of the DwPTS, the Guard Period and the UpPTS.
The DwPTS length selected with this parameter determines the maximum number of the
OFDM symbols available for PDSCH in the special subframe.
The UpPTS length selected with this parameter determines the maximum number of the
SC-FDMA symbols available for SRS in the special subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:SPSConf on page 370

7.12.3 Cell Specific Settings


In the "Cell Specific Settings" section, the physical layer cell ID settings, the UL Reference
Signal settings, the PUSCH, PUCCH and PRACH structures are selected, as well as cellspecific SRS parameters.
Provided are the following settings:
Cell ID (UL)
Sets the cell identity.
There are 504 unique physical layer cell identities (Cell ID), grouped into 168 unique
physical cell identity groups that contain three unique identities each. The Cell ID is calculated as following:
Cell ID = 3*Physical Cell ID Group + Physical Layer ID
There is a cross-reference between the values of this three parameters and changing of
one of them results in adjustment in the values of the others.
The Cell ID determinates:
the reference signal grouping hopping pattern,
the reference signal sequence hopping,
the PUSCH demodulation reference signal pseudo-random sequence,
the cyclic shifts and scrambling sequences for all PUCCH formats
the pseudo-random sequence used for scrambling
the pseudo-random sequence used for type 2 PUSCH frequency hopping.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CID on page 387
Physical Cell ID Group (UL)
Sets the ID of the physical cell identity group.
To configure these identities, set the parameter Physical Layer ID.
The physical layer cell identities determine the sequence shift pattern used for PUCCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup on page 388

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

181

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Physical Layer ID (UL)


Sets the identity of the physical layer within the selected physical cell identity group, set
with parameter Physical Cell ID Group.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:PLID on page 388
Cyclic Prefix (General UL Settings)
Sets the cyclic prefix length for all subframes.
The number of the SC-FDMA symbols is set automatically.
"Normal"

Normal cyclic prefix, i.e. the UL slot contains 7 SC-FDMA symbols.

"Extended"

Extended cycic prefix, i.e. the UL slot contains 6 SC-FDMA symbols.


The extended cyclic prefix is defined in order to cover large cell scenarios with higher delay spread and MBMS transmission.

"User Defined"

The cyclic prefix length can vary over the subframes. The cyclic prefix
length is set per subframe in the "UL Frame Configuration" dialog with
the paramter Cyclic Prefix.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:CPC on page 388
DL Cyclic Prefix
In "Duplexing > TDD", determines the cyclic prefix for the appropriate opposite direction.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:DLCPc on page 389

7.12.4 UL Reference Signals


Group Hopping
Enables/disables group hopping for the uplink reference signals demodulation reference
signal (DMRS) and sounding reference signal (SRS).
17 different hopping patterns and 30 different sequence shift patterns are used for group
hopping.
PUSCH and PUCCH use the same group hopping pattern that is calculated if the "Group
Hopping" is enabled. The group hopping pattern is generated by a pseudo-random
sequence generator.
The sequence shift pattern of PUCCH is derived from the physical layer cell ID set as a
combination of the parameters Physical Cell ID Group and Physical Layer ID.
The PUSCH sequence shift pattern is determinate by the parameter Delta Sequence Shift
for PUSCH.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:GRPHopping on page 389
Sequence Hopping
Enables/disables sequence hopping for the uplink reference signals demodulation reference signal (DRS) and sounding reference signal (SRS).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

182

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Sequence Hopping and Group Hopping can be activated simultaneously, but only group
hopping will be applied in this case, as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211.
The sequence hopping is generated by a pseudo-random sequence generator.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SEQHopping on page 389
Delta Sequence Shift for PUSCH
Sets the delta sequence shift for PUSCH needed for the calculation of the group hopping
pattern.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:DSSHift on page 389
n(1)_DMRS
Sets the part of the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) index which is broadcasted
and therefore valid for the whole cell. This index applies when multiple shifts within a cell
are used and is used by the calculation of the DMRS sequence.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:DMRS on page 390

7.12.5 PRACH Settings


The cell specific parameters in this section determine the PRACH configuration according
to the 3GPP TS 36.211.
The UE-specific parameters, necessary for the complete definition of the PRACH, are
configurable in the User Equipment Configuration dialog of the corresponding UE.
PRACH Frequency Offset
For preamble formats 0-3, sets the prach-FrequencyOffset nRAPRBoffset as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.211, i.e. determines the first physical resource block available for PRACH
expressed as a physical resource block number that fulfills the equation:
0 <= nRAPRBoffset <= Number of UL Resource Blocks - 6
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:FOFFset on page 392
PRACH Configuration
Sets the PRACH configuration index as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.211, i.e. defines the
time and frequency resources in which random access preamble transmission is allowed.
The PRACH allocation occupies a bandwidth of 6 RBs.
However, the PRACH distribution (subframe, length, offset) depends on several other
parameters:
selected "Cyclic Prefix"
selected PRACH Frequency Offset
selected frame format, i.e. on the selected "Duplexing" on page 79 mode
selected Frequency Resource Index (for TDD mode).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

183

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Not all combinations of channel bandwidth, PRACH configuration and PRACH frequency
offset are allowed.
The table below gives an overview on the dependency of the value range of the parameter
"PRACH Configuration" and other parameters.
Duplexing Mode

Configuration of Special Subframes

(Global) Cyclic Prefix

PRACH Configuration

FDD

Normal/Extended

0 .. 63

TDD

0 .. 3

Normal/Extended

0 .. 47

Normal

0 .. 47

Extended

0 .. 57

5 .. 8

Normal/Extended

0 .. 57

The Preamble Format is automatically derived form the "PRACH Configuration".


Use the SC-FDMA Time plan to display the PRACH distribution.
Example:
The timeplan below illustrates the PRACH distribution of a PRACH Configuration#55
(Preamble Format#3) for FDD duplexing mode and normal "Cyclic Prefix "with adjusted
PRACH frequency Offset.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:CONFiguration on page 392

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

184

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Restricted Set (High Speed Mode)


Selects whether a restricted preamble set (high speed mode) or the unrestricted preamble set (normal mode) will be used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:RSET on page 393

7.12.6 PUSCH Structure


Frequency Hopping Mode
Sets the frequency hopping mode for PUSCH.
Frequency hopping is applied according to 3GPP TS 36.213.
"Inter-subframe"

The PUSCH position in terms of used resource blocks is changed each


subframe.

"Intra-subframe"

Both intra- and inter-subframe hopping are performed.


The PUSCH position in terms of used resource blocks is changed each
slot and each subframe.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:FHMode on page 393
PUSCH Hopping Offset
Sets the PUSCH Hopping Offset NRBHO.
The PUSCH Hopping Offset determines the first physical resource block and the maximum number of physical resource blocks available for PUSCH transmission if PUSCH
frequency hopping is used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:FHOFfset on page 393
Number of Sub-bands
Sets the number of sub-bands (Nsb) into that the total range of physical resource blocks
available for PUSCH transmission is divided. The frequency hopping is performed at subband level.
The size of one sub-band is determinate by the number of resource blocks available for
PUSCH transmission, the "Number of Sub-bands" and the PUSCH hopping parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:NOSM on page 394

7.12.7 PUCCH Structure


Number of RBs used for PUCCH
Sets the PUCCH region in terms of reserved resource blocks, located at the edges of the
channel bandwidth (see figure 3-17).
The PUCCH region is displayed on the SC-FDMA Timeplan.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

185

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

Example:
The figure below shows an example of a subframe with PUCCH region with three
reserved resource blocks and PUCCH Format 2a.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:NORB on page 394
Delta Shift
Sets the delta shift parameter, i.e. the cyclic shift difference between two adjacent
PUCCH resource indices with the same orthogonal cover sequence (OC).
The delta shift determinates the number of available sequences in a resource block that
can be used for PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b (see also chapter 3.3.3, "Uplink Control Information Transmission", on page 31).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:DESHift on page 394
Delta Offset
The parameter is provided for backward compatibility.
The PUCCH Delta Offset is parameter specified in the 3GPP specification 3GPP TS
36.211 until version 8.4.0.
To test according to newer versions of 3GPP specification, use the default value of 0.
To test according to former versions of the 3GPP specification (up to version 8.4.0), use
the parameter to set the cyclic shift offset. The value range depends on the selected
Delta Shift.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:DEOFfset on page 395
N(1)_cs
Sets the number of cyclic shifts used for PUCCH format 1/1a/1b in a resource block used
for a combination of the formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b.
Only one resource block per slot can support a combination of the PUCCH formats 1/1a/
1b and 2/2a/2b.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

186

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

The number of cyclic shifts available for PUCCH format 2/2a/2b N(2)_cs in a block with
combination of PUCCH formats is calculated as follow:
N(2)_cs = 12 - N(1)_cs -2
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1CS on page 395
N(2)_RB
Sets bandwidth in terms of resource blocks that are reserved for PUCCH formats 2/2a/
2b transmission in each subframe.
Since there can be only one resource block per slot that supports a combination of the
PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b, the number of resource block(s) per slot available
for PUCCH format 1/1a/1b is determinate by "N(2)_RB".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N2RB on page 395
Range n(1)_PUCCH (Normal CP)
Displays the range of the possible PUCCH format 1/1a/1b transmissions from different
users in one subframe and in case of normal CP.
Insufficient ranges are displayed as '-'.
This parameter determines the value range of index n_PUCCH for PUCCH format 1/1a/
1b in case of normal cyclic prefix.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1NMax on page 396
Range n(1)_PUCCH (Extended CP)
Displays the range of the possible PUCCH format 1/1a/1b transmissions from different
users in one subframe and in case of Extended CP.
Insufficient ranges are displayed as '-'.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1EMax on page 396
Range n(2)_PUCCH
Displays the range of possible number of PUCCH format 2/2a/2b transmissions from
different users in one subframe.
Insufficient ranges are displayed as '-'.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N2Max on page 396
Range n(3)_PUCCH
Displays the range of possible number of PUCCH format 3 transmissions from different
users in one subframe.
Insufficient ranges are displayed as '-'.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N3Max on page 397

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

187

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


General UL Settings

7.12.8 SRS Structure


The cell specific parameters in this section determine the structure of the sounding reference signal (SRS) according to the 3GPP TS 36.211.
The UE-specific parameters, necessary for the complete definition of the SRS structure
and SRS mapping, are configurable in the User Equipment Configuration dialog of the
corresponding UE.
SRS Subframe Configuration
Sets the cell specific parameter SRS subframe configuration.
This parameter can also influence the shortening of PUCCH/PUSCH transmissions,
regardless whether the UEs are configured to send a SRS in the according subframe or
not.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:SUConfiguration on page 391
Configuration Period T_SFC
Displays the value for the cell specific parameter configuration period TSFC in subframes,
depending on the selected "SRS Subframe Configuration" and the "Duplexing" mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:TSFC? on page 392
Transmission Offset Delta_SFC
Displays the value for the cell specific parameter transmission offset DeltaSFC in subframes, depending on the selected "SRS Subframe Configuration" and the "Duplexing"
mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:DSFC? on page 391
SRS Bandwidth Configuration C_SRS
Sets the cell specific parameter SRS Bandwidth Configuration (CSRS).
The SRS Bandwidth Configuration CSRS, theSRS Bandwidth B_SRS and the Channel
Bandwidth (UL) determine the length of the sounding reference signal sequence, calculated according to 3GPP TS 36.211.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:CSRS on page 391
A/N + SRS simultaneous Tx
Enables/disables simultaneous transmission of SRS (sounding reference signal) and
ACK/NACK messages, i.e. transmission of SRS and PUCCH in the same subframe.
Simultaneous transmission of SRS and PUCCH is allowed only for PUCCH formats 11,
1a, 1b and 3, since CQI reports are never simultaneously transmitted with SRS.
If this parameter is disabled, the SRS is not transmitted in the corresponding subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:ANSTx on page 390

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

188

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

SRS MaxUpPTS
Enables/disables the cell specific parameter srsMaxUpPts.
If enabled, a SRS transmission in the UpPTS field (TDD) is made only in the frequency
area that does not overlap with the frequency resources reserved for a possible PRACH
preamble format 4 transmission.
This is done by reconfiguring the number of SRS resource blocks in the special subframes, which would otherwise be determined by C_SRS and B_SRS.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:MUPTs on page 390

7.13 UL Frame Configuration Settings


The "UL Frame Configuration" dialog for uplink allows configuring the subframes and the
SC-FDMA resource allocations. The "UL Frame Configuration" dialog consists of two
sections, "General Scheduling Configuration" and the "UL Allocation Table".

7.13.1 General Scheduling Configuration


This section provides an access to the user equipment settings as well as settings concerning the UL scheduling, like configuring the subframes and adjusting the PUCCH/
PUSCH scheduling.
Select User Equipment (UE1...UE4)
Accesses the User Equipment Configuration dialog for configuring the different users.
The check box activates or deactivates the selected UE. The 3GPP release the UE is
compliant to is displayed.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

189

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

Note: Disabling the UE deactivates the corresponding allocations. Neither reference signal, nor PUSCH/PUCCH allocations, nor PRACH will be transmitted if an UE is deactivated.
Remote command:
n.a.
Number Of Configurable Uplink Subframes
Sets the number of configurable subframes in the up to four configurable frames, i.e
determines the scheduling cycle per UE.
All uplink subframes are filled periodically with the configured subframes with the exception of the Sounding Reference Signal. SRS is set individually for each UE in the User
Equipment Configuration dialog.
The maximum number of configurable subframes depends on the selected Duplexing
mode (TDD or FDD), TDD Frame Structure Settings and whether a realtime feedback is
enabled or not.
For more detailed information about the maximum number of configurable subframes and
for description of the dependencies between the parameters, see chapter 5.2.3, "Four
Configurable Frames in Uplink and Downlink Direction", on page 55.
For "Rel 8/9" UEs, the "No Of Configurable Uplink Subframes" is the same for PUCCH
and PUSCH.
In instruments equipped with R&S SMx/AMU-K85, for the LTE Rel 10 UEs, the scheduling
cycles are additionally independent per PUSCH and PUCCH, i.e. the number of configurable subframes can be defined individually per PUCCH and per PUSCH. This enables
the configuration of PUCCH and PUSCH with different repetition patterns.
Example: Independent cycles for PUSCH and PUCCH of the same LTE Rel. 10 UE
As described in the test case 8.2.4, TS 36.141 [6], the PUCCH of the UE has to be
transmitted once a frame and the PUSCH - once each eight subframes.
Set "UE1 > User Equipment Configuration > "3GPP Release" on page 200" =
Release 10.
In the "UL Frame Configuration > Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" dialog,
set "UE1 > PUCCH" = 10
In the "UL Frame Configuration > Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" dialog,
set "UE1 > PUSCH" = 8
Configure the PUCCH and PUSCH allocations of UE1 as required.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

190

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

Example: Independent cycles for PUSCH and PUCCH of the same LTE Rel. 8/9 UE

Select "UE2 > User Equipment Configuration > UE ID/n_RNTI (User Equipment)" =
UE IDUE2.
Set "UE3 > User Equipment Configuration > UE ID/n_RNTI (User Equipment)" = UE
IDUE2
Configure the allocations of as required.
In the "UL Frame Configuration > Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" dialog,
set "UE2 > PUCCH/PUSCH" = 10
In the "UL Frame Configuration > Number of Configurable Uplink Subframes" dialog,
set "UE3 > PUCCH/PUSCH" = 8

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:CONSubframes:PUCCh on page 462
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:CONSubframes:PUSCh on page 462

7.13.2 Subframe Configuration


Provided are the following settings:
Cell Index
Displays the cell index.
Remote command:
n.a.
Cyclic Prefix (UL)
Configuration of the cyclic prefix per subframe is only enabled, if the parameter Cyclic
Prefix (General UL Settings) is set to User Defined.
The number of the SC-FDMA symbols per subframe is set automatically
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:CYCPrefix on page 463
Subframe
Sets the subframe to be configured/displayed in the frame configuration table. All uplink
subframes are filled periodically with the configured subframes with the exception of the
Sounding Reference Signal. SRS is set individually for each UE in the User Equipment
Configuration dialog.
Subframes behind the configurable range of the corresponding UE or channel (Number
Of Configurable Uplink Subframes) are displayed as read-only.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:SFSelection on page 463

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

191

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

Subframe Information
Displays the kind of the selected subframe, i.e. "Special Subframe", "Uplink Subframe",
"Downlink Subframe".
For "Uplink Subframe", it is also shown the uplink subframe number, which is especially
useful for TDD duplexing mode.
Remote command:
n.a.
Copy/Paste Subframe Settings
Copies/pastes the settings of the selected subframe. Sounding Reference Signals are
not considered.
For more detailed information, see chapter 5.2.1, "Copy/Paste Subframe", on page 55.
Remote command:
n.a.
Show Time Plan
Calls the time plan for the SC-FDMA resource allocation.
The dialog is described in detail in section chapter 7.17, "SC-FDMA Timeplan",
on page 229.
Remote command:
n.a.
Reset All Subframes
Resets settings of all subframes including cyclic prefix to the default values.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RSTFrame on page 463

7.13.3 UL Allocation Table


The resource allocation table is located in the lower part of the "UL Frame Configuration" dialog. The resource allocation table is where the individual allocation parameters
for a subframe are set.
Content (UL)
Selects the content type of the selected allocation.
Data source settings for PUSCH is configurable in dialog chapter 7.14, "User Equipment
Configuration", on page 196.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CONType
on page 464

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

192

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

Codeword (UL)
Determines whether one or two codewords use the same physical resource, and whether
CW#1 or CW#2 is configured with the selected PUSCH allocation.
Remote command:
n.a.
Modulation/Format
For PUSCH allocation, this parameter sets the modulation scheme (QPSK, 16QAM or
64QAM) for the allocation.
This parameter is read-only, if a predefined FRC is selected.
For PUCCH allocation, this parameter sets the PUCCH Format (1/1a/1b/2/2a/2b/3). See
chapter 3.3.3, "Uplink Control Information Transmission", on page 31 for an overview of
the allowed PUCCH formats. Use the SC-FDMA Time plan to visualize the position and
structure of the configured PUCCH allocation.
Example:
The figure below shows an example of a subframe with PUCCH region with three
reserved resource blocks and "PUCCH Format" on page 227 1/1a/1b.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:MODulation
on page 464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:FORMat
on page 464
Enhanced Settings UL
Calls dialog for configuration of PUSCH/PUCCH depending on the selected allocation
(see chapter 7.15, "Enhanced PUSCH Settings", on page 221 and chapter 7.16,
"Enhanced PUCCH Settings", on page 226).
Remote command:
n.a.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

193

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

Set 1/Set 2 No. RB


Requires option R&S SMx/AMU-K85 LTE-A (Rel. 10)
The LTE Rel. 10 specification defines PUSCH transmission not only in a continuous frequency region but also in two "sets" or "clusters" of resource blocks (see figure 3-25).
This parameters defines the size of the selected allocation in resource blocks of the corresponding set.
This parameter is read-only, if a predefined FRC is selected.
Example: Clustered PUSCH Tranmission

Select "User Equipment Configuration (UE1) > 3GPP Release > Rel.10".
In the "UL Frame Configuration > Allocation Table", configure the PUSCH allocation
of UE1 as follow:
"Set 1 No. RB" = 10, "Set 1 Offs. VRB" = 2
"Set 2 No. RB" = 5, "Set 2 Offs. VRB" = 25
"State" = ON
Select "Show Time Plan" to visualize the configured allocations

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:RBCount
on page 464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:RBCount?
on page 464
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:
SET<user>:RBCount on page 464
Set 1/Set 2 Offset VRB
Requires optionR&S SMx/AMU-K85 LTE-A (Rel. 10)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

194

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


UL Frame Configuration Settings

For the corresponding set, sets the virtual resource block offset of the selected subframe
(see also example "Clustered PUSCH Tranmission" on page 194).
This parameter is read-only, if a predefined FRC is selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:VRBoffset
on page 465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:
SET<user>:VRBoffset on page 465
Offs PRB Slot (n/n+1)
Displays the start resource block of the selected allocation in the first and the second slot
of the subframe.
The start physical resource block in slot n and slot n+1 are set automatically and can
deviate from the Set 1/Set 2 Offset VRB if frequency hopping is used.
In case an intra-subframe hopping for hopping type 2 is applied, the start resource block
in slot 1 is determinate by the selected Number of Sub-bands.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:SLOT<user0>:ALLoc<ch0>:
RBOFfset? on page 465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:SLOT<user0>:ALLoc<ch0>:
PUCCh:RBOFfset? on page 465
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:SLOT<user0>:ALLoc<ch0>:
PUSCh:SET<s2us>:RBOFfset? on page 465
Phys. Bits / Total Number of Physical Bits
Displays the size of the selected allocation in bits. The value is set automatically according to the current allocation's settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PHYSbits?
on page 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:PHYSbits?
on page 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:PHYSbits?
on page 466
Power (UL)
Sets the power for the selected allocation, i.e. PUSCH or PUCCH power level.
The PUSCH power level (PPUSCH) and the PUCCH power level (PPUCCH) can vary per
subframe.
For global adjustment of the transmit power of the corresponding UE, use the parameter
UE Power (PUE).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

195

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

An additional boost of the reference signals DRS and SRS per UE can be applied with
the parameters DRS Power Offset (PDRS_offset) and SRS Power Offset (PSRS_offset) respectively.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:POWer on page 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:POWer
on page 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:POWer
on page 466
State (UL)
Sets the allocation to active or inactive state.
Note: Disabling an allocation deactivate the PUSCH/PUCCH and the corresponding
demodulation reference signal, but does not affect other allocations of the UE or the
sounding reference signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:STATe on page 467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:STATe
on page 467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:STATe
on page 467
Conflict (UL)
Indicates a conflict between UEs and in case an allocation exceeds the available number
of resource blocks.
For more information, see chapter 5.1, "Conflict Handling in the R&S Signal Generator",
on page 51.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CONFlict?
on page 467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:CONFlict?
on page 467
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:CONFlict?
on page 467

7.14 User Equipment Configuration


The "User Equipment 1 - 4" menus for users 1 to 4 allows to define and configure up to
four scheduled user equipments that can be freely distributed over the time. For each
user equipment, the structure of the demodulation reference signal and the sounding
reference signal can be configured individually.
The "User Equipment 1 4" dialog consists of four to five main sections "Common Settings", "FRC Configuration", "Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)" and "Reference
Signal Structure". Section "Realtime Feedback Configuration" is enabled only for instrument equipped with the option R&S SMx/AMU-K69.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

196

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

In section "Common Settings", state of the user equipment, the UE's release, UE ID and
the operational mode can be set.

Section "FRC Configuration" enables a quick access to the parameters according to predefined fixed reference channels.

Section "Realtime Feedback Configuration" provides an access to the parameters


required for generating signals in accordance to the HARQ feedback or UL timing adjustments test cases.
The "Realtime Feedback Configuration" is enabled only for UE1 in instruments equipped
with the option R&S SMx/AMU-K69.
"Realtime Feedback Configuration" is not available for the R&S Signal Generator SMBV
and for the simulation software R&S WinIQSIM2.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

197

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

In section "Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)", the data source for the PUSCH
can be selected and channel coding can be configured. Use the Enhanced PUSCH Settings dialog to adjust the additional settings for channel coding of the control information
and the multiplexing of the data and control information.

Section "Reference Signal Structure" is where reference signal structure can be configured individually for demodulation and sounding purposes.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

198

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

The "PRACH Power Ramping" and "PRACH Configuration" settings are available when
the user equipment "Mode" is set to PRACH.

7.14.1 Common Settings


In section "Common Settings", the state of the user equipment, the UE's release, UE ID
and the operational mode can be set.
State (User Equipment)
Activates or deactivates the user equipment.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

199

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Note: Disabling the UE deactivates the corresponding allocations. Neither reference signal, nor PUSCH/PUCCH allocations, nor PRACH will be transmitted if an UE is deactivated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:STATe on page 484
3GPP Release
requires option R&S SMx/AMU-K85 (LTE-A Rel. 10)
Determines whether the selected UE is a LTE Release 8/9 or LTE Release 10 UE. Several further settings are enabled only for Rel. 10 UEs (e.g. see chapter 7.13, "UL Frame
Configuration Settings", on page 189).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:RELease on page 483
UE ID/n_RNTI (User Equipment)
Sets the radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) of the UE.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:ID on page 484
UE Power
Sets the power level of the selected UE (PUE).
The UE power level determines the power levels of the reference signals (DRS and SRS)
and the power level of the allocations (PUSCH (PPUSCH) and PUCCH (PPUCCH)).
The UE power level can be used for global adjustment of the transmit power of the corresponding UE.
The PUSCH and PUCCH Power level can vary per subframe.
An additional boost of the reference signals DRS and SRS per UE can be applied with
the parameters DRS Power Offset (PDSR_offset) and SRS Power Offset (PSRS_offset) respectively.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:POWer on page 484
Mode
Selects whether the user equipment is in standard or in PRACH mode.
"Standard"

Sets the operational mode of the user equipment to standard.

"PRACH"

Sets the operational mode of the user equipment to PRACH (see chapter 7.14.9, "PRACH Configuration", on page 219).

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:MODE on page 484
Restart Data, A/N, CQI and RI every subframe
If activated, the data source, the ACK/NACK pattern, the CQI pattern and RI are restarted
every subframe.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

200

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

This parameter is always enabled, if realtime feedback is active.


Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:DACRestart on page 483

7.14.2 FRC Configuration


This section enables a quick configuration of the predefined fixed reference channels
(FRC) according to 3GPP TS 36.141, Annex A "Reference Measurement channels",
respectively 3GPP TS 36.521-1, Annex A.

When "FRC Configuration" is enabled, several parameters are predefined and their values are displayed as read-only. The table below gives an overview of the parameters that
are affected by the FRC configuration.
Dialog

Parameter

Value

"UE Configuration"

Scrambling

On

Channel Coding State

On

Interleaver

On

SRS State

Off (the SRS can be activated manually if FRC state is ON)

"UL Allocation Table"

Modulation

According to the selected FRC

PUSCH allocations of the corresponding UE in all subframes

No. RB

According to the selected FRC

"Enhanced PUSCH Settings"

Frequency Hopping

Off

For the corresponding UE in all


subframes

HARQ ACK Type

None

Number of CQI Bits

Number of coded CQI Bits

Transport Block Size/Payload

According to the selected FRC

FRC State
Enables/disables FRC configuration.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

201

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Enabling FRC configuration sets some parameters to their predefined values, i.e. several
parameters are displayed as read-only. Reconfiguration of the values of these parameters is possible only after disabling the FRC configuration. An exception is the SRS state
that can be changed even while a FRC configuration is enabled.
The FRC State is disabled and cannot be enabled, if a "User Defined"Cyclic Prefix is
selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:STATe on page 486
FRC
Selects a predefined fixed reference channel according to 3GPP TS 36.141, Annex A
respectively 3GPP TS 36.521-1, Annex A.
Since the predefined FRCs require minimum channel bandwidth and predefined cyclic
prefix, the currently available FRCs are limited by the selected Number of RBs per Slot
andCyclic Prefix . The FRC State is disabled and there are no FRCs available for selection, if a "User Defined" cyclic prefix is selected.
Table 7-9: Supported FRCs from 3GPP TS 36.141
FRC

Description

A1_1 .. A1_5

Fixed Reference Channels for reference sensitivity and in-channel selectivity


(QPSK, R=1/3).

A2_1 .. A2_3

Fixed Reference Channels for dynamic range (16QAM, R=2/3).

A3_1 .. A3_7

Fixed Reference Channels for performance requirements (QPSK 1/3).

A4_1 .. A4_8

Fixed Reference Channels for performance requirements (16QAM 3/4)

A5_1 .. A5_7

Fixed Reference Channels for performance requirements (64QAM 5/6).

A7_1 .. A7_6

Fixed Reference Channels for UL timing adjustment (Scenario 1).

A8_1 .. A8_6

Fixed Reference Channels for UL timing adjustment (Scenario 2).

Table 7-10: Supported FRCs from 3GPP TS 36.521-1


FRC

Description

A.2.2.1.1

Reference Channels for QPSK with full RB allocation.

A.2.2.1.2

Reference Channels for 16-QAM with full RB allocation.

A.2.2.2.1

Reference Channels for QPSK with partial RB allocation.

A.2.2.2.2

Reference Channels for 16-QAM with partial RB allocation.

A.2.2.3

Uplink Reference Channels for sustained data-rate test.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:TYPE on page 487

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

202

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Allocated Resource Blocks


Displays the number of the allocated resource blocks for the selected FRC. For FRCs
"A.2.2.2.1" and "A.2.2.2.2" this parameter can also be set to different values according
to 3GPP TS 36.521-1.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:ALRB on page 485
Modulation (FRC)
Displays the modulation for the selected FRC.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:ALRB on page 485
Payload Size (FRC)
Displays the payload size for the selected FRC.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:PASize? on page 486
Physical Bits Per Subframe (Unshortened PUSCH)
Displays the total number of physical bits available for the PUSCH allocation per subframe, in that unshortened PUSCH is transmitted. Shortened PUSCH transmissions
occurs in a cell specific SRS subframe or in subframes where SRS is transmitted.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:TNOBits? on page 487
Offset VRB (FRC)
Sets the virtual resource block (VRB) offset for all PUSCH allocation of the selected UE
in all subframes.
The VRB Offset set for the individual subframes in the "UL Allocation Table" are overwritten.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:VRBoffset on page 488
n(2)_DMRS (FRC)
Sets the UE specific part of the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) index for all
PUSCH allocation of the selected UE in all subframes.
The n(2)_DMRS set for the individual subframes in the "Enhanced PUSCH Settings"
dialog for the corresponding UE is overwritten.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:FRC:N2DMrs on page 485

7.14.3 Realtime Feedback Configuration Settings


The EUTRA/LTE uplink realtime feedback functionality requires the additional option
R&S SMx/AMU-K69 Closed Loop BS Tests. This option extends the EUTRA/LTE option
R&S SMx/AMU-K55 with the possibility to perform closed loop performance tests with
feedback as defined in 3GPP TS 36.141, chapter 8.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

203

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

The Realtime Feedback Configuration is enabled only for UE1 in instruments equipped
with the option R&S SMx/AMU-K69.

Realtime Feedback Configuration is not available for the R&S Signal Generator SMBV
and for the simulation software R&S WinIQSIM2.
The feedback functionality can be enabled once per baseband block. The user interface
and the parameters available for configuration depend on the selected Realtime Feedback Mode. For detailed description of the Realtime Feedback functionality, see chapter 6, "Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests", on page 63.

Realtime Feedback Mode


Enables realtime feedback and determines the mode (binary or serial).
"Off"

Realtime feedback is disabled.

"Binary ACK/
NACK"

The ACK/NACK feedback is implemented as low/high voltage level on


the feedback line connector.
Use the parameter ACK Definition to determine whether a high or a low
voltage level represents an ACK.
Timing Adjustments Feedback is not supported in this mode.

"Serial"

ACK/NACK Feedback and Timing Adjustments Feedback are implemented by means of a serial protocol (see chapter 6.2.2, "Serial
Mode", on page 65).

"Serial 3x8"

ACK/NACK Feedback and Timing Adjustments Feedback are implemented by means of a serial commands, consisting of three serial
packets (see chapter 6.2.3, "Serial 3x8 Mode", on page 65).

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:ITADvance on page 503
Redundancy Version Sequence
Determines the sequence of redundancy versions for the individual HARQ processes.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

204

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Unless otherwise requested by serial feedback commands, the first value in the sequence
of redundancy versions is used each time an ACK is received or for the very first transmission of a process.
The sequence of redundancy versions is read out cyclically, i.e. whenever a NACK is
received and a retransmission is requested, the next redundancy version in the sequence
is used.
The first value in the sequence is used again even in case a NACK is received, if the
Max. Number of Transmissions in a process was reached.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:RVSequence on page 503
Max. Number of Transmissions
After this maximum number of transmissions (incl. first transmission), the first redundancy
version of the redundancy version sequence is used even in case of NACK.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:MAXTrans on page 503
Assume ACK until first received ACK command
("Serial/Serial 3x8" mode only)
If this parameter is enabled, the signal generator will not use any external HARQ feedback
from the device under test for its HARQ processes until an ACK command is received
the first time. Until that, the generator will behave as if ACK was received for all transmissions - no matter if actually a NACK was received or if no HARQ feedback was
received at all. It therefore will not schedule any retransmissions until ACK is received
the first time. This functionality can be useful for synchronization purposes (see chapter 6.4, "Avoiding Synchronization Problems", on page 72).
Note: This functionality applies independently for every HARQ process, i.e. if this parameter is enabled, an ACK has to be received in every HARQ process first, before the
generator stops ignoring any NACKs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:AACK on page 500
Initial Timing Advance
The initial timing advance of the uplink signal (at the output of the instrument's baseband
unit) in units of 16 TS.
An initial timing advance greater than zero means that the beginning of the very first
subframe of the uplink signal is omitted.
For binary feedback, the timing advance of the uplink signal stays constant (and equal
to the initial timing advance) throughout the whole signal output.
The additional timing offset NTA offset for TDD, as defined in TS 36.211, is set by the
parameter Signal Advance N_TA_offset in the "Trigger/Marker" dialog.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:ITADvance on page 503
ACK Definition
("Binary ACK/NACK" mode only)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

205

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Determines whether a high or a low binary level on the feedback line connector represents an ACK.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:ACKDefinition on page 500
Connector
Determines the feedback line connector, see chapter 6.2, "Feedback Modes",
on page 64.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:CONNector on page 502
Distance Mode
(Binary ACK/NACK mode only)
Determines how the number of the uplink subframe is calculated, in which the signaled
feedback has the desired effect.
See also chapter 6.3.1, "Parameterization of the feedback timing", on page 68.
"3GPP"

The uplink subframe in which the signaled feedback has the desired
effect is calculated from the downlink subframe number n, in which the
feedback was received, according to 3GPP TS 36.213.

"Direct
Response"

The uplink subframe in which the signaled feedback has the desired
effect is calculated from the last sent uplink packet of the HARQ processes.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:DMODe on page 502
Additional User Delay
Determines the point in time when the feedback can be sent to the instrument.
For more information see chapter 6.3, "Timing Aspects", on page 68.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:ADUDelay on page 500
Baseband Selector
("Serial" and "Serial 3x8" mode only)
This parameter is required for multiplexing serial commands for different baseband units
to one feedback line. If the selector n is configured in the GUI for a specific baseband
unit, the baseband unit will listen only to serial commands containing the selector n.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:BBSelector on page 501
Serial Rate
(Serial and Serial 3x8 mode only)
Determines the bit rate of the serial transmission. Possible rates are 115.2 kbps, 1.6 Mbps
and 1.92 Mbps.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:SERate on page 504

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

206

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Block Error Insertion


Enables/disables the statistical insertion of block errors into PUSCH packets.
The block error insertion can be enabled for a single HARQ process or for all processes.
In the single HARQ process case, the used process is always the one that corresponds
to the first activated PUSCH.
If the block error insertion functionality is used, no further impairments should be activated
(like "Fading" or "AWGN"), as this would cause the measured block error rate to deviate
from the configured block error rate.
If block error insertion is enabled, the generator ignores any externally received HARQ
ACK/NACK feedback. Instead, it behaves as if ACK was received for a HARQ process
if no block error was generated for the previous transmission of that process and it
behaves as if NACK was received for a HARQ process if a block error was generated for
the previous transmission of that process.
If a block error is generated in a new transmission, block errors will also be generated in
all retransmissions, until the maximum number of transmissions is reached. The reason
for this is that otherwise the measured block error rate could deviate from the configured
one if for example a non-erroneous retransmission can not be decoded by the device
under test if the first transmission (which was erroneous) was impaired too much.
If the block error insertion functionality is used together with the Assume ACK until first
received ACK command functionality, no block errors will be inserted before the first
received ACK, in order to speed up the synchronization process in this case. This is the
only situation where an external HARQ feedback is needed if block error insertion is
activated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:BEINsertion on page 501
Block Error Rate
Block error rate for the statistical insertion of block errors.
The block error rate is defined as the ratio from the number of NACKs to the sum of the
number of NACKs plus the number of ACKs.
As no external HARQ feedback is taken into account if Block Error Insertion is used, it is
expected that the device under test does not send false ACK (ACK after erroneous
packet) or false NACK (NACK after non-erroneous packet). Also it is expected that no
further impairments like fading or AWGN are applied to the generated uplink signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RTFB:BERate on page 502
HARQ Statistics
Opens the chapter 7.14.4, "HARQ Statistics", on page 207 dialog.

7.14.4 HARQ Statistics


This dialog is provided for measuring the HARQ statistics, i.e. the throughput of the uplink
transmission. The values of the measured parameters is retrieved from the externally
received HARQ feedback commands. The functionality is available in all "Realtime Feedback Modes".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

207

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Parameter

Description

"Measurement
Period"

Sets the update period of the HARQ statistics measurement.

"Number Of
HARQ Processes"

Displays the number of HARQ processes.

"Throughput"

Displays the overall absolute throughput of all uplink


transmissions that took place during the last measurement period.

SCPI Command

The value is defined in TS 36.213 and depends on


the "Duplexing mode" and on the "UL/DL Configuration".

A "-" represents, that there were no PUSCH transmissions at all (because all subframes are disabled
or a PUCCH is transmitted) or if the signal output is
not running.
"Percentage Of
Maximum
Throughput"

Displays the overall relative throughput, for example


as required in the TS 36.141 tests.
The value "100%" means there were no retransmissions needed at all during the measurement period.
The value "0%" means every PUSCH transmission
was acknowledged with an NACK during the measurement period.
A "-" represents, that there were no PUSCH transmissions at all (because all subframes are disabled
or a PUCCH is transmitted) or if the signal output is
not running.

"Individual Processes"

Displays the absolute and relative throughputs per


individual HARQ process.
The number of processes corresponds to the value
displayed by the parameter "Number Of HARQ Processes".

7.14.5 Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)


In section "Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)", the data source for the PUSCH
can be selected and the channel coding can be configured. Use the Enhanced PUSCH

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

208

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Settings dialog to adjust the additional settings for channel coding of the control information and the multiplexing of the data and control information.

Data Source (PUSCH)


Selects the data source for the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) allocation of
UE.
New data is retrieved from the data source for every subframe where PUSCH is configured, unless the parameter Restart Data, A/N, CQI and RI every subframe is enabled.
"Data lists" can be generated internally in the data editor or externally.
Data lists are selected in the "File Select" window, which is called by means of the "Data
List Management" button.
If the "Pattern" data type is used, the bit pattern is defined in the "Pattern" input box. The
length is limited to 64 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:DATA on page 492
Data Pattern (PUSCH)
(Available for data source Pattern only)
Displays the bit pattern.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:PATTern on page 492
Data List (PUSCH)
(Available for data source Data List only)
Opens the "Load PUSCH Data List (UE)" window for loading a saved PUSCH data list.
The data list of the selected (highlighted) file is loaded by pressing the "Select" button.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:DSELect on page 492
State Scrambling (PUSCH)
Enables/disables scrambling for all PUSCH allocations of the corresponding UE.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

209

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

This parameter is always enabled, if a predefined FRC is selected.


Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:SCRambling:STATe
on page 493
State Channel Coding and Multiplexing (PUSCH)
Enables/disables channel coding and multiplexing of data and control information for all
PUSCH allocations of the corresponding UE.
If this parameter is disabled, the content retrieved from the Data Source is forwarded to
the scrambler without any coding processing.
Additional parameters for the encoding of control information can be set in Enhanced
PUSCH Settings dialog.
This parameter is always enabled, if a predefined FRC is selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:CCODing:STATe on page 493
Mode Channel Coding
Defines the information transmitted on the PUSCH.
"UCI+UL-SCH" Control information and data is multiplexed into the PUSCH.
"UL-SCH"

Only data is transmitted on PUSCH.

"UCI only"

Only uplink control information is transmitted on PUSCH.


This mode will be supported in a future firmware version.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:CCODing:MODE on page 493
I_HARQ_offset
Sets the HARQ-ACK offset index for control information MCS offset determination
according to 3GPP TS 36.213, chapter 8.6.3.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:CCODing:IHARqoffset
on page 495
I_RI_offset
Sets the RI offset index for control information MCS offset determination according to
3GPP TS 36.213, chapter 8.6.3.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:CCODing:IRIoffset
on page 495
I_CQI_offset
Sets the CQI offset index for control information MCS offset determination according to
3GPP TS 36.213, chapter 8.6.3.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:CCODing:ICQioffset
on page 494

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

210

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Channel Interleaver (PUSCH)


Enables/disables channel interleaving.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PUSCh:CCODing:INTerleaver
on page 494

7.14.6 Reference Signal Structure


Section "Reference Signal Structure" is where reference signal structure can be configured individually for demodulation and sounding purposes.
In the "SRS Structure" section, the UE specific sounding reference signal parameters
according to 3GPP TS 36.213 and 3GPP TS 36.211 are enabled for configuration.
The cell specific parameters, necessary for the complete definition of the SRS structure
and SRS mapping, are configurable in the General UL Settings dialog.
To visualize the SRS transmission, use the SC-FDMA time plan.

DRS Power Offset


Sets the power offset of the Demodulation Reference Signal (DRS) relative to the power
level of the PUSCH or PUCCH allocation of the corresponding subframe.
The selected DRS power offset (PDRS_Offset) applies for all subframes.
Depending on the allocation of the subframe, the effective power level of the DRS is
calculated as following:
for PUSCH allocation
PDRS=PUE+PPUSCH+PDRS_Offset
for PUCCH allocation
PDRS=PUE+PPUCCH+PDRS_Offset
The PUSCH and PUCCH Power levels (PPUSCH and PPUCCH) can vary per subframe.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

211

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

For global adjustment of the transmit power of the corresponding UE, use the parameter
UE Power (PUE).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:DRS:POWoffset on page 495
SRS State
Enables/disables sending of SRS for the corresponding UE.
In the symbols reserved for SRS transmission, PUSCH is not transmitted.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:STATe on page 496
SRS Power Offset
Sets the power offset of the Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) relative to the power of
the corresponding UE.
The selected SRS power offset applies for all subframes.
The effective power level of the SRS is calculated as follow:
PSRS=PUE+PSRS_Offset
For global adjustment of the transmit power of the corresponding UE, use the parameter
UE Power (PUE).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:POWoffset on page 496
SRS Cyclic Shift n_CS
Sets the cyclic shift n_CS used for the generation of the sounding reference signal
CAZAC sequence.
Since the different shifts of the same Zadoff-Chu sequence are orthogonal to each other,
applying different SRS cyclic shifts can be used to schedule different users to transmit
simultaneously their sounding reference signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:CYCShift on page 496
Show Signal Structure Configuration Details>>>
Opens the menu for configuring the sounding reference signal structure.
Remote command:
n.a.

7.14.7 SRS Structure


In the "SRS Structure" section, the UE specific sounding reference signal parameters
according to 3GPP TS 36.213 and 3GPP TS 36.211 are enabled for configuration.
The cell specific parameters, necessary for the complete definition of the SRS structure
and SRS mapping, are configurable in the General UL Settings dialog.
To visualize the SRS transmission, use the SC-FDMA time plan.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

212

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Configuration Index I_SRS


Sets the UE specific parameter SRS configuration index ISRS. Depending on the selected
"Duplexing Mode", this parameter determines the parameters SRS Periodicity T SRS and
SRS Subframe Offset T_offset as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.213, Table 8.2-1 (FDD) and
8.2-2 (TDD) respectively.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:ISRS on page 497
Periodicity T_SRS
Displays the UE specific parameter SRS periodicity TSRS, i.e. displays the interval of milliseconds after which the SRS is transmitted. The displayed value depends on the
selected SRS Configuration Index I_SRS and "Duplexing Mode" as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.213, Table 8.2-1 (FDD) and 8.2-2 (TDD) respectively.
Adjust the SRS configuration index to enable more frequent SRS transmission like each
2 ms or an infrequently SRS transmission like each 320 ms for instance.
For TDD duplexing mode, a T_SRS of 2 ms means that SRS is transmitted two times in
5 ms.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

213

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Example:
"Configuration Index" = 0, i.e. "Periodicity T_SRS" = 2 ms and "Subframe Offset T_offset
"=0
"SRS State" = On
"Duplexing" = FDD
The default values of all other SRS parameters are left unchanged.
The SRS is transmitted every 2 ms and occupies the entire channel bandwidth, i.e. frequency hopping is not enabled.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:TSRS on page 498
Subframe Offset T_offset
Displays the UE specific parameter SRS subframe offset Toffset, depending on the
selected SRS Configuration Index I_SRS and "Duplexing Mode" as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.213, Table 8.2-1 (FDD) and 8.2-2 (TDD) respectively.
A SRS subframe offset shifts the SRS pattern, i.e. while SRS periodicity T_SRS remains
constant, the SRS transmission is delayed with period of time equal to the SRS subframe
offset T_offset.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

214

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Example:
"Configuration Index" = 1, i.e. "Periodicity T_SRS" = 2 ms and "Subframe Offset T_offset" = 1
"SRS State" = On
"Duplexing" = FDD
The default values of all other SRS parameters are left unchanged.
The SRS is transmitted every 2 ms and occupies the entire channel bandwidth, i.e. frequency hopping is not enabled. Compared to the SRS transmission with Toffset = 0, the
SRS transmission is delayed with 1 ms.

For TDD duplexing mode, a T_offset of 0 or 5 means that SRS is transmitted in the second
last symbol of the special subframe (in the UpPTS part). For this cases, adjust the
parameter Configuration of Special Subframes so that an UpPTS field length of two symbols is assured.
For TDD duplexing mode with T_SRS value of 2 ms, two T_offset values are displayed,
corresponding to the two SRS transmissions per 5 ms. For example, the values 0,1 mean
that two SRS transmissions occur, both in the special subframe. One of them is in the
second last symbol and the other one, in the last symbol of the subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:TOFFset? on page 498
SRS Bandwidth B_SRS
Sets the UE specific parameter SRS Bandwidth BSRS, as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.211,
chapter 5.5.3.2.
The SRS can span the entire frequency bandwidth or can employ frequency hopping
where several narrowband SRSs cover the same total bandwidth.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

215

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

There are up to four SRS bandwidths defined in the standard. The most narrow SRS
bandwidth (B_SRS = 3) spans four resource blocks and is available for all channel bandwidths; the other three values of the parameter B_SRS define more wideband SRS
bandwidths, available depending on the channel bandwidth.

The SRS transmission bandwidth is determined additionally by the "SRS Bandwidth


Configuration CSRS".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

216

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Example:
"SRS State" = On
"Duplexing" = FDD
The default values of all other SRS parameters are left unchanged.
For B_SRS = 0 the SC-FDMA time plan shows a wideband SRS without frequency hopping.

Changing the SRS bandwidth to "B_SRS" = 3 results in the most narrowband SRS transmission with SRS bandwidth of 4 RBs and enabled frequency hopping.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

217

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:BSRS on page 497
Transmission Comb k TC
Sets the UE specific parameter transmission comb kTC, as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.211, chapter 5.5.3.2.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:TRComb on page 499
Hopping Bandwidth b_hop
Sets the UE specific parameter frequency hopping bandwidth bhop, as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.211, chapter 5.5.3.2.
SRS frequency hopping is enabled, if bHOP<BSRS.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:BHOP on page 496
Freq. Domain Position n_RRC
Sets the UE specific parameter frqDomainPosition nRRC, as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.211, chapter 5.5.3.2.
This parameter determines the starting physical resource block of the SRS transmission.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:REFSig:SRS:NRRC on page 499

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

218

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

7.14.8 PRACH Power Ramping


The "PRACH" settings are available when the user equipment "Mode" is set to PRACH.
State PRACH Power Ramping
Activates Power Ramping for the PRACH preamble. The start and the end of the preamble is cyclically extended and multiplied with a ramping function (sin^2).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:PRSTate on page 488
Transition Time
Defines the transition time from beginning of the extended preamble to the start of the
preamble itself.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:PRTT on page 488

7.14.9 PRACH Configuration


The "PRACH" settings are available when the user equipment "Mode" is set to PRACH.
In the "PRACH Configuration" section, the UE specific parameters according to
3GPP TS 36.211 are enabled for configuration.
The cell specific parameters, necessary for the complete definition of the PRACH, are
configurable in the General UL Settings dialog.
Preamble Format (Burst Format)
Displays the preamble format.
The "Preamble Format" is automatically derived form the PRACH Configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:PRFormat on page 489
Number of Configurable Frames
Shows how many frames can be configured.
A maximum number of 20 frames are available for configuration; the currently available
number of frames depends on the selected ARB Sequence Length.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:CFRames on page 489
SF
Displays the consecutive number of the subframe.
The subframes available for configuration depend on the selected "Duplexing" mode and
"PRACH Configuration".
Remote command:
n.a.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

219

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


User Equipment Configuration

RB Offset
Displays the starting RB, as set with the parameter PRACH Frequency Offset.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:RBOFfset
on page 489
Frequency Resource Index
This parameter is enabled in TDD duplexing mode only.
Sets the frequency resource index fRA for the selected subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:FRINdex
on page 489
Ncs Configuration
Selects the Ncs configuration of the selected subframe, i.e. determines the Ncs value for
the selected preamble set according to TS 36.211, table 5.7.2.-2 and 5.7.2-3.
The value range of this parameter depends on the selected Duplexing mode, PRACH
configuration and whether a restricted preamble set is enabled or not.
Parameter

Value Range Ncs Configuration

Disabled Restricted Set (High Speed Mode)

0 .. 15

Enabled "Restricted Preamble Set"

0 .. 14

TDD + PRACH Configuration > 47

0 .. 6

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:NCSConf
on page 490
Logical Root Sequence Index
Selects the logical root sequence index for the selected subframe.
The value range of this parameter depends on the combination of selected Duplexing
mode and PRACH configuration.
Parameter

Value Range Logical Root Sequence


Index

TDD + PRACH Configuration > 47 i.e. Preamble Format 4

0 .. 137

All other cases

0 .. 837

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:RSEQuence
on page 490

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

220

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUSCH Settings

Sequence Index (v)


Selects the sequence index v for the selected subframe, i.e. selects which one of the 64
preambles available in a cell will be used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:SINDex
on page 491
Delta t/us
Sets the parameter Delta_t in us.
A value of delta t different than 0 causes a time shift of the configured preamble.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:DT on page 491
Power (PRACH)
Sets the PRACH power relative to the UE power. The PRACH power can be adjusted
independently for every configured preamble.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:POWer on page 490
State (PRACH)
Enables/disables the PRACH for the selected subframe.
The subframes available for configuration depend on the selected PRACH configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:UE<st>:PRACh:SUBF<ch0>:STATe on page 491

7.15 Enhanced PUSCH Settings


The "Enhanced Settings" dialog for PUSCH allows you to define and configure additional
PUSCH parameters, such as the settings of the uplink scarred channel (UL-SCH), HARQ
control information and the Channel Quality Control Information (CQI). This dialog provides the possibility to adjust the parameters for channel coding of the control information
(HARQ and CQI) and to configure the multiplexing of this control information with the data
transmission over the UL-SCH.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

221

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUSCH Settings

7.15.1 Common PUSCH Settings


Provided are the following settings:
UE/Content Type
Displays the UE number and the content type of the selected allocation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CONType
on page 464
n(2)_DMRS
Sets the part of the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) index which is part of the
uplink scheduling assignment and therefore only valid for the according UE in the according subframe.
This index applies when multiple shifts within a cell are used and is used by the calculation
of the DMRS sequence.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:NDMRs
on page 468

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

222

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUSCH Settings

7.15.2 Frequency Hopping


Frequency Hopping
Enables/disables frequency hopping for PUSCH.
Frequency hopping is applied according to 3GPP TS 36.213.
Based on the Information in Hopping Bits, a UE performing PUSCH frequency hopping
applies one of the two possible Hopping Type.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:FHOP:
STATe on page 468
Information in Hopping Bits
Sets the information in hopping bits according to the PDCCH DCI format 0 hopping bit
definition. This information determines whether type 1 or type 2 hopping is used in the
subframe, and - in case of type 1 - additionally determines the exact hopping function to
use.
Frequency hopping is applied according to 3GPP TS 36.213.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:FHOP:
IIHBits on page 469
Hopping Type
Displays the frequency hopping type used, as defined in 3GPP TS 36.213.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:FHOP:TYPE
on page 469

7.15.3 Channel Coding / Multiplexing

All parameters in this section are enabled for configuration only if the Channel Coding for
the corresponding user equipment is activated and the Mode Channel Coding is set to
"UCI+UL-SCH" or "UCI Only".
ACK/NACK Mode
Sets the ACK/NACK mode to Multiplexing or Bundling according to 3GPP TS 36.212,
chapter 5.2.2.6.
ACK/NACK Mode Bundling is defined for TDD duplexing mode only and is the only one
available mode for UL/DL Configuration 5.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:HARQ:MODE
on page 469

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

223

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUSCH Settings

N_bundled
For "ACK/NACK Mode Bundling", sets the parameter N_bundled according to 3GPP
TS36.212, section 5.2.2.6.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:HARQ:
NBUNdled on page 470
Number of A/N Bits
Sets the number of ACK/NACK bits.
Set this parameter to 0 to deactivate the ACK/NACK transmission for the corresponding
subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:HARQ:BITS
on page 470
ACK/NACK Pattern
Sets the ACK/NACK bits in form of a 64 bits long pattern.
A "1" indicates an ACK, a "0" - a NACK.
The pattern is read out cyclically and if the pattern is longer than the selected "Number
of ACK/NACK Bits", different bits will be transmitted in different subframes using this
configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:HARQ:
PATTern on page 471
Number of Coded A/N Bits
Displays the number of coded ACK/NACK bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:HARQ:
CBITs on page 470
Number of RI Bits
Sets the number of rank indication (RI) bits.
Set this parameter to 0 to deactivate the RI for the corresponding subframe.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:RI:BITS
on page 472
RI Pattern
Sets the RI bits in form of a 64 bits long pattern.
The pattern is read out cyclically and if the pattern is longer than the selected "Number
of RI Bits", different bits will be transmitted in different subframes using this configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:RI:
PATTern on page 473

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

224

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUSCH Settings

Number of Coded RI Bits


Displays the number of coded RI bits.
If a "Channel Coding Mode UCI + UL-SCH" is selected, the Number of Physical Bits for
UL-SCH is determinate by the number of coded bits used for CQI and RI transmission.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:RI:CBITs?
on page 472
Number of CQI Bits
Sets the number of CQI bits before channel coding.
If a "Channel Coding Mode UCI + UL-SCH" is selected, the Number of Physical Bits for
UL-SCH is determinate by the number of coded bits used for CQI and RI transmission.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:CQI:BITS
on page 471
CQI Pattern
Sets the CQI pattern for the PUSCH.
The pattern is read out cyclically and if the pattern is longer than the selected "Number
of CQI Bits", different bits will be transmitted in different subframes using this configuration.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:CQI:
PATTern on page 471
Number of Coded CQI Bits
Displays the number of coded CQI bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:CQI:
CBITs? on page 471
Phys. Bits / Total Number of Physical Bits
Displays the size of the selected allocation in bits. The value is set automatically according to the current allocation's settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PHYSbits?
on page 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:PHYSbits?
on page 466
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:PHYSbits?
on page 466
Number of Coded UL-SCH Bits
Displays the number of physical bits used for UL-SCH transmission.
If a "Channel Coding Mode UCI + UL-SCH" is selected, the value is calculated as follow:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

225

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUCCH Settings

"Number of Coded UL-SCH Bits" = Total Number of Physical Bits - Number of Coded
CQI Bits - Number of Coded RI Bits
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:ULSCh:
BITS? on page 473
Transport Block Size/Payload (PUSCH)
Sets the size of the transport block.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:CCODing:
TBSize on page 473
Redundancy Version Index (PUSCH)
Sets the redundancy version index.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUSCh:CCODing:
RVINdex on page 474

7.16 Enhanced PUCCH Settings


The "Enhanced Settings "menu displays the PUCCH relevant settings and allows you to
define and configure the PUCCH resource index.
The "Channel Coding / Multiplexing" section and the parameters available for configuration depend on the selected PUCCH Format for the corresponding allocation.

PUCCH Format 1 carries no control information, i.e. the entire "Channel Coding/Multiplexing" section is not displayed. CQI control information is carried only by PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b and the CQI parameters are enabled only if one of these formats is selected.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

226

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUCCH Settings

7.16.1 Common Settings


Provided are the following settings:
UE/Content Type
Displays the UE number and the content type of the selected allocation.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CONType
on page 464
PUCCH Format
Displays the selected PUCCH Format.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:FORMat
on page 464
n_PUCCH
Sets the resource index for PUCCH format 1/1a/1b respectively 2/2a/2b.
For configuration of multi user PUCCH tests according to 3GPP TS 36.141, annex A9,
set the n_PUCCH parameter to the value defined in table A.9-1, column "RS orthogonal
cover / ACK/NACK orthogonal cover". The R&S Signal Generator calculates and configures automatically the values defined in the columns "Cyclic shift index" and "Orthogonal cover index".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:NPAR
on page 474

7.16.2 Channel Coding / Multiplexing


Provided are the following settings:
ACK/NACK Pattern / ACK/NACK+SR Pattern
("ACK/NACK Pattern" is enabled for PUCCH formats 1a/1b, 2a/2b; "ACK/NACK+SR
Pattern" for PUCCH format 3)
Use this parameter to set the ACK/NACK pattern for the PUCCH for the selected subframe. A "1" indicates an ACK, a "0" - a NACK
In PUCCH format 3, the bits given by the ACK/NACK+SR PATTERN represent the
oACK bits according to 3GPP TS 36.212, i.e. the up to 21 bits that contain ACK/NACK
information for up to two codewords and optionally SR. The number of bits used per
subframe is determinate by the value of the parameter "Number of ACK/NACK+SR
Bits" on page 229.
To enable the generation of signals with ACK/NACK respectively ACK/NACK+SR information that varies not only per subframe but also differs over the frames, set a pattern
with
more than 1 bit for the PUCCH formats 1a/2a
more than 2 bits for the PUCCH formats 1b/2b

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

227

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Enhanced PUCCH Settings

more than "Number of ACK/NACK+SR Bits" on page 229 for PUCCH format 3

The ACK/NACK pattern has a maximal length of 32 bits and is read out cyclically.
Example:
"Duplexing Mode" = FDD
"Sequence Length" = 4 Frames (BB:EUTR:SLEN 4)
"Number of Configurable Subframes" = 8 (BB:EUTR:UL:CONS 8)
"PUCCH Format" = 1a or 2a (BB:EUTR:UL:SUBF0:ALL1:FORM F1A|F2A)
"ACK/NACK Pattern" = 01001 (BB:EUTR:UL:SUBF0:ALL1:PUCC:HARQ:PATT
#B01001,5)
The generated signal will carry ACK/NACK information as shown on the figure bellow.

By changing only the PUCCH Format to 1b or 2b (BB:EUTR:UL:SUBF0:ALL1:FORM


F1B|F2B), the ACK/NACK information per subframe will change as shown on the figure
bellow.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:HARQ:
PATTern on page 475
Number of CQI Bits (PUCCH)
(enabled for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b only)
Sets the number of CQI bits before channel coding.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:CQI:BITS
on page 476
PUCCH Format 3 Settings
The PUCCH format 3 is required for sending of the ACK/NACK messages in case DL
carrier aggregation with more than two component carriers is used.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

228

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


SC-FDMA Timeplan

See also chapter 3.6, "LTE-Advanced Introduction", on page 38 and chapter 7.4.1, "DL
Carrier Aggregation Configuration", on page 98.
Number of ACK/NACK+SR Bits PUCCH Format 3 Settings
(enabled for PUCCH format 3 only)
Sets the number of ACK/NACK+SR bits before channel coding.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:HARQ:BITS
on page 474
Number of Coded ACK/NACK+SR Bits PUCCH Format 3 Settings
(enabled for PUCCH format 3 only)
Displays the number of coded ACK/NACK+SR bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:HARQ:
CBITs? on page 474
ACK/NACK+SR Pattern PUCCH Format 3 Settings
(enabled for PUCCH format 3 only)
See "ACK/NACK Pattern / ACK/NACK+SR Pattern" on page 227.
Number of Coded CQI Bits (PUCCH)
Displays the number of coded CQI bits.
The number of coded CQI bits for PUCCH is always 20.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:CQI:
CBITs? on page 475
CQI Pattern (PUCCH)
Sets the CQI pattern for the PUCCH.
The length of the pattern is determinate by the value of the parameter Number of CQI
Bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:PUCCh:CQI:
PATTern on page 476

7.17 SC-FDMA Timeplan


The "SC-FDMA Timeplan" menu is called in the "UL Frame Configuration" menu with the
button "Show Time Plan".
The x-axis shows allocation in the time domain. The y-axis shows the resource blocks
as smallest allocation granularity in the frequency domain. One allocation of a UE can
span 1 to up to "No. of Resource Blocks" in the frequency domain.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

229

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


TDD Timeplan

Sounding Reference Signals are automatically calculated according to the settings for
signal structure in "User Equipment".

First Subframe
Selects the first subframe to be displayed.
Remote command:
n.a.
No. of Subframes
Selects the number of subframes to be displayed.
Remote command:
n.a.
Show Time Plan in Dialog
Enlarges the time plan display.

7.18 TDD Timeplan


The "TDD Timeplan" menu is called in the "DL" or "UL Frame Configuration" menu with
the button "Show Time Plan" whenever TDD is selected as "Duplexing" mode.
The x-axis shows allocation in the time domain. The y-axis shows the resource blocks
as smallest allocation granularity in the frequency domain.
The frame structure of depends on the selected "DL/UL Configuration" and the "Configuration of Special Subframe".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

230

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


TDD Timeplan

First Subframe
Selects the first subframe to be displayed.
Remote command:
n.a.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

231

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

No. of Subframes
Selects the number of subframes to be displayed.
Remote command:
n.a.
Show Time Plan in Dialog
Enlarges the time plan display.

7.19 Filter/Clipping/Power Settings


To access this dialog, select "Main dialog > Filter/Clipping/ARB Settings".
The dialog comprises the settings, necessary to enable time domain windowing and
clipping, to adjust the baseband filter and power settings.

7.19.1 Time Domain Windowing Settings


Provided are the following settings:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

232

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

State (Time Domain Windowing)


Activates/deactivates the time domain windowing.
Time domain windowing is a method to influence the spectral characteristics (i.e. it
removes the spikes caused by the OFDM) of the signal, which is not stipulated by the
standard.
However, it does not replace oversampling and subsequent signal filtering.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:STATe on page 351
Transition Time
Sets the transition time when time domain windowing is active.
The transition time defines the overlap range of two OFDM symbols. At a setting of 1 us
and if sample rate = 15.36 MHz, 15 samples overlap.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:TRTime on page 351

7.19.2 Filter Settings


Provided are the follwoing settings for configuring the baseband filter:
Filter
Sets the baseband filter.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:TYPE on page 343
Optimization
Selects one of the provided EUTRA/LTE filters.
Each filter is designed for different application field and optimized for a particular performance. Depending on the filter implementation, these filters require different calculation time. The applied upsampling factor also influences the size of the calculated output
waveform file. An output waveform is calculated with the "Generate Waveform File" function or by generating of an LTE waveform with R&S WinIQSIM2.
The table 7-11 outlines the difference between the provided EUTRA/LTE filters by comparing their major specifications.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

233

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Table 7-11: Overview of the EUTRA/LTE filters


Characteristic

Design goal

"Best EVM"

An excellent EVM performance while ignoring


the effects on ACP

"Best APC"
"Best ACP (Narrow)"

"Balanced EVM
and ACP"

"Best EVM (no upsampling)"

A combination of an excellent
ACP performance and a good
EVM performance

A trade-off
between EVM and
ACP performance

A combination of an excellent ACP performance and


a good EVM performance

"Best ACP (Narrow)" features


additionally a smoother shape in
frequency domain

small output waveform file


size

Long calculation time: the filtered By real-time prosignal is precalculated because cessing, short calof the filter complexity
culation time

Long calculation time: the


filtered signal is precalculated because of the filter
complexity

Calculation time
(in real-time processing)

By real-time processing,
short calculation time

Upsampling

Upsampling with factor 2 Upsampling with factor 2


The sample rate of the
The sample rate of the output
output waveform is twice waveform is twice the LTE samthe LTE sample rate
ple rate
The signal processing requires
twice as much internal memory
and the available memory on the
instrument is sufficient for the
simulation of half as much
frames compared to filter "Best
EVM"

Output waveform
file size

Increased file size

Increased file size

Recommended
application field

Receiver and performTransmitter and components


ance tests with internal
tests where excellent ACP is
real-time generation,
required
where BLER is analyzed

Upsampling with
factor 2
The sample rate of
the output waveform is twice the
LTE sample rate

Increased file size

Upsampling is not applied


The sample rate of the output waveform is not
changed

File size is maintained


The resulting file size is
smaller than in the other
cases
Receiver and performance
tests with pre-generated
waveform files, where
BLER is analyzed

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:OPTimization
on page 347
Load User Filter
(available for Filter Type user only)
Calls the menu "Select List File User Filter" for selecting a user-defined filter file with
extension *.vaf.
For more information, refer to the description "Introduction to "filtwiz" Filter Editor" on the
Rohde&Schwarz Internet page.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:USER on page 349
Roll Off Factor or BxT
Sets the filter parameter.
The Roll Off Factor affects the steepness of the filter flanks. A "Roll Off Factor" = 0 results
in the steepest flanks; values near to 1 make the flanks more flat.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

234

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Fig. 7-11: Example of the frequency response of a filter with different Roll Off Factors

For the default cosine filter, a roll off factor of 0.10 is used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:COSine on page 345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine on page 348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:PGAuss on page 348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs on page 346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase on page 349
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25 on page 345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:ROFactor on page 348
Cut Off Frequency Shift
(available for filter parameter Cosine and EUTRA/LTE with EVM Optimization only)
The cut off frequency is a filter characteristic that defines the frequency at the 3 dB down
point. The "Cut Off Frequency Shift" affects this frequency in the way that the filter flanks
are "moved" and the transition band increases by "Cut Off Frequency Shift"*"Sample
Rate".
A "Cut Off Frequency Shift" = -1 results in a very narrow-band filter
Increasing the value up to 1 makes the filter more broad-band
By "Cut Off Frequency Shift" = 0, the -3 dB point is at the frequency determined by
the half of the selected "Sample Rate".
Tip: Use this parameter to adjust the cut off frequency and reach spectrum mask requirements.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

235

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Fig. 7-12: Example of the frequency response of a filter with different Cut Off Frequency Shift

Example:
"Channel Bandwidth" = 10 MHz
"Sample Rate" = 15.36 MHz
"Cut Off Frequency Shift" = 0
Frequency at 3 dB down point = +/- 7.68 MHz
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:COSine:COFS on page 346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:OPTimization
on page 347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:COFS on page 347
Cut Off Frequency Factor
(available for filter parameter Lowpass and EUTRA/LTE with ACP Optimization only)
Sets the value for the cut off frequency factor. The cut off frequency of the filter can be
adjusted to reach spectrum mask requirements.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs on page 346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:OPTimization
on page 347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:COFFactor on page 347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM on page 346
Filter Mode
Selects an offline or realtime filter mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:MODE on page 343
Sample Rate Variation
Sets the sample rate of the signal. A variation of this parameter only affects the ARB clock
rate; all other signal parameters remain unchanged.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

236

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

If the sampling rate in the "General Settings" menu is changed, this parameter is reset
to the chosen sampling rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SRATe:VARiation on page 349
Impulse Length
(For WinIQSIM2 only)
Displays the number of filter tabs. If the check box is activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If the check box
is deactivated, the values can be changed manually.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:ILENgth:AUTO on page 344
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:ILENgth on page 344
Oversampling
(For WinIQSIM2 only)
Determines the upsampling factor. If the check box is activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If the check box
is deactivated, the values can be changed manually.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO on page 345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:OSAMpling on page 344

7.19.3 Clipping Settings


Provided are the following settings:
Clipping State
Switches baseband clipping on and off.
Baseband clipping is a very simple and effective way of reducing the crest factor of the
signal. Since clipping is done prior to filtering, the procedure does not influence the spectrum. The EVM however increases.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:STATe on page 351
Clipping Level
Sets the limit for clipping.
This value indicates at what point the signal is clipped. It is specified as a percentage,
relative to the highest level. 100% indicates that clipping does not take place.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:LEVel on page 350
Clipping Mode
Selects the clipping method. A graphic illustration of the way in which these two methods
work is given in the dialog.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

237

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

"Vector | i + q |"
The limit is related to the amplitude | i + q |. The I and Q components are mapped
together, the angle is retained.
"Scalar | i | + | q |"
The limit is related to the absolute maximum of all the I and Q values | i | + | q | . The
I and Q components are mapped separately, the angle changes.

Selects the clipping method. A graphic illustration of the way in which these two methods
work is given in the menu.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:MODE on page 350

7.19.4 Time Domain Windowing Settings


Provided are the following settings:
State (Time Domain Windowing)
Activates/deactivates the time domain windowing.
Time domain windowing is a method to influence the spectral characteristics (i.e. it
removes the spikes caused by the OFDM) of the signal, which is not stipulated by the
standard.
However, it does not replace oversampling and subsequent signal filtering.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:STATe on page 351
Transition Time
Sets the transition time when time domain windowing is active.
The transition time defines the overlap range of two OFDM symbols. At a setting of 1 us
and if sample rate = 15.36 MHz, 15 samples overlap.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:TRTime on page 351

7.19.5 Power Settings


The "Power" sections provides an access to the settings necessary to adjust the global
power level of the generated LTE signal.
For an overview of the provided power settings and a detailed information on how to
adjust them, refer to chapter 5.3, "Power Setting", on page 59.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

238

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Power Offset Relative to Level Display


Sets the power offset of the according baseband relative to the RMS level displayed in
the instruments global Level display in the header of the instrument.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:ORTLevel on page 352
Power Reference
Defines the reference the "Level" display in the status bar is referring to.
"Frame RMS
Power"

The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during the whole frame.
All frames are considered, not only the first one.

"DL Part of
Frame RMS
Power"

The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during the DL part of the
frame (all DL subframes and the DwPTS).
All frames are considered, not only the first one.

"UL Part of
Frame RMS
Power"

The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during the UL part of the
frame (all UL subframes and the UpPTS).
All frames are considered, not only the first one.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

239

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

"UE Burst RMS The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during a single subframe
of a certain UE. One of the following channels is used:
Power"

PUSCH (without DRS)

PUCCH (without DRS)

PUCCH and PUSCH (both without DRS)

PRACH or

SRS.

The subframe, channel and reference used are displayed by means of


the parameters Reference Subframe, Reference Channel and Reference UE.
The instrument selects a suitable reference automatically according the
following algorithm:

The first active UE is used

The data part of the first PUSCH/PUCCH is used

In PRACH mode, the first PRACH preamble is used

If there is no active subframe, the SRS is used.

This power mode is required for setting the AWGN correctly (e.g.
according to TS 36.141), in case not every possible subframe is used
by the simulated UE. The actual part of the signal used for determining
RMS and PEP are displayed in the graphical interface.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:LEVReference on page 352
Reference UE
(enabled for Power Reference set to "UL Burst RMS Power")
Displays the UE the measured RMS and PEP is referring to.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:RUE? on page 353
Reference Subframe
(enabled for Power Reference set to "UL Burst RMS Power")
Displays the subframe the measured RMS and PEP is referring to.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:REFSubframe? on page 353
Reference Channel
(enabled for Power Reference set to "UL Burst RMS Power")
Displays the channel type the measured RMS and PEP is referring to.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:REFChannel on page 352

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

240

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

7.20 Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings


The trigger, clock, and marker delay functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU
instruments only.
To access this dialog, select "Main Menu > Trigger/Marker".
The "Trigger In" section is where the trigger for the signal is set. Various parameters will
be provided for the settings, depending on which trigger source - internal or external - is
selected. The current status of signal generation ("Running" or "Stopped") is indicated
for all trigger modes.

The "Marker Mode" section is where the marker signals at the MARKER output connectors are configured.

The "Marker Delay" section is where a marker signal delay can be defined, either without
restriction or restricted to the dynamic section, i.e., the section in which it is possible to
make settings without restarting signal and marker generation.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

241

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

The "Clock Settings" section is where the clock source is selected and - in the case of an
external source - the clock type.

The buttons in the last section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping
settings.

7.20.1 Trigger In

The trigger functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.

The "Trigger In" section is where the trigger for the signal is set. Various parameters will
be provided for the settings, depending on which trigger source - internal or external - is
selected. The current status of signal generation ("Running" or "Stopped") is indicated
for all trigger modes.
Trigger Mode
Selects trigger mode.
The trigger mode determines the effect of a trigger on the signal generation.
"Auto"

The signal is generated continuously.

"Retrigger"

The signal is generated continuously. A trigger event (internal or external) causes a restart.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

242

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

"Armed_Auto"

The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the
signal is generated continuously.
Button "Arm" stops signal generation. A subsequent trigger event after
"Arm" (internal with "Execute Trigger" or external) causes a restart.
Tip: This mode is used for example for Base Station Tests if a frame
marker from the device under test starts the signal output. Subsequent
frame markers will not cause a restart of the signal.

"Armed_Retrigger"

The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the
signal is generated continuously. Every subsequent trigger event causes a restart.
Button "Arm" stops signal generation. A subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or external) causes a restart.

"Single"

The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs. Then the
signal is generated once to the length specified at "Signal Duration".
Every subsequent trigger event (internal with "Execute Trigger" or
external) causes a restart.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa[:TRIGger]:SEQuence on page 358
Signal Duration Unit
Defines the unit for the entry of the length of the signal sequence to be output in the
"Single" trigger mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SLUNit on page 363
Signal Duration
Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the "Single" trigger mode. The
unit of the entry is defined under "Signal Duration Unit". It is then possible to output deliberately just part of the signal, an exact sequence of the signal, or a defined number of
repetitions of the signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SLENgth on page 363
Running/Stopped
Displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes. This display appears only
when signal generation is enabled ("State" On).
"Running"

The modulation signal is generated; a trigger was (internally or externally) initiated in triggered mode.
If "Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger" have been selected, generation of signals can be stopped with the "Arm" button. A new trigger
(internally with "Execute Trigger" or externally) causes a restart.

"Stopped"

The signal is not generated, and the instrument waits for a trigger event
(internal or external).

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:RMODe? on page 362

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

243

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

Arm
Stops signal generation. This button appears only with "Running" signal generation in the
"Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger" trigger modes.
Signal generation can be restarted by a new trigger (internally with "Execute Trigger" or
externally).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute on page 358
Execute Trigger
Executes trigger manually. A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal trigger source and a trigger mode other than "Auto" have been selected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXECute on page 359
Trigger Source
Selects trigger source. This setting is effective only when a trigger mode other than
"Auto" has been selected.
"Internal"

The trigger event is executed by "Execute Trigger".

"Internal
(Baseband A/
B)"

(two-path instruments only)


The trigger event is executed by the trigger signal from the second path

"External
(TRIGGER 1 /
2)"

The trigger event is executed with the aid of the active edge of an external trigger signal.
The trigger signal is supplied via the TRIGGER connector.
The polarity, the trigger threshold and the input impedance of the
TRIGGER input can be set in the "Global Trigger/Clock Settings" dialog.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SOURce on page 364
Sync. Output to External Trigger
(enabled for "Trigger Source" External)
Enables/disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event.
For R&S SMBV instruments:
For or two or more R&S SMBVs configured to work in a master-slave mode for synchronous signal generation, configure this parameter depending on the provided system trigger event and the properties of the output signal. See the table below for an overview of
the required settings.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

244

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

Table 7-12: Typical Applications


System Trigger

Application

"Sync. Output to External Trigger"

Common External Trigger event for All instruments are synchronous to ON


the master and the slave instruthe external trigger event
ments
All instruments are synchronous
OFF
among themselves but starting the
signal from first symbol is more
important than synchronicity with
external trigger event
Internal trigger signal of the master All instruments are synchronous
R&S SMBV for the slave instruamong themselves
ments

"On"

OFF

Corresponds to the default state of this parameter.


The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger
event but because of the instruments processing time the first samples
are cut off and no signal is outputted. After elapsing of the internal processing time, the output signal is synchronous to the trigger event.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

245

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

"Off"

The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts
with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is outputted.
This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences
with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut
on page 360
Trigger Delay Unit
Selects the unit ("Samples" or "Time") of the external and other baseband trigger delay.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:DELay:UNIT on page 359
Trigger Delay
Sets the trigger signal delay on external triggering or on internal triggering via the second
path.
This enables the R&S Signal Generator to be synchronized with the device under test or
other external devices.
For two-path instruments, the delay can be set separately for each of the two paths.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:DELay on page 365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal<ch>:TDELay on page 360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay on page 361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:TDELay on page 362
Actual External Delay
Indicates the resulting external trigger delay in "Time" unit.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal<ch>:RDELay? on page 359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:RDELay? on page 361
Trigger Inhibit
Sets the duration for inhibiting a new trigger event subsequent to triggering. The input is
to be expressed in samples.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

246

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

In the "Retrigger" mode, every trigger signal causes signal generation to restart. This
restart is inhibited for the specified number of samples.
This parameter is only available on external triggering or on internal triggering via the
second path.
For two-path instruments, the trigger inhibit can be set separately for each of the two
paths.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:INHibit on page 365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit on page 361

7.20.2 Timing Configuration


Signal Advance N_TA_offset
(R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only)
Sets the parameter NTA offset as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.211.
The parameter is available in "Uplink" directionand enabled "TDD" mode.
The 3GPP TS 36.211 defines the signal advance parameter depending on the duplexing
mode and specifies the following values:
for FDD mode: NTA offset = 0
for TDD mode: NTA offset = 624.
In the R&S Signal Generator, however, the signal advance for the TDD mode can also
be set to 0.
According to the 3GPP specification, the value of 624 means, that that the uplink signal
is shifted against the downlink one. This instrument does not generate the uplink and
downlink signal simultaneously and uses the marker signals to represent the downlink
timing, i.e. setting the NTA offset to 624 is used like a "negative trigger delay" and shifts the
uplink signal against the trigger and the markers.
To achieve the shifting, the R&S Signal Generator processes the signal differently,
depending whether the "Realtime Feedback" mode is activated or not (see figure 7-13).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

247

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

Fig. 7-13: Signal Processing

In Realtime Feedback mode, the shifting is achieved by omitting the beginning of the
signal, where the omitted part is exactly 624xTs long.
When the Realtime Feedback mode is disabled and the instrument is working in the
normal ARB mode, the samples of the ARB sequence are shifted with "wrap around",
i.e. the omitted samples are added to the end of the ARB sequence. The total length
of the sequence remains unchanged and is equal to sequence length in case of NTA
offset = 0.

Note: The time shift due to the N_TA_offset is independent from the time shifts caused
by the realtime feedback parameter Initial Timing Advance or by timing advance/adjustment commands. According to 3GPP TS 36.211, the resulting time shift is the sum of the
selected time shifts.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TIMC:NTAoffset on page 357

7.20.3 Marker Mode


The marker output signal for synchronizing external instruments is configured in the
"Marker settings" section "Marker Mode".
Marker Mode
Selects a marker signal for the associated "MARKER" output.
"Restart
(ARB)"

A marker signal is generated at the start of each ARB sequence.

"Radio Frame
Start"

A marker signal is generated at the start of each radio frame.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

248

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

"Frame Active
Part"

The marker signal is high whenever a burst is active and low during
inactive signal parts (such as the gaps between bursts in uplink mode
or the uplink subframe in downlink TDD mode).
This marker can be used to decrease the carrier leakage during inactive
signal parts by feeding it into the pulse modulator.

"Subframe"

A marker signal is generated at the start of each subframe.

"User Period"

A marker signal is generated at the beginning of every user-defined


period. The period is defined in "Period."

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod on page 369
"ON/OFF
Period"

A regular marker signal that is defined by an ON/OFF ratio is generated.


A period lasts one ON and OFF cycle.
The "ON Time" and "OFF Time" are each expressed as a number of
samples and are set in an input field which opens when ON/OFF ratio
is selected.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime on page 369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime on page 369
"Internally
Used"

Special marker signal for the realtime feedback mode (chapter 6, "Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests", on page 63) or for the "SFN
Restart Period 3GPP (1024 Frames)".

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE on page 367
Rise/Fall Offset
(Available for marker mode Subframe, Radio Frame Start, and Restart (ARB) only)
Sets the value for the rise/fall offset. The rising ramp of the marker is shifted by the set
value in samples. Positive values shift the rising ramp to later positions; negative values
shift it to earlier positions.
The value range is -640000 to 640000.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ROFFset on page 369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:FOFFset on page 369

7.20.4 Marker Delay


The delay of the signals on the MARKER outputs is set in the "Marker Delay" section.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

249

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

The marker delay functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.

The R&S SMBV supports only two markers.


Marker x Delay
Enters the delay between the marker signal at the marker outputs and the start of the
frame or slot.
Note: The R&S SMBV Vector Signal Generator supports only two markers.
The input is expressed as a number of symbols/samples. If the setting "Fix marker delay
to dynamic range" is enabled, the setting range is restricted to the dynamic range. In this
range the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay on page 366
Current Range without Recalculation
Displays the dynamic range within which the delay of the marker signals can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
The delay can be defined by moving the setting mark.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum?
on page 366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum?
on page 367
Fix marker delay to current range
Restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this range the delay
can be set without restarting the marker and signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed on page 366

7.20.5 Clock Settings


The "Clock Settings" are used to set the clock source and a delay if required.
The clock functions are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.

Sync. Mode
(for R&S SMBV only)
Selects the synchronization mode.
This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signal of several
connected R&S SMBVs.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

250

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

Note: If several instruments are connected, the connecting cables from the master
instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must
have the same length and type.
Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points.
"None"

The instrument is working in stand-alone mode.

"Sync. Master"

The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchronisation (including the trigger signal) and reference clock signal.

"Sync. Slave"

The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock signal


from another instrument working in a master mode.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SYNChronization:MODE on page 356
Set Synchronization Settings
(for R&S SMBV only)
Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument's settings required for the synchronization mode, selected with the parameter "Sync. Mode".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SYNChronization:MODE on page 356
Clock Source
Selects the clock source.
"Internal"

The internal clock reference is used to generate the symbol clock.

"External"

The external clock reference is fed in as the symbol clock or multiple


thereof via the CLOCK connector.
The symbol rate must be correctly set to an accuracy of +/-2 % (see
data sheet).
The polarity of the clock input can be changed with the aid of "Global
Trigger/Clock Settings".
In the case of two-path instruments this selection applies to path A.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SOURce on page 355
Clock Mode
Enters the type of externally supplied clock.
"Sample"

A sample clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector.

"Multiple Sample"

A multiple of the sample clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector;


the sample clock is derived internally from this.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

251

EUTRA/LTE

EUTRA/LTE User Interface


Trigger/Marker/Clock Settings

"Custom"

(not for R&S SMBV)


An external custom clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector.
The exact frequency of the provided clock has to be defined with
parameter "Custom External Clock".
Note: Custom External Clock source in baseband B is only supported
if baseband A is configured with EUTRA/LTE too. Furthermore the
same settings for clock source and clock mode have to be set in baseband A and B. The user needs to take care of the correct settings.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MODE on page 354
Clock Multiplier
Enters the multiplication factor for clock type "Multiple".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MULTiplier on page 355
Custom External Clock
Specifies the parameter for clock type "Custom" in case of external clock source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:CUSTom on page 354
Measured External Clock
Provided for permanent monitoring of the enabled and externally supplied clock signal.
Remote command:
CLOCk:INPut:FREQuency?

7.20.6 Global Settings


The buttons in this section lead to submenu for general trigger, clock and mapping settings.
These settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.
Global Trigger/Clock Settings
Calls the "Global Trigger/Clock/Input Settings" dialog.
This dialog is used among other things for setting the trigger threshold, the input impedance and the polarity of the clock and trigger inputs.
In the case of two-path instruments, these settings are valid for both paths.
The parameters in this dialog affect all digital modulations and standards, and are described in chapter "Global Trigger/Clock/Input Settings" in the Operating Manual.
User Marker / AUX I/O Settings
Calls the "User Marker AUX I/O Settings" dialog, used to map the connector on the rear
of the instruments.
See also "User Marker / AUX I/O Settings" in the Operating Manual.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

252

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Introduction to Conformance Testing

8 Test Case Wizard


The "Test Case Wizard" is supported by R&S SMU, R&S SMATE, R&S SMJ and R&S
SMBV.
The "Test Case Wizard" supports tests on base stations in conformance with the 3GPP
specification for Base Station conformance testing. It offers a selection of predefined
settings according to Test Cases in TS 36.141. For an overview of the test cases covered
by the test case wizard, refer to chapter 8.3, "Supported Test Cases", on page 255.
With the "Test Case Wizard", it is possible to create highly complex test scenarios with
just a few keystrokes.
The "Test Case Wizard" has effect on frequency and level settings, link direction, filter,
trigger, baseband clock source, marker settings and base station or user equipment configuration. Besides the EUTRA/LTE required settings also interfering signals (AWGN, CW
interferer, co-located modulation signals) or fading profiles are set.
The test setups and the hardcopies in this description assume a fully equipped R&S SMU.

8.1 Introduction to Conformance Testing


The main purpose of the conformance testing is to ensure that the base station (BS) and
the user equipment (UE) are fulfilling a defined level of minimum performance.
The 3GPP organization defines three groups of conformance testing for the UE: Radio
Frequency (RF), Radio Resource Management (RRM) and Signaling. There is only one
group conformance testing for the BS, the RF conformance tests.
This chapter is intended to give an overview of the 3GPP test specifications dealing with
the conformance tests. Only a brief description is provided.

8.1.1 UE Conformance Testing

The UE conformance tests are not in the scope of this description.

UE RF FDD/TDD Conformance Test Specifications


The UE RF conformance tests are based on the core specification TS 36.101 and are
defined in the TS 36.521. The following list gives an overview of the related specifications:

TS 36.124 "ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for mobile terminals


and ancillary equipment"

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

253

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Introduction to Conformance Testing

TS 36.521-1 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission


and reception; Part 1: Conformance testing"
Overview of the test cases:
Subclause 6: UE RF transmitter test cases
Transmit power, Output power dynamics, Transmit signal quality, Output RF
spectrum emissions and Transmit intermodulation

Subclause 7: UE RF receiver test cases


Diversity characteristics, Reference sensitivity power level, Maximum input level,
Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS), In-band blocking, Out-of-band blocking,
Narrow band blocking, Spurious response, Intermodulation characteristics, Spurious emissions

Subclause 8: UE RF FDD/TDD performance test cases


Demodulation of PDSCH (Cell-Specific Reference Symbols), Demodulation of
PDSCH (User-Specific Reference Symbols), Demodulation of PDCCH/PCFICH,
Demodulation of PHICH, Demodulation of PBCH

TS 36.521-2 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission


and reception; Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS)"

TS 36.521-3 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Radio transmission


and reception; Part 3: Radio Resource Management (RRM) conformance testing"

UE RRM Conformance Test Specifications


The following specifications deal with UE RRM conformance testing:

TS 36.133 "Requirements for support of radio resource management"

TS 36.521-3 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Part 3: Test suites"

UE Signaling Conformance Test Specifications


The UE signaling conformance tests are defined in the TS 36.523.

TS 36.523-1 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Part 1: Protocol conformance specification"

TS 36.523-2 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Part 2: Implementation Conformance Statement (ICS) proforma specification"

TS 36.523-3 "User Equipment (UE) conformance specification; Part 3: Test suites"

8.1.2 BS Conformance Testing


BS RF FDD/TDD Conformance Test Specifications
The BS RF conformance tests are based on the core specification TS 36.101 and are
defined in the TS 36.141.

TS 36.113 "Base Station (BS) and repeater ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)"

TS 36.141 "Base Station (BS) conformance testing"


The BS RF Conformance Tests are described in chapter 8.3, "Supported Test
Cases", on page 255.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

254

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Basic Configuration

8.1.3 Repeater Conformance Testing


The repeater conformance tests are based on the core specification TS 36.106 and
defined in the TS 36.143 "FDD repeater conformance testing".

8.2 Basic Configuration


The basic equipment layout for preforming test with the aid of "Test Case Wizard" is the
same as for the EUTRA/LTE signal generation. It includes the options:

Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU/SMJ/SMATE-B13)

Baseband Generator (R&S SMx-B10)

Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

Frequency option (R&S SMx-B10x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

However, some of the tests require further options. The additionally required hardware
and/or software options are listed as a prerequisite in the description of the corresponding
test case.
Test cases where the signal generator hardware and/or software equipment is not sufficient are shown in grey color but are not selectable.
RF power and frequency limitations of the hardware equipment restrict the setting ranges.

8.3 Supported Test Cases


The BS RF conformance tests defined in the TS 36.141 are divided into three main parts,
the RF transmitter characteristics, the RF receiver characteristics and the RF performance requirements.
The "Test Case Wizard" supports the test cases listed in the tables below.
Only the test case that require a signal generator are implemented in the "Test Case
Wizard".
Table 8-1: Transmitter Tests
Chapter in TS 36.141

Test Case

Section in this document with


further information

6.2

Base station output power

this test case does not require a


signal generator

Output power dynamics


6.3.1

RE Power control dynamic range

6.3.2

Total power dynamic range

6.4

Transmit ON/OFF power

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

255

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Supported Test Cases

Chapter in TS 36.141

Test Case

Section in this document with


further information

Transmitted signal quality


6.5.1

Frequency error

6.5.2

Error Vector Magnitude

6.5.3

Time alignment between transmitter branches

6.5.4

DL RS power
Unwanted emissions

6.6.1

Occupied bandwidth

6.6.2

Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio


(ACLR)

6.6.3

Operating band unwanted emissions

6.6.4

Transmitter spurious emissions

6.7

Transmitter intermodulation

chap. 8.7.3, on page 272

Table 8-2: Receiver Characteristics


Chapter in TS
36.141

Test Case

Section in this document with


further information

7.2

Reference sensitivity level

chap. 8.8.4, on page 283

7.3

Dynamic range

chap. 8.8.5, on page 285

7.4

In-channel selectivity

chap. 8.8.6, on page 288

7.5

Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS)

chap. 8.8.7, on page 291

Narrow-band blocking

chap. 8.8.8, on page 293

7.6

Blocking

chap. 8.8.9, on page 296

7.7

Receiver spurious emissions

this test case does not require a


signal generator

7.8

Receiver intermodulation

chap. 8.8.10, on page 300

Table 8-3: Performance Requirement


Chapter in TS
36.141

Test Case

Section in this document with


further information

Performance requirements for PUSCH


8.2.1

Performance requirements of PUSCH in multipath


fading propagation conditions

chap. 8.9.3, on page 308

8.2.2

Performance requirements for UL timing adjustment

chap. 8.9.4, on page 311

8.2.3

Performance requirements for HARQ-ACK multiplexed on PUSCH

chap. 8.9.5, on page 316

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

256

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Standard Test Setups

Chapter in TS
36.141

Test Case

Section in this document with


further information

8.2.4

Performance requirements for High Speed Train


conditions

chap. 8.9.6, on page 318

Performance requirements for PUCCH


8.3.1

ACK missed detection for single user PUCCH format 1a

chap. 8.9.7, on page 322

8.3.2

CQI performance requirements for PUCCH format


2

chap. 8.9.8, on page 324

8.3.3

ACK missed detection for multi user PUCCH format chap. 8.9.9, on page 327
1a
Performance requirements for PRACH

8.4.1

PRACH false alarm probability and missed detection

chap. 8.9.10, on page 332

8.3.1 Generic Structure of the Description of the Implemented Test Cases


The description of the test cases in this document follows a common structure.

Test Case Number and Test Case Name

Short Description and Test Purpose


Some of the definitions are directly taken form the 3GPP test specification.

Prerequisites, required hardware and software options

Test setup

Description of test case specific parameters

8.4 Standard Test Setups


The tests can be performed using the standard test setup according to TS 36.141. Test
setups beside the three standard test setups described below are specified at the individual description of the corresponding test case.

8.4.1 Standard Test Setup - One Path


In case of two-path instruments signal routing to path A is assumed for the graph below.
RF port A outputs the wanted signal (with or without fading and/or interference) and is
connected to the Rx port of the base station. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first eNB frame trigger sent to input TRIGGER 1.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

257

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Standard Test Setups

Fig. 8-1: One Path Standard Test Setup (Example of R&S SMU simulating the test case 7.3 "Dynamic
Range")

For two-path instruments it is also possible to route baseband signal A to RF output B


and connect RF output B to the Rx port of the base station.

8.4.2 Standard Test Setup - Two Paths


For two-paths measurements, the test cases always require option Second RF path (R&S
SMx-B20x), a second option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13) and at least one
option to generate the interfering signal in addition to the basic configuration. The signal
routing is fixed.
The signal generator outputs the reference measurement channel signal, i.e. the wanted
signal at output RF A and the interfering signal(s) at output RF B. After combining the two
(three) signals the sum signal is fed into the base station Rx port. The signal generator
will start signal generation at the first eNB frame trigger sent to input TRIGGER 1.

Fig. 8-2: Two Paths Standard Test Setup (Example of R&S SMU simulating test case 7.8 "Receiver
Intermodulation")

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

258

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Standard Test Setups

1 = Baseband A generates the wanted signal


2 = Baseband B generates the EUTRA/LTE interfering signal
3 = AWGN A generates the CW interfering signal

8.4.3 Test Setup - Diversity Measurements


For diversity measurements, the test cases always require at least option Second RF
path (R&S SMx-B20x) and a second option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13) in
addition to the basic configuration. The signal routing is fixed.
RF output A and RF output B transmit the corrupted reference measurement channel
signal (wanted signal) and are connected to the Rx ports of the base station for diversity
reception. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first eNB frame trigger
sent to input "Trigger 1".

Fig. 8-3: Test Setup for Diversity Measurements (Example of R&S SMU simulating test case 8.2.1
"PUSCH in Multipath Fading Propagation Conditions")

As signal routing takes place at the output of the baseband block, the interference settings
of the two paths are identical for diversity measurements.

8.4.4 Test Setup - Four Rx Antennas


Test setup with four Rx antennas require a second signal generator, equipped with tho
paths (e.g. two R&S SMU). The required options of both signal generators are identical.
The signal routing is fixed.
RF output A and RF output B transmit the corrupted reference measurement channel
signal (wanted signal) and are connected to the Rx ports of the base station for diversity
reception. The signal generator will start signal generation at the first eNB frame trigger
sent to input "Trigger 1".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

259

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


General Considerations

Fig. 8-4: Test Setup for tests with for Rx antennas (Example of 2xR&S SMU simulating test case 8.2.1
"PUSCH in Multipath Fading Propagation Conditions")

As signal routing takes place at the output of the baseband block, the interference settings
of the two paths are identical for diversity measurements.

8.5 General Considerations


This section lists some common topics for all BS RF conformance tests. Considerations,
that are specific to one conformance test part, are described at the corresponding section.
Test Frequencies
EUTRA/LTE is designed to operate in the operating bands defined in table 8-4. The table
shows start and stop frequencies of both uplink and downlink frequency bands according
to 3GPP TS 36.141.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

260

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


General Considerations

Table 8-4: EUTRA/LTE operating bands


EUTRA Operating Band

Uplink (UL) band BS receive UE


transmit

Downlink (DL) operating band BS Duplex


transmit UE receive
Mode

FUL_low to FUL_high

FDL_low to FDL_high

1920 MHz to 1980 MHz

2110 MHz to 2170 MHz

FDD

1850 MHz to 1910 MHz

1930 MHz to 1990 MHz

FDD

1710 MHz to 1785 MHz

1805 MHz to 1880 MHz

FDD

1710 MHz to 1755 MHz

2110 MHz to 2155 MHz

FDD

824 MHz to 849 MHz

869 MHz to 894MHz

FDD

830 MHz to 840 MHz

875 MHz to 885 MHz

FDD

2500 MHz to 2570 MHz

2620 MHz to 2690 MHz

FDD

880 MHz to 915 MHz

925 MHz to 960 MHz

FDD

1749.9 MHz to 1784.9 MHz

1844.9 MHz to 1879.9 MHz

FDD

10

1710 MHz to 1770 MHz

2110 MHz to 2170 MHz

FDD

11

1427.9 MHz to 1447.9 MHz

1475.9 MHz to 1495.9 MHz

FDD

12

699 MHz to 716 MHz

729 MHz to 746 MHz

FDD

13

777 MHz to 787 MHz

746 MHz to 756 MHz

FDD

14

788 MHz to 798 MHz

758 MHz to 768 MHz

FDD

704 MHz to 716 MHz

734 MHz to 746 MHz

FDD

33

1900 MHz to 1920 MHz

1900 MHz to 1920 MHz

TDD

34

2010 MHz to 2025 MHz

2010 MHz to 2025 MHz

TDD

35

1850 MHz to 1910 MHz

1850 MHz to 1910 MHz

TDD

36

1930 MHz to 1990 MHz

1930 MHz to 1990 MHz

TDD

37

1910 MHz to 1930 MHz

1910 MHz to 1930 MHz

TDD

38

2570 MHz to 2620 MHz

2570 MHz to 2620 MHz

TDD

39

1880 MHz to 1920 MHz

1880 MHz to 1920 MHz

TDD

40

2300 MHz to 2400 MHz

2300 MHz to 2400 MHz

TDD

...
17
...

The measurements that have to be performed according to 3GPP TS 36.141 in order to


verify proper operation of systems apply to appropriate frequencies in the bottom, middle
and top of the operating frequency band of the base station (BS). These frequencies are
denoted as RF channels B (bottom), M (middle) and T (top).
Reference Frequency
When building up the measurement setups according to TS 36.141 it might be useful that
all the instruments share a common reference clock. In order to feed in the clock of an

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

261

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


General Considerations

external clock the RF module configuration should be switched to external reference


frequency.

In the external reference mode an external signal with selectable frequency and defined
level must be input at the REF IN connector . This signal is output at the REF OUT
connector. The reference frequency setting is effective for both paths. For very good
reference sources of high spectral purity a wideband setting is provided.
Baseband Clock
The clock source is automatically switched to internal when the test case settings are
activated.
Improvement of signal quality
Improvement of signal quality is possible via several settings:

In the "I/Q Settings" menu the internal baseband gain can be set to improved ACLR
performance (3 dB or 6 dB)

In the "Automatic Level Control Settings" menu the RF output level can be recalibrated with "Search Once" in "Sample&Hold" mode. This is recommended if in CW mode
the signal/intermodulation ratio is to be improved for multi-transmitter measurements.
With setting "Auto", the level control is automatically adapted to the operating conditions, it may cause increased intermodulation, however.

In the "User Correction" menu a list of correction values can be created and subsequently activated. Thus, the frequency response of the test setup can be taken into
account .

In order to compensate cable loss and additionally inserted attenuators, the RF level
can directly be adjusted in the "Level" input field.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

262

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


User Interface

Additional settings in the impairments section of the AWGN block

Virtual Resource Block (VRB) Offset


In the R&S Signal Generator the RBs are allocated by default at the left edge of the
spectrum. However, some test cases do not require allocation of the entire bandwidth or
RB allocation at a specific part of the bandwidth. Adjust the additional parameter "Offset
VRB" to define the position of the RBs.
Example: Offset VRB
"Channel Bandwidth" = 10 MHz, i.e. 50 RBs
"Allocated Resource Blocks" = 25
"Offset VRB" = 10
The RBs are offset by 10 RBs and allocated RBs start at position 11.

Use also the SC-FDMA Timeplan to visualize the RB allocation for the wanted signal
(path A) and the interfering signal (path B).

8.6 User Interface


To access the "Test Case Wizard" dialog, select "Baseband Block > EUTRA/LTE >
Test Case Wizard".
There is only one "Test Case Wizard" in the instrument, i.e. the same dialog can be
accessed via each of the baseband blocks.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

263

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


User Interface

The "Test Case Wizard" dialog comprises three main parts, the "General Settings" area
for selecting the test case and the settings regarding routing, trigger and marker configuration, an area with additional parameters like the configuration of the wanted and interfering signals, AWGN and fading settings and the "Apply Settings" button.
The graph symbolizes the interference scenario defined by power level and frequency
offset.

1
2
3
4

=
=
=
=

Graph
General Settings
Additional parameters
Apply Settings

8.6.1 General Settings


The upper part of the dialog comprises the settings for selecting the test case and configuring the general signal generators parameters.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

264

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


User Interface

Test Case
Selects the test case.
Note: Not all test case are available for all instruments. The enabled test cases depend
on the instrument's hardware (e.g. instrument equipped with one or two paths, etc) and/
or the installed SW options (e.g. Fading Simulator, etc.).
See chapter 8.3, "Supported Test Cases", on page 255 for an overview of the available
test cases.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:TC on page 517
Test Specification Release
Displays the 3GPP test specification release version used as a guide line for the test
cases.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:RELease on page 509
Trigger Configuration
Selects the trigger configuration. The trigger is used to synchronize the signal generator
to the other equipment.
"Armed Auto
(Ext. Trigger 1,
Delay 0)"

The trigger settings are customized for the selected test case. The trigger setting "Armed Auto" with external trigger source "External Trigger
1" is used; the trigger delay is set equal to zero. Thus, the base station
frame timing is able to synchronize the signal generator by a periodic
trigger.

"Unchanged"

The current trigger settings of the signal generator are retained


unchanged.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:TRIGgerconfig on page 511
Marker Configuration
Selects the marker configuration. The marker can be used to synchronize the measuring
equipment to the signal generator.
The marker settings are customized for the selected test case. "Radio
"Radio Frame
Start (Delay 0)" Frame Start" markers are output; the marker delays are set equal to
zero.
"Unchanged"

The current marker settings of the signal generator are retained


unchanged.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:MARKerconfig on page 510
Instrument Setup
(two-path instruments only)
Determines whether one or both paths are used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:INSTsetup on page 510

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

265

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


User Interface

Signal Routing
Selects the signal routing for baseband A signal which in most test cases represents the
wanted signal.
"To Path and
RF Port A"

The baseband signal A is routed to RF output A.

"To Path and


RF Port B"

(two-path instruments only)


The baseband signal A is routed to RF output B.
Tip: Some transmitter tests like test case 7.2 requre separate measurements on both Rx port. Use this feature to route the same baseband
signal to the second RF output and perform the measurements.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:SIGRout on page 511
Number of Rx Antennas
For performance requirement tests, determines the number of the Rx antennas.
Note: Test cases with four antennas require two R&S SMUs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:RXANtennas on page 511
Antenna Subset
Enabled for test setups with four Rx antennas
Determines the signal of which antenna couple, "Antenna 1 and 2" or "Antenna 3 and
4", is generated by the instrument.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:ANTSubset on page 509
Frequency Allocation
Determines the frequency position of the wanted and interfering signal.
Example: Wanted and inerfering signal within the same channel
"Test Case" = 7.4 "In Channel Selectivity"
"Channel Bandwidth" = 1.4 MHz
The parameter "Frequency Allocation" determines the position of the allocated RBs within
the channel. Allocation in the lower or higher frequencies is possible.
"Frequency Allocation of the Interfering signal" = "Frequency Allocation of the Interfering signal" =
At Higher Resource Blocks
At Lower Resource Blocks

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

266

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


User Interface

Example: Interfering signal in the adjacent channel


"Test Case" = 7.5A "Adjacent Channel Selectivity"
"Channel Bandwidth" = 1.4 MHz
The parameter "Frequency Allocation" determines the position of the wanted signal compared to the interfering signal. Allocation in the lower or higher frequencies is possible,
i.e. the position of the allocated bandwidth of the wanted and the intefering signal can be
mirrored.
"Frequency Allocation of the Interfering signal" = "Frequency Allocation of the Interfering signal" =
At Higher Resource Blocks
At Lower Resource Blocks

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:FA:FRALlocation on page 509
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:FA:RBALlocation on page 509

8.6.2 Wanted Signal and Cell Specific Settings


The following settings are available for almost all transmitter and receiver characteristics
and performance requirements tests. Specific parameters are listed together with the
description of the corresponding test case.
For the in-channel test cases 7.4, 8.2.2 and 8.3.3, the cell specific settings apply also for
the interfering signal, respectively for the signal the stationary UE.
RF Frequency
Sets the RF frequency of the wanted signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:RFFRequency on page 521
Duplexing
Selects whether TDD or FDD duplexing mode is used (see also "Duplexing"
on page 79).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:DUPLex on page 518
TDD UL/DL Configuration
For TDD mode, selects the UL/DL Configuration number (see also "UL/DL Configuration" on page 118).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:TDDConfig on page 522

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

267

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


User Interface

Signal Advance N_TA_offset


Sets the parameter NTAoffset (see also "Signal Advance N_TA_offset" on page 247).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:NTAOffset on page 519
Channel Bandwidth
Selects the channel bandwidth (see also chapter 7.12.1, "Physical Settings",
on page 178).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:CHBW on page 518
Cell ID
Sets the Cell ID (see alsochapter 7.12.3, "Cell Specific Settings", on page 181 ).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:CLID on page 518
Cyclic Prefix
Selects normal or extended cyclic prefix.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:CYCPrefix on page 518
UE ID/n_RNTI
Sets the UE ID/n_RNTI.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:UEID on page 522
FRC
Displays the fixed reference channel used. An overview of the FRCs and the cross-reference between the selected Channel Bandwidth and the FRC is given in the individual
description of the test cases.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:FRC on page 519
Offset VRB
Sets the number of RB the allocated RB(s) are shifted with (see also example "Offset
VRB" on page 263).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:OVRB on page 520
Power Level
Displays the Power Level, depending on the selected test case.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:PLevel? on page 520

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

268

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

8.6.3 Apply
Button "Apply Settings" triggers a selective preset of the signal generator prior to presetting the setting according to the selected test case. Further modification of the generator settings is still possible. Signal generation starts with the first trigger event.
Apply Settings
Activates the current settings of the test case wizard.
Note: The settings of the selected test case becomes active only after selecting "Apply
Settings".
Initialization of the signal generator with the test case settings is performed by a partial
selective reset that includes only the baseband, fading and AWGN module and the RF
frequency and RF level settings. Other settings of the signal generator are not altered.
Before triggering the signal generator the user still can change these other settings. This
is particularly useful when compensating for cable loss and additionally inserted attenuators by adjusting the RF power level offset is required.
Signal generation is started at the first trigger received by the generator. The RF output
is not activated /deactivated by the test case wizard. Activate the "RF > State > On" at
the beginning of the measurement.
Note: For safety reasons the RF is not active unless the button "RF ON" has been
selected.
Note: The settings in the dialogs "EUTRA/LTE > Trigger/Marker/Clock", in the "Global
Trigger/Clock Settings" and in the "User Marker / AUX I/O Settings" are not affected by
the selective preset, if the parameter "Trigger/Marker Configuration" is set to
"Unchanged".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:APPLysettings on page 509

8.7 Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)


The transmitter characteristics comprises the maximum output power, output power
dynamics, transmitted signal quality, unwanted emissions and transmitter intermodulations. The "Test Case Wizard" supports the generation of signals in accordance with the
transmitter intermodulations test case. A brief description about the unwanted emission
tests is also provided (see chapter 8.7.2, "Introduction to the Unwanted Emissions
Tests", on page 270).

8.7.1 Prior Considerations


Test Models
For the transmitter characteristic tests EUTRA test models (E-TM) are specified. For an
overview of the test models, see "EUTRA Test Models (E-TM) Downlink" on page 95.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

269

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

Channels
According to the TS 36.141, the channels to test are located in the bottom (B), middle
(M) and the top (T) of the supported frequency range of the base station. See table 8-4
for an overview of the supported frequency operating bands.
Filter Settings
The 3GPP EUTRA/LTE specifications do not define a standardized transmit filter neither
for the UE nor for the base station. Therefore, when a test case is activated, a filter type
EUTRA/LTE with "Best ACP Optimization" is automatically selected.
Test Setup
Transmitter tests require a separate measuring equipment, e.g. the Vector Signal Analyzer R&S FSV.

8.7.2 Introduction to the Unwanted Emissions Tests


The unwanted emissions from the transmitter are divided into two main groups, the outof-band (OOB) emissions and the spurious emissions. The out-of-band emissions are
emissions on frequencies close to the frequency of the wanted signal. Spurious emissions
are emissions caused by unwanted transmitter effects, like harmonics, parasitic emissions, intermodulation products and frequency conversion products.

ACLR
The Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR) is defined as the ratio between
the power transmitted in the channel bandwidth of the wanted signal to the power of
the unwanted emissions transmitted on the adjacent channel.
The corresponding receiver requirement is the Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS),
described in chapter 8.8.7, "Test Case 7.5A: Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS)",
on page 291.
The test specifications defines ACLR requirements for LTE and UTRA receivers. Different settings applies for paired and unpaired spectrum (see table 8-5 and
table 8-6).

Table 8-5: Base Station ACLR in paired spectrum


EUTRA transmitted signal channel
bandwidth
BWChannel, MHz

BS adjacent channel Assumed adjacent


center frequency off- channel carrier
set below the first or (informative)
above the last carrier
center frequency
transmitted

1.4 / 3 / 5 / 10 / 15 / BWChannel
20

Filter on the adjacent


ACLR limit
channel frequency and
corresponding filter
bandwidth

EUTRA of same BW

Square (BWConfig)

2xBWChannel

EUTRA of same BW

Square (BWConfig)

BWChannel/2+ 2.5 MHz

3.84 Mcps UTRA

RRC (3.84 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 7.5 MHz

3.84 Mcps UTRA

RRC (3.84 Mcps)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

44.2 dB

270

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

Table 8-6: Base Station ACLR in unpaired spectrum with synchronized operation
EUTRA transmitted signal channel
bandwidth
BWChannel, MHz

BS adjacent channel Assumed adjacent


center frequency off- channel carrier
set below the first or (informative)
above the last carrier
center frequency
transmitted

Filter on the adjacent


ACLR limit
channel frequency and
corresponding filter
bandwidth

1.4 / 3

BWChannel

EUTRA of same BW

Square (BWConfig)

2xBWChannel

EUTRA of same BW

Square (BWConfig)

BWChannel/2+ 0.8 MHz

1.28 Mcps UTRA

RRC (1.28 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 2.4 MHz

1.28 Mcps UTRA

RRC (1.28 Mcps)

BWChannel

EUTRA of same BW

Square (BWConfig)

2xBWChannel

EUTRA of same BW

Square (BWConfig)

BWChannel/2+ 0.8 MHz

1.28 Mcps UTRA

RRC (1.28 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 2.4 MHz

1.28 Mcps UTRA

RRC (1.28 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 2.5 MHz

3.84 Mcps UTRA

RRC (3.84 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 7.5 MHz

3.84 Mcps UTRA

RRC (3.84 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 5 MHz

7.68 Mcps UTRA

RRC (7.68 Mcps)

BWChannel/2+ 15 MHz

7.68 Mcps UTRA

RRC (7.68 Mcps)

5 / 10 / 15 / 20

44.2 dB

Operating Band Unwanted Emissions


The 3GPP specification introduces the term operating band unwanted emissions
instead of the spectrum mask. The operating band unwanted emissions requirements
are defined from 10 MHz below the lowest frequency of the downlink operating
band up to 10 MHz above the highest frequency of the operating band.

Fig. 8-5: Transmitter tests frequency limits

The operating band unwanted emissions require a 100 kHz measurement bandwidth.

Spurious Emissions
The transmitter spurious emissions limits apply from 9 kHz to 12.5 GHz, excluding
the frequency range defined for the operating band unwanted emissions (see figure 8-5).
Refer to table 8-7 for an overview of the general settings for the measurements.
Additional requirements may apply for co-existence with other systems and/or colocation with other base stations. For detailed requirements, refer to the 3GPP TS
36.141.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

271

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

Table 8-7: Spurious emissions


Frequency range

9kHz - 150kHz

Maximum level

Maximum level

Category A

Category B

Measurement Bandwidth

-13 dBm

-36 dBm

1 kHz

150kHz - 30MHz

10 kHz

30MHz - 1GHz

100 kHz

1GHz - 12.75 GHz

-30 dBm

1 MHz

8.7.3 Test Case 6.7: Transmitter Intermodulation


Test Purpose
The test purpose is to verify the ability of the BS transmitter to restrict the generation of
intermodulation products in its non linear elements caused by presence of the own wanted signal and an interfering signal reaching the transmitter via the antenna [6].
Required Options
See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.
Test Setup
The RF OUT of the signal generator is connected to the analyzer via a circulator and
external attenuator. The Tx signal of the base station is connected to the RF input of the
analyzer via a circulator. The figure 8-6 shows the basic test setup.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

272

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

Fig. 8-6: Test setup for Test case 6.7: Transmitter Intermodulation

Short Description
The transmitter intermodulation test is intended to verify the ability of the BS transmitter
to restrict the generation of intermodulation products in its non linear elements caused
by presence of wanted signal and an interfering signal reaching the transmitter via the
antenna.
The BS transmits signals in accordance with E-TM1.1 at maximum power and with channel bandwidth BWChannel corresponding to the maximum bandwidth supported by the base
station. The interfering signal is an E-TM1.1 signal with 5 MHz channel bandwidth. The
interfering signal power shall be 30 dB lower than the power of the wanted signal at the
frequency offsets of 2.5 MHz, 7.5 MHz and 12.5 MHz.
The transmit intermodulation level shall not exceed the out-of-band emission requirements and transmitter spurious emissions requirements for all third and fifth order intermodulation products which appear in the frequency ranges defined in table 8-5,
table 8-6 and table 8-7. For detailed information about the operating band unwanted
emissions, refer to section 6.6.3.5 in 3GPP TS 36.141 [6].
The test shall be done on three channels (B, M and T).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

273

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

General Workflow for Carrying Out a Test Case 6.7 Measurement


The following describes the general workflow, only the basic steps are listed.
For detailed description about working with the analyzer and the base station, refer to the
corresponding description.
1. Set the base station to the basic state and configure it for the selected test case.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Initialize the base station,


Set the base station to test model E-TM1.1,
Set maximum transmit power,
Set the frequency.

2. Set the signal generator to the basic state


a) Preset the signal generator unless some settings (e.g. in terms of I/Q and RF
blocks) have to be kept.
3. Set the analyzer to the basic state
4. Set the test case wizard
a) Select "Baseband Block > EUTRA/LTE > Test Case Wizard"
b) Select "Test Case 6.7: Transmitter Intermodulation".
The parameters are preset according to TS 36.141
c) Adjust the settings of the wanted signal (RF level and Channel Bandwidth).
d) Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
e) Enter the Interfering Signal parameters.
f) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
5. Set the analyzer to the measurement frequency and perform further necessary settings.
Refer to the description of the analyzer for further information.
6. In the signal generator, switch on the RF output.
7. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse from the base station to the signal generator and to
the analyzer.
The signal generator outputs the test model interfering signal; Measurement procedures are started.
8. Calculate the result
The analyzer calculates the out-of-band emission and the spurious emission.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

274

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

User Interface

Base Station Wanted Signal


The common settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal
and Cell Specific Settings", on page 267.
Output Power Level Base Station Wanted Signal
Sets the output power level of the wanted signal. The power level of the interfering signal
is always 30 dB lower than this level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:OUPLevel on page 520

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

275

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

Interfering Signal
Comprises the settings of the interfering signal.
The interfering signal is an E-TM1.1 signal with 5 MHz channel bandwidth and center
frequency relative to the carrier frequency of the wanted signal.
Offset to Channel Edge Interfering Signal
Defines the offset of the interfering signal center frequency relative to edge of the wanted
channel bandwidth. This parameter determine the carrier frequency of the interfering
signal (see FR Frequency).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:OCEdge on page 513
FR Frequency Interfering Signal
Displays the RF Frequency of the interfering signal, determined by the RF Frequency of
the wanted signal and the selected Offset to Channel Edge.
The RF Frequencyinterfering signal is calculated as follow:
For "Frequency Allocation" set to "Interfering Signal at Higher Frequencies"
"RF Frequencyinterfering signal" = "RF Frequencywanted signal" + Delta
For "Frequency Allocation" set to "Interfering Signal at Lower Frequencies"
"RF Frequencyinterfering signal" = "RF Frequencywanted signal" - Delta
Where for both cases Delta is calculated as follow:
Delta = "BWwanted signal"/2 + Offsetinterfering signal

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

276

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Transmitter Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 6)

Example:
"BWwanted signal" = 1.4 MHz
"RF Frequencywanted signal" = 1 950 MHz
Offsetinterfering signal = 7.5 MHz
Delta = 1.4/2 + 7.5 = 8.2 MHz
For "Frequency Allocation" = "Interfering Signal at Higher Frequencies" the "RF Frequencyinterfering signal" = 1 950 + 8.2 = 1 958.2 GHz

Fig. 8-7: Example: Offset to Channel Edge (Channel Bandwidth = 1.4 MHz)

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:RFFRequency on page 514
Duplexing Interfering Signal
Selects whether TDD or FDD duplexing mode is used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:DUPLex on page 512
Channel Bandwidth Interfering Signal
Displays the channel bandwidth of the interfering signal. The value is fixed to 5 MHz.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:CHBW? on page 512
Test Model Interfering Signal
Displays the test model. The interfering signal is generated according to E-TM1.1 test
model.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:TMODel? on page 515

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

277

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Power Level Interfering Signal


Displays the power level of the interfering signal. The power level is always 30 dB below
the Output Power Level of the wanted signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:PLevel? on page 514

8.8 Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)


Most of the receiver tests can be performed with the signal generator only, i.e. without
additional measurement equipment.
The receiver requirements are divided into the following main categories, intended to

Prove the receiver's ability to receive the wanted signal:


chapter 8.8.4, "Test Case 7.2: Reference Sensitivity Level", on page 283

chapter 8.8.5, "Test Case 7.3: Dynamic range", on page 285

Prove how susceptible the receiver is to different types of interfering signals:


chapter 8.8.6, "Test Case 7.4: In-channel selectivity (ICS)", on page 288

chapter 8.8.7, "Test Case 7.5A: Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS)",


on page 291

chapter 8.8.8, "Test Case 7.5B: Narrow-band blocking", on page 293

chapter 8.8.9, "Test Case 7.6: Blocking", on page 296

chapter 8.8.10, "Test Case 7.8: Receiver intermodulation ", on page 300

The several test cases shell cover a wide range of scenarios with different types of
impairments on the wanted signal, that occur depending on the frequency offset
between the wanted and the interfering signal.

8.8.1 Prior Considerations


Fixed Reference Channels (FRC)
The receiver tests use fixed reference channels (FRC) as defined in 3GPP TS 36.141,
Annex A "Reference Measurement channels".
The following FRCs are defined for the receiver tests:

FRC A1: A1-1 .. A1-5 (QPSK)

FRC A2: A2-1 .. A2-3 (16QAM)

Refer to table 7-9 for an overview of all supported FRC.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

278

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Channels
According to the TS 36.141, the channels to test are located in the bottom (B), middle
(M) and the top (T) of the supported frequency range of the base station. See table 8-4
for an overview of the supported frequency operating bands.
Channel Bandwidth of the LTE Interfering Signal
For all test cases using an interfering LTE signal, the bandwidth of the interfering signal
shall be the same as the wanted signal, but at the most 5 MHz.
Reference Sensitivity Power Level PREFSENS
PREFSENS depends on the channel bandwidth as specified in TS 36.104 [9], subclause
7.2.1. The table 8-8 gives an overview of the resulting power levels for the wanted signal
per test case.
Table 8-8: BS reference sensitivity levels
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Reference sensitivity power level,


PREFSENS, dBm

ACS Test Case

1.4

-106.8

-95.9

-100.8

-103.0

-95.0

-97.0

5 /10 /15 /20

-101.5

-95.5

-95.5

Wanted signal
mean power, dBm

Narrow-band Blocking/Blocking/
Receiver Intermodulation Test Case
Wanted signal mean power, dBm

Power Settings
The "Level Reference" parameter in the "Filter/Clipping/Power Settings" dialog is automatically set to "Frame RMS Power" for FDD Duplexing Mode and to "UL Part of Frame
RMS Power" for TDD Duplexing Mode.
Filter Settings
The 3GPP EUTRA/LTE specifications do not define a standardized transmit filter neither
for the UE nor for the base station. Therefore, when a test case is activated, a filter type
EUTRA/LTE with "Best EVM Optimization" is automatically selected. An exception are
the Test Case 7.5A: Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS) and the Test Case 7.5B: Narrowband blocking wehre a "Best ACP Optimization" filter is applied for shaping the interfering
signal.

8.8.2 General Workflow for Carrying Out a Receiver Test


The following instructions lists the general steps for performing a BS conformance test
with the help of "Test Case Wizard". Specific requirements are described together with
the individual test case.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

279

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

For detailed description about the configuration of the base station, refer to the corresponding description.
1. Connect the R&S SMx/AMU and the DUT according to the corresponding test case
setup.
See also chapter 8.4, "Standard Test Setups", on page 257.
2. Set the base station to the basic state
a) Initialize the base station
b) Set the frequency
c) Set the base station to receive the Fixed Reference Channel (for most receiver
test cases)
3. Preset the signal generator to ensure a defined instrument state.
4. Configure the test case wizard
a)
b)
c)
d)

Select "Baseband Block > EUTRA/LTE > Test Case Wizard".


Choose the desired test case, e.g. "TS 36.141: 7.3 Dynamic Range".
Enter additional required parameters.
Enter the test frequency (e.g. M). It must be the same as the base station has
been set to.
e) Activate the settings with the "Apply Settings" button.
The signal generator is now ready to start signal generation
5. Switch on RF output
6. If required, make additional settings (e.g. in the "I/Q Mod" or "RF" block) or change
test case settings.
7. Start the measurement
a) Send a start trigger impulse from the base station to the signal generator.
The signal generator will start signal generation.
8. Calculate the result
The base station internally calculates the BER, BLER or Pd depending on the test
case. This value is compared to the required value.

8.8.3 Interfering Signal Settings


The following settings are available for almost all receiver tests, requiring an interfering
signal. Specific parameters are listed together with the description of the corresponding
test case.
Interferer Type
(enabled for Blocking and Receiver Intermodulation tests)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

280

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Selects the type of the interfering signal:


For Blocking tests, the interfering signal can be an in-band EUTRA/LTE signal or
out-of-band CW signal.
For Receiver Intermodulation tests, the first interfering signal can be an EUTRA/
LTE signal or narrow-band EUTRA signal.
The second interfering signal is always a CW signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:IFTYpe on page 512
RF Frequency
Display the center frequency of the interfering signal.
The center frequency is calculated as follow:
For "Frequency Allocation" set to "Wanted Signal at Lower Frequencies"
"RF Frequencyinterfering signal" = "RF Frequencywanted signal" + Delta
For "Frequency Allocation" set to "Wanted Signal at Higher Frequencies"
"RF Frequencyinterfering signal" = "RF Frequencywanted signal" - Delta
Where for both cases Delta is calculated as follow:
Delta = "Channel Bandwidthwanted signal"/2 + Offsetinterfering signal
Example:
"Channel Bandwidthwanted signal" = 5 MHz
"RF Frequencywanted signal" = 1 950 MHz
Offsetinterfering signal = 2.5025 MHz (see table 8-12)
Delta = 5/2 + 2.5025 = 5.0025 MHz
For "Frequency Allocation" = "Wanted Signal at Lower Frequencies" the "RF Frequencyinterfering signal" = 1 950 + 5.0025 = 1 955.0025 MHz

Fig. 8-8: Example: Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS), Channel BW = 1.4 MHz

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:RFFRequency on page 514

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

281

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Duplexing
Selects whether TDD or FDD duplexing mode is used.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:DUPLex on page 512
TDD UL/DL Configuration
For TDD mode, selects the UL/DL Configuration number.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:TDDConfig on page 514
Signal Advance N_TA_offset
Sets the parameter NTAoffset (see also "Signal Advance N_TA_offset" on page 247).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:NTAOffset on page 513
Channel Bandwidth
Displays the channel bandwidth of the interfering signal. The interfering signal has the
same bandwidth as the wanted signal, but at the most 5 MHz.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:CHBW? on page 512
Cell ID
Sets the Cell ID for the interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:CLID on page 512
UE ID/n_RNTI
Sets the UE ID/n_RNTI for the interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:UEID on page 515
Number of Resource Blocks
The number of RBs used by the LTE interfering signal is set automatically:
For ACS and In-channel Selectivity measurements, the number of RBs depends
on the selected channel bandwidth for the wanted signal. The bandwidth of the interfering signal is equal to the bandwidth allocated for the wanted signal, but at the most
5 MHz.
For Narrow-band Blocking tests, the interfering signal is a single resource block
LTE signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:NRBlock? on page 513
Offset VRB
(Test Case 7.4 and 7.5 only)
The position of the RBs allocated by the LTE interfering signal is determined automatically, depending on the selected "Channel Bandwidth" and the RBs allocation of the
wanted signal.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

282

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

For in-channel testing, the parameter "Offset VRB" is used to allocate the wanted
and the interfering signal around the center frequency (see also figure 8-9).
For ACS testing, the "Offset VRB" is fixed to 0.
For narrow band blocking testing, the "Offset VRB" is set in the way, that deppending on the "Frequency Allocation" of the interfering signal, the narrow-band LTE
interfering signal is allocated at the most left or the most rigth subcarrier in the allocated channel bandwidth

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:OVRB? on page 513
Frequency Shift m
(Test Case 7.5 only)
By default, the narrow-band LTE interfering signal is allocated at the most left (interfering
signal at higher frequencies)/ most right (interfering signal at lower frequencies) subcarrier in the allocated channel bandwidth. However, the position of the interfering signal
can be set by means of the parameter "Frequency Shift m", i.e. the allocated RB can be
offset to a different center frequency (see figure 8-10).
The parameter Interfering RB Center Frequency displays the center frequency of the
resource block the interfering signal is currently allocated on.
The value range of the parameter depends on the selected "Channel Bandwidth", as
defined in table 8-13.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:FRSHift on page 512
Interfering RB Center Frequency
(for Narrow-band Block tests only)
Displays the center frequency of the single resource block interfering signal (see also
figure 8-10).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:RBCFrequency on page 514
Power Level
The power level of the interfering LTE signal is set automatically depending on the
selected channel bandwidth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:PLevel? on page 514

8.8.4 Test Case 7.2: Reference Sensitivity Level


Test Purpose
To verify that at the BS Reference sensitivity level the throughput requirement shall be
met for a specified reference measurement channel [6].

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

283

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Required Options
See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.
Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.1, "Standard Test Setup - One Path", on page 257
Short Description
The reference sensitivity level measurement is a test case that aims to verify the Noise
Figure of the receivers. The test case uses FRCs with QPSK modulation.
The test shall be done on three channels (B, M and T). The selected "Channel Bandwidth" determines the used FRC and the "Wanted Signal Power Level". For channels
larger than 5 MHz not all RBs are allocated; the position of the allocated RBs within the
selected channel bandwidth can be adjusted by means of the parameter "Offset VRB".
For the parameter in the table 8-9 the throughput measured shall be equal or grater than
95%.
Table 8-9: Reference sensitivity levels
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Reference Measurements Chan- Reference sensitivity power


nel
level PREFSENS, dBm

1.4

FRC A1-1

-106.1

FRC A1-2

-102.3

5 / 10 / 15 / 20

FRC A1-3

-100.8

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

284

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.

8.8.5 Test Case 7.3: Dynamic range


Test Purpose
To verify that at the BS receiver dynamic range, the relative throughput shall fulfil the
specified limit [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMx-K62)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

285

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.1, "Standard Test Setup - One Path", on page 257
Short Description
The dynamic range test case aims to stress the receiver and measure its capability to
demodulate the useful signal even in the presence of a heavy interfering signal inside the
received channel bandwidth. The test case uses FRCs with 16QAM modulation. The
throughout measurements are performed for different level of the wanted and the interfering AWGN signals.
The test shall be done on three channels (B, M and T). The selected "Channel Bandwidth" determines the used FRC and the "Wanted Signal Power Level". For channels
larger than 5 MHz not all RBs are allocated; the position of the allocated RBs within the
selected channel bandwidth can be adjusted by means of the parameter "Offset VRB".
For the parameter in the table 8-9 the throughput shall be equal or grater than 95%.
Table 8-10: Dynamic range
Channel Band- Reference
width, MHz
Measurements
Channel

Wanted signal
Interfering signal mean
mean power, dBm power, dBm / BWConfig

Type of interfering
signal

1.4

FRC A2-1

-76.0

-88.7

AWGN

FRC A2-2

-72.1

-84.7

AWGN

FRC A2-3

-69.9

-82.5

AWGN

10

FRC A2-3

-69.9

-79.5

AWGN

15

FRC A2-3

-69.9

-77.7

AWGN

20

FRC A2-3

-69.9

-76.4

AWGN

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

286

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.
AWGN Configuration
Comprises the settings of the interfering signal.
Power Level AWGN Configuration
Displays the power level of the AWGN signal. The value is set automatically according
to table 8-10 and depending on the selected Channel Bandwidth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:AWGN:PLevel? on page 509

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

287

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

8.8.6 Test Case 7.4: In-channel selectivity (ICS)


Test Purpose
The purpose of this test is to verify the BS receiver ability to suppress the IQ leakage [6].
Required Options
The required options depend on whether the test will be performed with an instrument
equipped with one or two paths.

Instrument equipped with one path, e.g. R&S SMU/SMJ/SMATE/SMBV:


See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Instument equipped with two paths, e.g. R&S SMU/SMATE:


See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Second RF path (R&S SMx-B20x)

Second Option Baseband Generator (R&S SMx-B10)

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13)

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.1, "Standard Test Setup - One Path", on page 257 or chapter 8.4.2,
"Standard Test Setup - Two Paths", on page 258
Short Description
In-channel selectivity (ICS) is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a "weak" wanted
signal at its assigned Resource Block locations in the presence of a "strong" interfering
signal. The interfering signal shall be an EUTRA/LTE signal with the same bandwidth as
the wanted signal, but at the most 5 MHz. The wanted and the interfering signal are
allocated around the center frequency (see figure 8-9); to swap the position of the wanted
and interfering signal, use the parameter "Frequency Allocation".

Fig. 8-9: Example: In-channel selectivity (ICS), Channel BW = 3 MHz, Frequency Allocation = Lower
Frequency

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

288

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The test shall be done on three channels (B, M and T). The selected "Channel Bandwidth" determines the used FRC and the "Wanted Signal Power Level". For channels
larger than 5 MHz not all RBs are allocated.
For the parameter in the table 8-11 the throughput shall be equal or grater than 95%.
Table 8-11: In-channel selectivity
Channel Band- Reference
width, MHz
Measurements
Channel

Wanted signal
Interfering signal
Type of interfering sigmean power, dBm mean power, dBm / nal
BWConfig

1.4

FRC A1-4

-105.5

-87

1.4 MHz EUTRA signal, 3


RBs

FRC A1-5

-100.7

-84

3 MHz EUTRA signal, 6


RBs

FRC A1-2

-98.6

-81

5 MHz EUTRA signal, 10


RBs

10

FRC A1-3

-97.1

-77

10 MHz EUTRA signal,


25 RBs

15

FRC A1-3

-97.1

-77

15 MHz EUTRA signal,


25 RBs*

20

FRC A1-3

-97.1

-77

20 MHz EUTRA signal,


25 RBs*

*)

Wanted and interfering signal are placed adjacently around the carrier frequency

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

289

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The cell specific settings and the settings of the wanted signal are described in .chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell Specific Settings", on page 267
Refer to chapter 8.8.3, "Interfering Signal Settings", on page 280 for description of the
corresponding settings.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

290

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

8.8.7 Test Case 7.5A: Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS)


Test Purpose
To verify the ability of the BS receiver filter to suppress interfering signals in the channels
adjacent to the wanted channel [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Second RF path (R&S SMx-B20x)

Second Option Baseband Generator (R&S SMx-B10)

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13)

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.2, "Standard Test Setup - Two Paths", on page 258
Short Description
The Adjacent Channel Selectivity (ACS) is a test case intended to verifies that a BS
receiver is able to demodulate a "weak" useful signal being superimposed by a "strong"
interfering signal in the adjacent channel.
The wanted signal is a reference measurement channel FRC A1. The interfering signal
shall be an EUTRA/LTE signal with the same bandwidth as the wanted signal, but at the
most 5 MHz and a specified center frequency offset (see figure 8-8). The test shall be
done on three channels (B, M and T).
For the parameter in the table 8-12 the throughput shall be equal or grater than 95%.
Table 8-12: Adjacent channel selectivity
Channel
Bandwidth,
MHz

Wanted signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal mean


power, dBm

Interfering signal cen- Type of interfering


ter frequency offset
signal
from the channel
edge of the wanted
signal, MHz

1.4

PREFSENS + 11dB

-52

0.7025

1.4 MHz EUTRA signal,


3 RBs

PREFSENS + 8dB

-52

1.5075

3 MHz EUTRA signal, 6


RBs

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

2.5025

5 MHz EUTRA signal,


10 RBs

10

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

2.5075

10 MHz EUTRA signal,


25 RBs

15

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

2.5125

15 MHz EUTRA signal,


25 RBs

20

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

2.5025

20 MHz EUTRA signal,


25 RBs

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

291

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

PREFSENS depends on the channel bandwidth as specified in TS 36.104 [9], subclause


7.2.1 (see table 8-8).

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

292

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Refer to chapter 8.8.3, "Interfering Signal Settings", on page 280 for description of the
corresponding settings.

8.8.8 Test Case 7.5B: Narrow-band blocking


Test Purpose
To verify the ability of the BS receiver filter to suppress interfering signals in the channels
adjacent to the wanted channel [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Second RF path (R&S SMx-B20x)

Second Option Baseband Generator (R&S SMx-B10)

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13)

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.2, "Standard Test Setup - Two Paths", on page 258
Short Description
The Narrow-band Blocking is a test case intended to verifies that a BS receiver is able
to demodulate a "weak" useful signal being superimposed by a "strong" narrow-band
interfering signal in the adjacent channel. The wanted signal is a reference measurement
channel FRC A1. The interfering signal is a single resource block EUTRA/LTE signal in
a channel with the same bandwidth as the wanted signal, but at the most 5 MHz. The
interfering signal is located at a specified center frequency offset and adjacently to the
channel edge of the wanted signal (see figure 8-10).

Fig. 8-10: Example: Narrow-band Blocking

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

293

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The test shall be done on three channels (B, M and T).


For the parameter in the table 8-13 the throughput shall be equal or grater than 95%.
Table 8-13: Interfering signal for Narrowband blocking requirement
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Wanted signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
mean power,
dBm

Interfering RB center fre- Type of interquency offset to the


fering signal
channel edge of the wanted signal, kHz

1.4

PREFSENS + 6dB

-49

252.5+m*180,
m=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

247.5+m*180,
m=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 10, 13

5 / 10 / 15 / 20

342.5+m*180,
m=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 14, 19,
24

1.4 MHz
EUTRA signal,
1 RB
3 MHz EUTRA
signal, 1 RB
5 MHz EUTRA
signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS depends on the channel bandwidth as specified in TS 36.104 [9], subclause


7.2.1 (see table 8-8).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

294

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

295

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Refer to chapter 8.8.3, "Interfering Signal Settings", on page 280 for description of the
corresponding settings.

8.8.9 Test Case 7.6: Blocking


Test Purpose
The test stresses the ability of the BS receiver to withstand high-level interference from
unwanted signals at specified frequency offsets without undue degradation of its sensitivity [6].
Required Options
The following options are sufficient for tests with CW interfering signal:

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Second RF path (R&S SMx-B20x)

Additionaly, the following options are necessary for tests with LTE interfering signal:

Second Option Baseband Generator (R&S SMx-B10)

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13)

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

Test Setup
The blocking test using a EUTRA/LTE interfering signal can be performed with one
instrument, see chapter 8.4.2, "Standard Test Setup - Two Paths", on page 258. This
setup can also be used for the CW interfering signal case but only for the CW signals
with up to 3 GHz or 6 GHz carrier, depending on the installed option. For tests with CW
with frequency greater than 6 GHz a second signal generator is necessary, like R&S SMF
for instance.
Short Description
The blocking characteristics is a test case that verifies the ability of the receiver to
demodulate a wanted signal in the presence of a strong interfering signal. The test is split
into two scenarios:

Test of in-band blocking, performed with an LTE interfering signal inside the operating
band (seetable 8-4 ), but not adjacent to the wanted signal.

Test of out-of-band blocking, performed with a CW interfering signal with 1 MHz up


to 12.750 GHz.
There is an additional (optional) blocking requirements for co-location with other base
station.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

296

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Fig. 8-11: Example: Blocking

The test shall be done on one channel (M).


For the parameter in the table 8-14 the throughput shall be equal or grater than 95%.
Table 8-14: Blocking performance requirement
Operating
Band

Center Frequency of Interfering


Signal, MHz

Interfering
Signal mean
power, dBm

Wanted Signal
mean power,
dBm

Type of Interfering Signal

1-7, 9-11,
13-14, 33-40

(FUL_low - 20) to (FUL_high + 20)

-43

PREFSENS + 6dB

EUTRA/LTE*

1 to (FUL_low - 20)

-15

PREFSENS + 6dB

CW

(FUL_low - 20) to (FUL_high + 10)

-43

PREFSENS + 6dB

EUTRA/LTE*

1 to (FUL_low - 20)

-15

PREFSENS + 6dB

CW

(FUL_low - 20) to (FUL_high + 12)

-43

PREFSENS + 6dB

EUTRA/LTE*

1 to (FUL_low - 20)

-15

PREFSENS + 6dB

CW

(FUL_low - 20) to (FUL_high + 18)

-43

PREFSENS + 6dB

EUTRA/LTE*

1 to (FUL_low - 20)

-15

PREFSENS + 6dB

CW

(FUL_high + 20) to 12750


8

(FUL_high + 10) to 12750


12

(FUL_high + 12) to 12750


17

(FUL_high + 18) to 12750


*)

see table 8-15

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

297

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Table 8-15: EUTRA/LTE interfering signals for Blocking performance requirement


Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Interfering signal center freType of interfering signal


quency minimum offset to the
channel edge of the wanted signal, MHz

1.4

2.1

1.4 MHz EUTRA signal

4.5

3 MHz EUTRA signal

5 / 10 / 15 / 20

7.5

5 MHz EUTRA signal

PREFSENS depends on the channel bandwidth as specified in TS 36.104 [9], subclause


7.2.1 (see table 8-8).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

298

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

299

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.
Interfering Signal
The common settings of the interfering signal are described in chapter 8.8.3, "Interfering
Signal Settings", on page 280.
Test Requirement
For CW interfering signal, selects whether the standard out-of-band blocking requirements test is performed or the optional blocking scenario, when the BS is co-located with
another BS in a different operating band.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:TREQuire on page 515

8.8.10 Test Case 7.8: Receiver intermodulation


Test Purpose
The test purpose is to verify the ability of the BS receiver to inhibit the generation of
intermodulation products in its non-linear elements caused by the presence of two highlevel interfering signals at frequencies with a specific relationship to the frequency of the
wanted signal [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMx-K62)

Option Second RF path (R&S SMx-B20x)

Second Option Baseband Generator (R&S SMx-B10)

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMx-B13)

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.2, "Standard Test Setup - Two Paths", on page 258.
Short Description
The receiver intermodulation test is a test scenario with two interfering signals, one CW
and one EUTRA/LTE signal. The center frequency of the interfering signals is selected

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

300

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

so that the third and higher order mixing products falls inside of the band of the wanted
signal. There is also a second narrow-band intermodulation scenarios defined, where the
EUTRA/LTE interfering signal is a narrow-band signal with single resource block allocation and the CW interfering signal is placed very close to the wanted one.
The test shall be done on three channels (B, M and T).
For the parameter in the table 8-16 and table 8-17 the throughput shall be equal or grater
than 95%.
Table 8-16: Intermodulation performance requirement
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Wanted signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
Type of interfering
center frequency
signal
offset from the
channel edge of
the wanted signal,
MHz

1.4

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

2.1

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

4.9

1.4 MHz EUTRA


signal

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

4.5

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

10.5

3 MHz EUTRA signal

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

7.5

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

17.5

5 MHz EUTRA signal

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

7.5

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

17.7

5 MHz EUTRA signal

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

7.5

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

18

5 MHz EUTRA signal

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

7.5

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

18.2

5 MHz EUTRA signal

10

15

20

Table 8-17: Narrow-band intermodulation performance requirement


Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Wanted signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
Type of interfering
center frequency
signal
offset from the
channel edge of
the wanted signal,
kHz

1.4

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

270

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

790

1.4 MHz EUTRA


signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

275

CW

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

301

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Channel Bandwidth, MHz

10

15

20

Wanted signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
mean power, dBm

Interfering signal
Type of interfering
center frequency
signal
offset from the
channel edge of
the wanted signal,
kHz

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

790

3 MHz EUTRA signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

360

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

1060

5 MHz EUTRA signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

415

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

1420

5 MHz EUTRA signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

380

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

1600

5 MHz EUTRA signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

345

CW

PREFSENS + 6dB

-52

1780

5 MHz EUTRA signal, 1 RB

PREFSENS depends on the channel bandwidth as specified in TS 36.104 [9], subclause


7.2.1 (see table 8-8).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

302

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Receiver Characteristics (TS 36.141, Chapter 7)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

303

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.
Refer to chapter 8.8.3, "Interfering Signal Settings", on page 280 for description of the
corresponding settings.

8.9 Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)


The BS RF performance requirements are divided into three main groups:

Performance requirements for PUSCH, see


chapter 8.9.3, "Test Case 8.2.1: PUSCH in multipath fading propagation conditions", on page 308

chapter 8.9.4, "Test Case 8.2.2: UL timing adjustment", on page 311

chapter 8.9.5, "Test Case 8.2.3: HARQ-ACK multiplexed on PUSCH",


on page 316

chapter 8.9.6, "Test Case 8.2.4: High Speed Train conditions", on page 318

Performance requirements for PUCCH


chapter 8.9.7, "Test Case 8.3.1: ACK missed detection for single user PUCCH
format 1a", on page 322

chapter 8.9.8, "Test Case 8.3.2: CQI performance requirements for PUCCH format 2", on page 324

chapter 8.9.9, "Test Case 8.3.3: ACK missed detection for multi user PUCCH
format 1a", on page 327

Performance requirements for PRACH


chapter 8.9.10, "Test Case 8.4.1: PRACH false alarm probability and missed
detection", on page 332

8.9.1 Prior Considerations


Fixed Reference Channels (FRC)
The receiver tests use fixed reference channels (FRC) as defined in 3GPP TS 36.141,
Annex A "Reference Measurement channels".
The following FRCs are defined for the performance tests:

FRC A3: A3-1 .. A3-7 (QPSK)

FRC A4: A4-1 .. A4-8 (16QAM)

FRC A5: A5-1 .. A5-7 (64QAM)

FRC A7: A7-1 .. A7-6 (16QAM for UL timing adjustment)

FRC A8: A8-1 .. A8-6 (QPSK for UL timing adjustment)

Refer to table 7-9 for an overview of all supported FRC.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

304

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Channels
According to the TS 36.141, the channels to test are located in the bottom (B), middle
(M) and the top (T) of the supported frequency range of the base station. See table 8-4
for an overview of the supported frequency operating bands.
Power Settings
The "Level Reference" parameter in the "Filter/Clipping/Power Settings" dialog is automatically set to "UL Part of Frame RMS Power".
Filter Settings
The 3GPP EUTRA/LTE specifications do not define a standardized transmit filter neither
for the UE nor for the base station. Therefore, when a test case is activated, a filter type
EUTRA/LTE with "Best EVM Optimization" is automatically selected.
AWGN Power Level
The performance requirements tests are performed for a given SNR where the AWGN
power level is determined per channel bandwidth and test case according to table 8-18.
Table 8-18: AWGN power level
Channel bandwidth,
MHz

AWGN power level

AWGN power level

PUSCH tests

PUCCH and PRACH tests

1.4

-92.7 dBm / 1.08 MHz

-98.7 dBm / 1.08 MHz

-88.7 dBm / 2.7 MHz

-85.7 dBm / 2.7 MHz

-86.5 dBm / 4.5 MHz

-83.5 dBm / 4.5 MHz

10

-83.5 dBm / 9 MHz

-80.5 dBm / 9 MHz

15

-81.7 dBm / 13.5 MHz

-78.7 dBm / 13.5 MHz

20

-80.4 dBm / 18 MHz

-77.4 dBm / 18 MHz

SNR Correction Factor


The SNR correction factor is applied for FRCs with not fully allocated RBs and is calculated as follow:
SNRCorrectionFactor=10*log10(#Allocated RBs/#Possible RBs), dB
Table 8-19: SNR Correction Factor
Channel #Possible RBs SNRCorrectionFactor, dB
SNRCorrectionFactor, dB
SNRCorrectionFactor, dB
Bandfor FRC A3-1, A4-1, A4-2 PRACH Burst Format 0.. PRACH Burst Forwidth,
and A5-1 with 1 allocated 3
mat 4
MHz
RB
1.4

-7.78

-0.13

-0.15

15

-11.76

-4.11

-4.13

25

-13.98

-6.33

-6.35

10

50

-16.99

-9.34

-9.36

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

305

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Channel #Possible RBs SNRCorrectionFactor, dB


SNRCorrectionFactor, dB
SNRCorrectionFactor, dB
Bandfor FRC A3-1, A4-1, A4-2 PRACH Burst Format 0.. PRACH Burst Forwidth,
and A5-1 with 1 allocated 3
mat 4
MHz
RB
15

75

-18.75

-11.10

-11.13

20

100

-20.00

-12.34

-12.37

The wanted signal power level is calculated according to the following formula:
Power LevelWantedSignal = Power LevelAWGN + SNR + SNRCorrectionFactor
Example: Test Case 8.2.1
"Channel Bandwidth" = 1.4 MHz
"Number of Rx Antennas" = 2
"Cyclic Prefix" = Normal
"Propagation Conditions" = EVA 5Hz
"FRC" = A3-1
"Fraction of maximum throughput" = 30%
According to table 8-21 the SNR = -2.1 dB
According to table 8-19 the SNRCorrectionFactor = -7.78 dB
According to table 8-18 the Power LevelAWGN = -92.7 dBm
Power LevelWantedSignal = Power LevelAWGN + SNR + SNRCorrectionFactor = -92.7 - 2.1 - 7.78
= -102.6 dB
HARQ-Feedback
Some of the performance requirements test cases require a feedback signal from the
base station. The R&S Signal Generator equipped with the option R&S SMx-K69 is able
to perform HARQ retransmissions and/or timing shifts according to the 3GPP specification.
Refer to chapter 6, "Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests", on page 63 for
explanation of the scope of this feature as well as for detailed description of the different
feedback modes.

8.9.2 Realtime Feedback Configuration, AWGN and Propagation Condition


Settings
Realtime Feedback Configuration
Comprises the settings of the realtime feedback message and the feedback line.
Realtime Feedback Mode Realtime Feedback Configuration
Determines the feedback mode.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

306

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

"Binary ACK/
NACK"

The ACK/NACK feedback is implemented as low/high voltage level on


the feedback line connector.
Timing Adjustments Feedback is not supported in this mode.

"Serial"

ACK/NACK Feedback and Timing Adjustments Feedback are implemented by means of a serial protocol (see chapter 6.2.2, "Serial
Mode", on page 65).

"Serial 3x8"

ACK/NACK Feedback and Timing Adjustments Feedback are implemented by means of serial commands, consisting of three serial packets (see chapter 6.2.3, "Serial 3x8 Mode", on page 65).

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:MODE on page 516
Connector Realtime Feedback Configuration
Determines the feedback line connector.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:CONNector on page 516
Additional User Delay Realtime Feedback Configuration
Determines the point in time when the feedback can be sent to the instrument.
For more information see chapter 6.3, "Timing Aspects", on page 68.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:AUSDelay on page 516
Baseband Selector Realtime Feedback Configuration
("Serial" and "Serial 3x8" mode only)
This parameter is required for multiplexing serial commands for different baseband units
to one feedback line. If the selector n is configured in the GUI for a specific baseband
unit, the baseband unit will listen only to serial commands containing the selector n.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:BBSelector on page 516
Serial Rate Realtime Feedback Configuration
(Serial and Serial 3x8 mode only)
Determines the bit rate of the serial transmission. Possible rates are 115.2 kbps, 1.6 Mbps
and 1.92 Mbps.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:SERRate on page 517
ACK Definition Realtime Feedback Configuration
("Binary ACK/NACK" mode only)
Determines whether a high or a low binary level on the feedback line connector represents an ACK.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:ACKDefinition on page 515

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

307

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

AWGN Configuration
Comprises the settings of the AWGN signal.
Power Level AWGN Configuration
Displays the AWGN power level. The value is determined according to table 8-18 by the
selected channel bandwidth.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:AWGN:PLevel? on page 509
Propagation Conditions
Selects a predefined multipath fading propagation conditions. The settings of the fading
simulator are adjusted according to the corresponding channel model as defined in 3GPP
TS 36.141, Annex B.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:PROCondition on page 521

8.9.3 Test Case 8.2.1: PUSCH in multipath fading propagation conditions


Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to achieve throughput under multipath fading
propagation conditions for a given SNR [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

2 Options Fading Simulator and Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B14/-B15)

Option LTE closed loop BS Test (R&S SMU-K69)

For test setups with four Rx antennas, a second generator is required. The required
options are identical.

Test Setup
The test setup for PUSCH tests with two Rx antennas is performed according to chapter 8.4.3, "Test Setup - Diversity Measurements", on page 259.
The test setup with four Rx antennas require two two-paths instruments and is performed
according to chapter 8.4.4, "Test Setup - Four Rx Antennas", on page 259.
Short Description
The performance requirement of PUSCH is determined by a minimum required throughput for a given SNR. The throughput is measured by the base station under test and is

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

308

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

expressed as a fraction of maximum throughput for the FRC's. HARQ re-transmissions


are assumed.
The characteristics of the wanted signal are adjusted according to the pre-defined FRC
and the test parameter given in table 8-20.
Table 8-20: Test parameters for testing PUSCH
Parameter

Value

Maximum number of HARQ transmissions

RV sequence

0, 2, 3, 1, 0, 2, 3, 1

Uplink-downlink allocation for TDD

Configuration 1 (2:2)

The table 8-21 shows an example of the test requirements (channel bandwidth 1.4 MHz).
Similar requirements exist for the different FRCs, channel bandwidths and antenna configurations. Refer to 3GPP TS 36.141 for a detailed description of all test requirements.
Table 8-21: Test requirements for PUSCH, 1.4 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Cyclic
prefix

Propagation
conditions

FRC

Normal

EPA 5Hz

A3-2

EVA 5Hz

Fraction of maxiSNR, dB
mum throughput, % 2 RX antennas

SNR, dB

30

-3.5

-6.0

70

0.7

-2.5

A4-3

70

11.2

7.7

A5-2

70

18.3

15.0

A3-1

30

-2.1

-4.4

70

2.4

-0.7

30

5.0

1.9

70

11.9

8.4

A5-1

70

19.2

16.0

A3-2

30

-3.3

-5.7

70

1.3

-2.1

30

4.6

1.4

70

12.5

8.9

30

-1.6

-4.2

70

3.5

-0.4

30

-1.6

-4.0

70

3.5

0.0

30

5.4

2.2

70

14.1

10.5

A4-1

EVA 70Hz

A4-3

ETU 70Hz

ETU 300Hz

Extended ETU 70Hz

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

A3-1

A3-1

A4-2

4 RX antennas

309

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

310

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Fraction of Max. Throughput


Selects the fraction of maximum throughput.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:FMThroughput on page 518

8.9.4 Test Case 8.2.2: UL timing adjustment


Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to achieve throughput measured for the moving
UE at given SNR under moving propagation conditions [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

Options Fading Simulator, Fading Simulator Extension and MIMO (R&S SMU-B14/B15/-K71/-K74)

Option LTE closed loop BS Test (R&S SMU-K69)

Test Setup

Fig. 8-12: Test Setup for test case 8.2.2 "UL Timing Adjustment"
1 = Baseband A generates the signal of the moving UE
2 = Baseband B generates the signal of the stationary UE

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

311

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Short Description
For the UL timing adjustment test, the signal generator generated the signal of two user
equipments (UEs); path A generates the signal of a moving UE and path B the signal of
the stationary one. The throughput is measured by the base station under test.
The performance requirement of PUSCH is expressed as 70% of maximum throughput
for the FRC measured for the moving UE at given SNR (see table 8-23). HARQ retransmissions is assumed. The transmission of the sounding reference signal SRS is
optional (see "Transmit SRS" on page 315).
Two moving propagation scenarios are defined; test with scenario 2 are optional. For
detailed description of the moving propagation conditions, refer to the Operating Manual
"Fading Simulator"
The characteristics of the wanted signal (transmitted by moving UE) are adjusted according to the pre-defined FRC and the test parameter given in table 8-22.
Table 8-22: Test parameters for testing UL timing adjustment
Parameter

Value

Maximum number of HARQ transmissions

RV sequence

0, 2, 3, 1, 0, 2, 3, 1

Uplink-downlink allocation for TDD

Configuration 1 (2:2)

Subframes in which PUSCH is transmitted

Subframes in which SRS is transmitted


(SRS transmission is optional)

For FDD:
subframe #0, #2, #4, #6, and #8 in radio frames
For TDD:
Subframe #2, #3, #7, #8 in each radio frame
For FDD:
subframe #1 in radio frames
For TDD:
UpPTS in each radio frame

The table 8-23 shows the test requirements. The test is performed with two Rx antennas
and a normal cyclic prefix.
Table 8-23: Test requirements for UL timing adjustment (two Rx antennas and normal cyclic prefix)
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Moving propagation conditions

FRC

SNR, dB

1.4

Scenario 1

A7-1

13.7

Scenario 2

A8-1

-1.6

Scenario 1

A7-2

14.0

Scenario 2

A8-2

-1.2

Scenario 1

A7-3

13.8

Scenario 2

A8-3

-1.3

Scenario 1

A7-4

14.4

Scenario 2

A8-4

-1.5

10

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

312

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Channel Bandwidth, MHz

Moving propagation conditions

FRC

SNR, dB

15

Scenario 1

A7-5

14.6

Scenario 2

A8-5

-1.5

Scenario 1

A7-6

14.5

Scenario 2

A8-6

-1.5

20

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

313

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

314

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The cell specific settings and the settings of the moving UE are described in chapter 8.6.2,
"Wanted Signal and Cell Specific Settings", on page 267.
For description of the propagation conditions settings and the AWGN configuration, refer
to "Propagation Conditions" on page 308 and "AWGN Configuration" on page 308.
UE ID/n_RNTI
Sets the UE ID/n_RNTI.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:MUE:UEID on page 522
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:SUE:UEID on page 522
Transmit SRS
Enables/disables the transmission of the SRS.
The SRS transmission is optional for this test case.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:MUE:TSRS on page 515
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:SUE:TSRS on page 515
Offset VRB
Displays the number of RB the allocated RB(s) are shifted with.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:MUE:OVRB on page 520
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:SUE:OVRB on page 520
Connector Moving UE/Stationary UE
Determines the feedback line connector.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:CONMue on page 516
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:CONSue on page 516
Baseband Selector Moving UE
("Serial" and "Serial 3x8" mode only)

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

315

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

This parameter is required for multiplexing serial commands for different baseband units
to one feedback line. If the selector n is configured in the GUI for a specific baseband
unit, the baseband unit will listen only to serial commands containing the selector n.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:BBSMue on page 516
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:RTF:BBSSue on page 516

8.9.5 Test Case 8.2.3: HARQ-ACK multiplexed on PUSCH


Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to detect HARQ-ACK information multiplexed
on PUSCH under multipath fading propagation conditions for a given SNR [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

2 Options Fading Simulator and Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B14/-B15)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.3, "Test Setup - Diversity Measurements", on page 259 (HARQ feedback
line is not required).
Short Description
The performance requirement of HARQ-ACK multiplexed on PUSCH is determined by
the two parameters: probability of false detection of the ACK and the probability of detection of ACK. The performance is measured by the required SNR at probability of detection
equal to 0.99. The probability of false detection of the ACK shall be 0.01 or less.
The table 8-24 shows the test requirements. The test are performed with two Rx antennas, normal cyclic prefix and propagation condition ETU70.
Table 8-24: Test requirements for HARQ-ACK multiplexed on PUSCH (two Rx antennas, normal cyclic
prefix and propagation condition ETU70)
Channel Bandwidth,
MHz

FRC

Index HARQ Offset

SNR, dB

1.4

A3-1

7.2

A4-3

14.4

A3-1

7.2

A4-4

13.5

A3-1

7.1

A4-5

13.1

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

316

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Channel Bandwidth,
MHz

FRC

Index HARQ Offset

SNR, dB

10

A3-1

7.2

A4-6

12.9

A3-1

7.3

A4-7

12.7

A3-1

7.1

A4-8

12.6

15

20

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

317

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.
For description of the propagation conditions settings and the AWGN configuration, refer
to "Propagation Conditions" on page 308 and "AWGN Configuration" on page 308.

8.9.6 Test Case 8.2.4: High Speed Train conditions


Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to achieve throughput under High Speed Train
conditions for a given SNR [6].
Required Options
The following options are sufficient for tests with one Rx Antenna:

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Option Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

Option Fading Simulator and Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B14/-K71)

Option LTE closed loop BS Test (R&S SMU-K69)

For tests with more than one Rx Antenna, the following options are required additionally:

Second Option Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

Second Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Option Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B15)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.3, "Test Setup - Diversity Measurements", on page 259 and chapter 8.4.1, "Standard Test Setup - One Path", on page 257 (additionally, a feedback line
is required).
Short Description
The performance requirement is determined by a minimum throughput for a given SNR.
The requirement throughput is expressed as 30% and 70% of the maximum throughput
for the FRC (see table 8-25). HARQ retransmission is assumed. The tests are performed
with one or two Rx antennas, normal cyclic prefix and propagation condition HST.
The test is optional.
The characteristics of the wanted signal are adjusted according to the pre-defined FRC
and the test parameter given in table 8-26.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

318

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Table 8-25: Test parameters for High Speed Train conditions


Parameter

Value

Maximum number of HARQ transmissions

RV sequence

0, 2, 3, 1, 0, 2, 3, 1

Uplink-downlink allocation for TDD

Configuration 1 (2:2)

Subframes in which PUSCH is transmitted

For FDD:

subframe #0 and #8 in radio frames for which


SFN mod 4 = 0
subframe #6 in radio frames for which SFN mod
4=1
subframe #4 in radio frames for which SFN mod
4=2
subframe #2 in radio frames for which SFN mod
4=3

For TDD:

Subframes in which PUCCH is transmitted *

Subframe #2 in each radio frames

For FDD:

subframe #5 in radio frames

For TDD:

Subframe #3 in each radio frame

*)

The configuration of PUCCH (format 2) is optional;


The SNR values per antenna shall be set to [-4.5 dB
and -1.5 dB] for Scenario 1 and 3, respectively.
Table 8-26: Test requirements for High Speed Train conditions
Channel Bandwidth, MHz

FRC

Number of RX
antennas

Propagation
conditions

Fraction of
maximum
throughput, %

1.4

A3-2

HST Scenario 3 30
70

A3-3

A3-4

10

A3-5

70

-0.3

HST Scenario 3 30

-1.8

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

1.9

HST Scenario 1 30

-4.2

70

-0.7

HST Scenario 3 30

-2.3
1.6

HST Scenario 1 30

-4.8

70

-1.1

HST Scenario 3 30

-2.4

70
2

2.2
-3.6

70
2

-1.2

HST Scenario 1 30

70
2

SNR, dB

1.5

HST Scenario 1 30

-5.1

70

-1.2

319

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Channel Bandwidth, MHz

FRC

Number of RX
antennas

Propagation
conditions

Fraction of
maximum
throughput, %

15

A3-6

HST Scenario 3 30
70

20

A3-7

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

-2.4
1.5

HST Scenario 1 30

-4.9

70

-1.1

HST Scenario 3 30

-2.4

70
2

SNR, dB

1.5

HST Scenario 1 30

-5.0

70

-1.1

320

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

321

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

For description of the propagation conditions settings and the AWGN configuration, refer
to "Propagation Conditions" on page 308 and "AWGN Configuration" on page 308.
The realtime feedback settings are described in "Realtime Feedback Configuration"
on page 306.
Additionally Configure PUCCH
Enables the optional transmission of PUCCH format 2.
The settings are configured according to table 8-26; the PUCCH Power Level is calculated automatically.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:ACPucch on page 517
Power Level (PUSCH)
Displays the resulting PUSCH power level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:PLPS? on page 521
PUCCH Power Level
(enabled for activated optional transmission of PUCCH format 2)
Displays the resulting PUCCH power level.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:PLPC? on page 520

8.9.7 Test Case 8.3.1: ACK missed detection for single user PUCCH format
1a
Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to detect ACK under multipath fading propagation conditions for a given SNR [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

2 Options Fading Simulator and Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B14/-B15)

For test setups with four Rx antennas, a second generator is required. The required
options are identical.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

322

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Test Setup
The test setup with two Rx antennas is performed according to the standard setup, see
chapter 8.4.3, "Test Setup - Diversity Measurements", on page 259 (HARQ feedback line
is not required).
The test setup with four Rx antennas require two two-paths instruments, see chapter 8.4.4, "Test Setup - Four Rx Antennas", on page 259 (HARQ feedback line is not
required).
Short Description
The performance requirement of single user PUCCH for ACK missed detection is determined by the two parameters: probability of false detection of the ACK and the probability
of detection of ACK. The performance is measured by the required SNR at probability of
detection equal to 0.99. The probability of false detection of the ACK shall be 0.01 or less.
The table 8-27 shows the test requirements for two and four Rx antennas.
Table 8-27: Required SNR for single user PUCCH format 1a demodulation tests
Number
of RX
antennas

Cyclic
Prefix

Propaga- BW=1.4
tion Con- MHz
ditions

BW=3MH BW=5MH BW=10M


z
z
Hz

BW=15M
Hz

BW=20M
Hz

Normal

EPA 5

-1.9

-3.3

-4.2

-4.8

-4.7

-4.5

EVA 5

-3.9

-4.5

-4.5

-4.4

-4.5

-4.5

EVA 70

-4.3

-4.6

-4.6

-4.5

-4.6

-4.5

ETU 300

-4.4

-4.5

-4.3

-4.4

-4.6

-4.6

Extended

ETU 70

-3.6

-3.7

-3.5

-3.7

-3.6

-3.7

Normal

EPA 5

-7.3

-7.8

-8.1

-8.3

-8.3

-8.4

EVA 5

-8.2

-8.5

-8.5

-8.2

-8.3

-8.3

EVA 70

-8.3

-8.4

-8.4

-8.2

-8.4

-8.2

ETU 300

-8.1

-8.3

-8.1

-8.1

-8.3

-8.2

ETU 70

-7.3

-7.5

-7.3

-7.5

-7.4

-7.4

Extended

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

323

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.
For description of the propagation conditions settings and the AWGN configuration, refer
to "Propagation Conditions" on page 308 and "AWGN Configuration" on page 308.

8.9.8 Test Case 8.3.2: CQI performance requirements for PUCCH format 2

Renamed Test Case


In 3GPP TS 36.141 versions prior to version 8.9.0 this test case was called "CQI missed
detection for PUCCH format 2".

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

324

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to detect CQI under multipath fading propagation
conditions for a given SNR [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

2 Options Fading Simulator and Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B14/-B15)

Test Setup
See chapter 8.4.3, "Test Setup - Diversity Measurements", on page 259 (HARQ feedback
line is not required).
Short Description
The performance requirement of PUCCH for CQI is determined by the BLER probability
of detection of CQI. The performance is measured by the required SNR at BLER equal
to 1%.
Table 8-28: Required SNR for PUCCH format 2 demodulation tests
Number
of RX
antennas

Cyclic
Prefix

Propaga- BW=1.4
tion Con- MHz
ditions

BW=3MH BW=5MH BW=10M


z
z
Hz

BW=15M
Hz

BW=20M
Hz

Normal

ETU70

-3.8

-3.8

-3.8

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

-3.3

-3.6

-3.8

325

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal and Cell
Specific Settings", on page 267.
For description of the propagation conditions settings and the AWGN configuration, refer
to "Propagation Conditions" on page 308 and "AWGN Configuration" on page 308.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

326

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

8.9.9 Test Case 8.3.3: ACK missed detection for multi user PUCCH format
1a
Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to detect ACK on the wanted signal at presence
of three interfering signals under multipath fading propagation conditions for a given SNR
[6].
Required Options
Two R&S SMU equipped with:

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)


AWGN options are not required in the second R&S SMU.

Second Option Digital Standard EUTRA/LTE (R&S SMx-K55)

2 Options Fading Simulator, Fading Simulator Extension and MIMO (R&S SMU-B14/B15/-K74)

Test Setup
The test setup requires two two-paths instruments, synchronized via a reference frequency (see figure 8-13). The base station provides its frame trigger signal to the signal
generators (input TRIGGER 1).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

327

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Fig. 8-13: Test Setup for test case 8.3.3 "ACK missed detection for multi user PUCCH format 1a"
1
2
3
4

=
=
=
=

SMU#1: Baseband A generates the wanted UE signal


SMU#1: Baseband B generates the interferer 1 signal
SMU#2: Baseband A generates the interferer 2 signal
SMU#2: Baseband B generates the interferer 3 signal

Short Description
The performance is measured on the wanted signal by the required SNR at probability
of detection equal to or grater than 0.99. The probability of false detection of the ACK
shall be 0.01 or less. The statistics are kept by the base station under test.
Multi user PUCCH test is performed only for 2 Rx antennas, Normal CP and for ETU70
propagation conditions (see table 8-29). ACK/NAK repetitions are disabled for PUCCH
transmission.
Table 8-29: Required SNR for multi user PUCCH demodulation tests
Number
of RX
antennas

Cyclic
Prefix

Normal

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

Propaga- Chan.
tion Con- BW
ditions
1.4MHz

Chan.
BW

Chan.
BW

Chan.
BW

Chan.
BW

Chan.
BW

3MHz

5MHz

10MHz

15MHz

20MHz

ETU70

-3.8

-3.8

-4.0

-4.0

-3.8

-3.5

328

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

In multi user PUCCH test, four signals are configured: one wanted signal and three interferers, which are transmitted via separate fading paths using relative power settings as
defined in table 8-30.
Table 8-30: Test parameters for multi user PUCCH case
Cyclic shift
index

Orthogonal
cover index

RS orthogonal
cover /

Relative
power, dB

Relative timing, ns

ACK/NACK
orthogonal
cover

( =0)

Tested signal

Interferer 1

Interferer 2

-3

Interferer 3

14

Presented resource index mapping for orthogonal cover and cyclic shift indices are for
the first slot of the subframe. All above listed signals are transmitted on the same PUCCH
resources, with different PUCCH channel indices as defined in table 8-30.
In the multi user PUCCH test, the Test Case Wizard also sets the "Number of Cyclic
Shifts" for the mixed format resource block (N_cs^(1)) to 0 and the cyclic shift increment
(Delta_shift^PUCCH) to 2, as specified in TS 36.141.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

329

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The common settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal
and Cell Specific Settings", on page 267.
For description of the propagation conditions settings and the AWGN configuration, refer
to "Propagation Conditions" on page 308 and "AWGN Configuration" on page 308.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

330

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

In the R&S SMx/AMU, the power level of the interferer 3 is used as a reference, i.e. the
power level of the wanted signal and the interferer 1 is 3 dB lower and the power level of
the inerferer 2 is 6 dB lower than the reference.
Generated Signal
Determines which signals are generated by the instrument. The first R&S SMU should
generate the "Wanted Signal, Interfer 1 and AWGN" signal and the second R&S SMU,
the signal of "Interferers 2 and 3".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:GENSignals on page 510
Propagation Conditions
Displays the porpagation conditions of the interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:PRCOndition? on page 521
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS2:PRCOndition? on page 521
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS3:PRCOndition? on page 521
Orthogonal Cover (n_PUCCH)
Displays the used resource index n_PUCCH. The value is set automaticaly according to
the RS orthogonal cover in table 8-30.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:ORTCover? on page 519
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS:ORTCover? on page 519
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS2:ORTCover? on page 519
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS3:ORTCover? on page 519
Interferer Type
Displays the type of the interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS2:IFTYpe? on page 512
RF Frequency
Displays the center frequency of interfering signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS2:RFFRequency? on page 514
Power Level
Displays the power level of the interfering signals.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS2:PLevel? on page 514
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:IS3:PLevel? on page 514

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

331

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

8.9.10 Test Case 8.4.1: PRACH false alarm probability and missed detection
Test Purpose
The test shall verify the receivers ability to detect PRACH preamble under multipath
fading propagation conditions for a given SNR [6].
Required Options

See chapter 8.2, "Basic Configuration", on page 255.

Second Option Baseband Main Module (R&S SMU-B13)

Frequency Options (R&S SMU-B20x: RF 100kHz - x GHz)

2 Options Additive White Gaussian Noise AWGN (R&S SMU-K62)

2 Options Fading Simulator and Fading Simulator Extension (R&S SMU-B14/-B15)

Test Setup
The test setup with two Rx antennas is performed according to the standard setup, see
chapter 8.4.3, "Test Setup - Diversity Measurements", on page 259 (HARQ feedback line
is not required).
The test setup with four Rx antennas require two two-paths instruments, see chapter 8.4.4, "Test Setup - Four Rx Antennas", on page 259 (HARQ feedback line is not
required).
Short Description
The performance is measured by the total probability of false detection of the preamble
(Pfa) and the probability of detection of preamble (Pd). For the SNRs defined in
table 8-31 and table 8-32, the Pd shall be 99% or grater, Pfa shall be 0.1% or less. The
statistics are kept by the base station under test. Ten preambles have to be transmitted.
The normal mode test is applicable to all BS. The high speed mode test is applicable to
high speed BS.
Table 8-31: PRACH missed detection test requirements for Normal Mode; the SNR [dB] is given per
burst format
Number of
RX antennas

PropagaFrequency Burst fortion condi- offset, Hz


mat 0
tions

Burst format 1

Burst format 2

Burst format 3

Burst format 4

AWGN

-13.9

-13.9

-16.1

-16.2

-6.9

ETU 70

270

-7.4

-7.2

-9.4

-9.5

0.5

AWGN

-16.6

-16.4

-18.7

-18.5

-9.5

ETU 70

270

-11.5

-11.1

-13.5

-13.3

-4.5

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

332

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Table 8-32: PRACH missed detection test requirements for High speed Mode; the SNR [dB] is given per
burst format
Number of
Propagation
RX antennas conditions

Frequency
offset, Hz

Burst format Burst format Burst format Burst format


0
1
2
3

AWGN

-13.8

-13.9

-16.0

-16.3

ETU 70

270

-6.8

-6.7

-8.7

-8.9

AWGN

625

-12.1

-12.0

-14.1

-14.1

AWGN

1340

-13.1

-13.2

-15.2

-15.4

AWGN

-16.6

-16.3

-18.6

-18.5

ETU 70

270

-11.2

-10.8

-13.1

-13.1

AWGN

625

-14.6

-14.3

-16.5

-16.5

AWGN

1340

-15.6

-15.2

-17.5

-17.5

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

333

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The common settings of the wanted signal are described in chapter 8.6.2, "Wanted Signal
and Cell Specific Settings", on page 267.
For detailed description of all available PRACH settings and the cross-reference between
them, refer to chapter 7.14.9, "PRACH Configuration", on page 219.
Mode
Determines the measurements type, Pfa or Pd, the signal is generated for.
In "Detection Rate (Pd)" and "Alternating Pd and Pfa" mode, the generated sequence is
repeated cyclically. The first preamble is offset with start offset determined by Timing
Offset Base Value. From preamble to preamble, the timing offset ("Delta t") of the preambles is increased by 0.1 us.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

334

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

The generated signal is a noise like AWGN signal. This mode is inten"False Detection Rate (Pfa)" ded for measurement of the total probability of false detection of the
preamble (Pfa).
"Detection
Rate (Pd)"

The generated signal is a sequence of 10 preamble and noise. The


duration of one single sequence is 5 frames in FDD and 10 frames in
TDD duplexing mode.
This mode is intended for measurement of the probability of detection
of preamble (Pd).

"Alternating Pd
and Pfa"

The generated signal is a sequence of 10 enabled and 10 disabled


preambles; during the latest only noise is transmitted. The duration of
one single sequence is 10 FDD frames and 20 TDD frames.
This mode is intended for measuring both the probability of detection
of preamble (Pd) and the probability of false detection of the preamble
(Pfa) in one run.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:GS:MODE on page 510
Configuration of Special Subframe
(enabled for TDD duplexing mode only)
Sets the Special Subframe Configuration number (see also chapter 3.2.1, "OFDMA
Parameterization", on page 18).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:SPSFrame on page 521
High Speed Mode
Enables a high speed mode (restricted preamble set) or the normal mode (unrestricted
preamble set).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:HSMode on page 519
Frequency Offset
Sets the frequency offset, as defined in table 8-31 and table 8-32.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:FROffset on page 519
Burst Format
Sets the burst format (see also "Preamble Format (Burst Format)" on page 219).
Burst format 4 is enabled only for TDD duplexing mode, special subframe configurations
5 to 8 and disabled high speed mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:BFormat on page 518

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

335

EUTRA/LTE

Test Case Wizard


Performance Requirements (TS 36.141, Chapter 8)

Timing Offset Base Value


The timing offset base value is set to 50% of the Ncs. This value determines the start
timing offset of the first preamble. From preamble to preamble, the timing offset ("Delta
t") of the preambles is increased by 0.1 us and this sequence of timing offsets is restarted
after 10 preambles.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TCW:WS:TIOBase? on page 522

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

336

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands

9 Remote-Control Commands
The following commands are required to perform signal generation with the EUTRA/LTE
options in a remote environment. We assume that the R&S Signal Generator has already
been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R&S Signal Generator
documentation. A knowledge about the remote control operation and the SCPI command
syntax are assumed.
This subsystem contains commands for the primary and general settings of the EUTRA/
LTE standard. These settings concern activation and deactivation of the standard, setting
the transmission direction, filter, clock, trigger and clipping settings, defining the frame
configuration and the sequence length, as well as the preset setting.
The commands for defining the frame configuration for physical layer mode OFDMA and
SC-FDMA are described in the next sections. The commands are divided up in this way
to make the comprehensive SOURce:BB:EUTRa subsystem clearer.
Common Suffixes
The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix

Value range

Description

SOURce<hw>

[1]|2

available baseband signals

[1]
OUTPut<ch>

EXTernal<ch>

1 .. 4

available markers

1 .. 2

R&S SMBV supports two markers

1 .. 2

external trigger connectors

Placeholder <root>
For commands that read out or save files in the default directory, the default directory is
set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. The examples in this description use the place
holder <root> in the syntax of the command.

D:\user\temp\ - for selecting the internal hard disk of Windows instruments

E:\ - for selecting the memory stick which is inserted at the USB interface of Windows
instruments

/var/smbv/user/temp/ - for selecting the internal flash card of Linux instruments

/usb/ - for selecting the memory stick which is inserted at the USB interface of Linux
instruments.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

337

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Primary Commands

Basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described
here.
For a description of such tasks, see the R&S Signal Generator User Manual.
In particular, this includes:

Managing settings and data lists, i.e. storing and loading settings, creating and
accessing data lists, etc.

Information on regular trigger, marker and clock signals as well as filter settings, if
appropriate.

General instrument configuration, e.g. checking the system configuration, configuring


networks and remote operation

Using the common status registers

The following commands specific to the EUTRa standard are described here:

9.1 Primary Commands


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:STATe.................................................................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DUPLexing...........................................................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LINK....................................................................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:PRESet................................................................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:CATalog.................................................................340
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:DEL.......................................................................340
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:LOAD.....................................................................340
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:STORe...................................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:STORe:FAST..........................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:TMOD:TDD.............................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:TMOD:DL...............................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SLENgth..............................................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:WAVeform:CREate...............................................................342
[:SOURce]:BB:EUTRa:VERSion?....................................................................................342

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:STATe <State>
Activates modulation in accordance with the EUTRA/LTE standard. Activating this standard deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modulation modes.
In case of two-path instruments, this affects the same path.
Note: For two path instruments and configured antenna for for path B from inside path
A, enabling the LTE signal simulation will disable all other digital standards and digital
modulation modes even in the path B.
BB:EUTR:STAT ON deactivates the other standards and digital modulation.
Parameters:
<State>

ON | OFF
*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

OFF

338

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Primary Commands

Example:

BB:EUTR:STAT ON
activates modulation in accordance with the EUTRA/LTE standard.

Manual operation:

See "State" on page 75

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DUPLexing <Duplexing>
Selects the duplexing mode. The duplexing mode determines how the uplink and downlink signal are separated.
Parameters:
<Duplexing>

TDD | FDD
TDD
The same frequency is used for both directions of transmission
(uplink and downlink). With one baseband, either only downlink or
only uplink signals can be generated.
FDD
Different frequencies are used for downlink and uplink directions.
*RST:

FDD

Example:

BB:EUTR:DUPL FDD
selects frequency division duplexing.

Manual operation:

See "Duplexing" on page 79

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:LINK <Link>
Defines the transmission direction. The signal either corresponds to that of a base station
(DOWN) or that of a subscriber station (UP).
Parameters:
<Link>

DOWN | UP
*RST:

DOWN

Example:

BB:EUTR:LINK DOWN
the transmission direction selected is base station to subscriber
station. The signal corresponds to that of a base station.

Manual operation:

See "Link Direction" on page 79

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:PRESet
The command produces a standardized default for the EUTRA/LTE standard. The settings correspond to the *RST values specified for the commands.
All EUTRA/LTE settings are preset.
Example:

BB:EUTR:PRES
resets all the EUTRA/LTE settings to default values.

Manual operation:

See "Set to Default" on page 76

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

339

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Primary Commands

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:CATalog <Catalog>
This command reads out the files with EUTRA/LTE settings in the default directory. The
default directory is set using command MMEM:CDIRectory. Only files with the file extension *.eutra will be listed.
Parameters:
<Catalog>

string

Example:

MMEM:CDIR '<root>eutra'
sets the default directory to <root>eutra.
BB:EUTR:SETT:CAT?
reads out all the files with EUTRA/LTE settings in the default
directory.
Response:'eutra1','eutra2'
the files eutra1 and eutra2 are available.

Manual operation:

See "Save/Recall..." on page 76

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:DEL <Filename>
Deletes the selected file with EUTRA/LTE settings. The directory is set using command
MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in the specified
directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file extension
*.eutra will be deleted.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
<file name>
Example:

BB:EUTR:SETT:DEL 'eutra_1'
deletes file eutra_1.

Usage:

Setting only

Manual operation:

See "Save/Recall..." on page 76

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:LOAD <Filename>
Loads the selected file with EUTRA/LTE settings. The directory is set using command
MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in the specified
directory are read. The file extension may be omitted. Only files with the file extension
*.eutra will be loaded.
Parameters:
<Filename>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:SETT:LOAD 'eutra_1'
loads file eutra_1.

Manual operation:

See "Save/Recall..." on page 76

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

340

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Primary Commands

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:STORe <Filename>
Stores the current EUTRA/LTE settings into the selected file. The directory is set using
command MMEM:CDIRectory. A path can also be specified, in which case the files in
the specified directory are read. Only the file name has to be entered. EUTRA/LTE settings are stored as files with the specific file extension *.eutra.
Parameters:
<Filename>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:SETT:STOR 'eutra_1'
stores the current settings into file eutra_1.

Manual operation:

See "Save/Recall..." on page 76

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:STORe:FAST <State>
Determines whether the instrument performs an absolute or a differential storing of the
settings.
Enable this function to accelerate the saving process by saving only the settings with
values different to the default ones.
Note: This function is not affected by the "Preset" function.
Parameters:
<State>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

Manual operation:

ON

See "Save/Recall..." on page 76

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:TMOD:TDD <Tdd>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SETTing:TMOD:DL <Filename>
The command selects an EUTRA test model (E-TM) defined by the standard for the
downlink.
Parameters:
<Filename>

<test_model_name>

Example:

BB:EUTR:SETT:TMOD:DL 'E-TM1_1__20MHz'
selects the test model.

Manual operation:

See "EUTRA Test Models (E-TM) Downlink" on page 95

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SLENgth <SLength>
Sets the sequence length of the signal in number of frames. The signal is calculated in
advance and output in the arbitrary waveform generator. The maximum number of frames
is calculated as follows:
Max. No. of Frames = Arbitrary waveform memory size/(sampling rate x 10 ms).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

341

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Primary Commands

Parameters:
<SLength>

integer
Range:
1 to Max. No. of Frames
Increment: 1
*RST:
1

Example:

BB:EUTR:SLEN 4
selects the generation of 4 frames.

Manual operation:

See "Sequence Length" on page 79

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:WAVeform:CREate <Filename>
This command creates a waveform using the current settings of the "EUTRA/LTE" menu.
The file name is entered with the command. The file is stored with the predefined file
extension *.wv. The file name and the directory it is stored in are user-definable.
Note: Even for enabled Realtime Feedback, the waveform file is generated as if this
functionality is disabled.
Note: The sequence length of the generated ARB file is determined by the selected SFN
restart period ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:SRPeriod).
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Example:

MMEM:CDIR '<root>waveform'
sets the default directory to <root>waveform.
BB:EUTR:WAV:CRE 'eutra_1'
creates the waveform file eutra_1.wv in the default directory.

Usage:

Setting only

Manual operation:

See "Generate Waveform File" on page 78

[:SOURce]:BB:EUTRa:VERSion?
The command queries the version of the 3GPP standard underlying the definitions.
Return values:
<Version>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:VERS?
queries the 3GPP version.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "3GPP Version" on page 78

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

342

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

9.2 Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

9.2.1 Filter Settings


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:TYPE........................................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:MODE.......................................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:ILENgth.....................................................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:ILENgth:AUTO...........................................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:OSAMpling................................................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO......................................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25..................................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:COSine....................................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:COSine:COFS..........................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs....................................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs.....................................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM..............................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:COFFactor........................................347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:COFS...............................................347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:OPTimization.....................................347
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:ROFactor..........................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:PGAuss...................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine.................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase...................................................349
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:USER......................................................349
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SRATe:VARiation.................................................................349

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
Selects the baseband filter type.
Parameters:
<Type>

RCOSine | COSine | GAUSs | LGAuss | CONE | COF705 |


COEQualizer | COFequalizer | C2K3x | RECTangle | PGAuss |
LPASs | DIRac | ENPShape | EWPShape | LTEFilter |
LPASSEVM | SPHase | APCO25 | USER
*RST:

COSine

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:TYPE COS
sets the baseband filter type.

Manual operation:

See "Filter" on page 233

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:MODE <OptMode>
Selects an offline or realtime filter mode.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

343

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Parameters:
<OptMode>

RTime | OFFLine
*RST:

RTime

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:MODE RT
selects real time filter mode.

Manual operation:

See "Filter Mode" on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:ILENgth <ILength>
Note: This command is available for WinIQSIM2 only.
Sets the impulse length (number of filter tabs).
Parameters:
<ILength>

integer
Range:
1 to 128
Increment: 1
*RST:
10

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:ILEN 10
sets the number of filter tabs to 10.

Manual operation:

See "Impulse Length" on page 237

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:ILENgth:AUTO <Auto>
Note: This command is available for WinIQSIM2 only.
Activates/ deactivates the impulse length state. If activated, the most sensible parameter
values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check.
Parameters:
<Auto>

ON | OFF
*RST:

ON

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:ILEN:AUTO ON
the most sensible parameters are selected automatically.

Manual operation:

See "Impulse Length" on page 237

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:OSAMpling <OverSampling>
Note: This command is available for WinIQSIM2 only.
Sets the upsampling factor.
Parameters:
<OverSampling>

integer
Range:
1 to 32
Increment: 1
*RST:
32

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

344

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:OSAM 32
sets the upsampling factor to 32.

Manual operation:

See "Oversampling" on page 237

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:OSAMpling:AUTO <Auto>
Note: This command is available for WinIQSIM2 only.
Activates/ deactivates the upsampling factor state. If activated, the most sensible parameter values are selected. The value depends on the coherence check. If deactivated, the
values can be changed manually.
Parameters:
<Auto>

ON | OFF
*RST:

ON

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:OSAM:AUTO ON
the most sensible parameters are selected automatically.

Manual operation:

See "Oversampling" on page 237

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:APCO25 <Apco25>
Sets the roll-off factor for the APCO25 filter type.
Parameters:
<Apco25>

float
Range:
0.05 to 0.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.20

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:APCO25 0.06
the roll-off factor is set to 0.06.

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:COSine <Cosine>
Sets the roll-off factor for the Cosine filter type.
Parameters:
<Cosine>

float
Range:
0.00 to 0.99
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.10

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:COS 0.4
the roll-off factor is set to 0.4.

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

345

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:COSine:COFS <Cofs>
Sets the "cut of frequency shift" value for the Cosine filter type.
Parameters:
<Cofs>

float
Range:
-1.0 to 1.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-0.20

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:COS:COFS 0.04
the "cut of frequency shift" value is set to 0.04.

Manual operation:

See "Cut Off Frequency Shift" on page 235

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:GAUSs <Gauss>
Sets the BxT for the Gauss filter type (FSK).
Parameters:
<Gauss>

float
Range:
0.15 to 2.5
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.50

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:GAUS 0.5
the BxT is set to 0.5.

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LPASs <LPass>
Sets the cut off frequency factor for the Lowpass (ACP optimization) filter type.
Parameters:
<LPass>

float
Range:
0.05 to 2.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.50

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:LPAS 0.5
the cut of frequency factor is set to 0.5.

Manual operation:

See "Cut Off Frequency Factor" on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LPASSEVM <CutoffFrequency>
Sets the cut off frequency factor for the Lowpass filter (EVM optimization) type.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

346

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Parameters:
<CutoffFrequency>

float
Range:
0.05 to 2.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.5

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:LPASSEVM 0.5
the cut of frequency factor is set to 0.5.

Manual operation:

See "Cut Off Frequency Factor" on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:COFFactor <CutoffFactor>
Sets the cut off frequency factor for the LTE filter type.
Parameters:
<CutoffFactor>

float
Range:
0.05 to 2.00
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.34

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:LTE:COFF 0.35
the cut-off frequency factor is set to 0.35.

Manual operation:

See "Cut Off Frequency Factor" on page 236

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:COFS <CutOffFreqShift>
Sets the "cut of frequency shift" value for the LTE filter type.
Parameters:
<CutOffFreqShift>

float
Range:
-1.0 to 1.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-0.35 (BW 1.25/1.4/2.5MHz); -0.39 (BW 3MHz);
-0.33 (BW 5Mz); -0.34 (BW 10MHz); -0.26 (BW
15MHz); -0.34 (BW 20MHz)

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:LTE:COFS -0.3
the cut-off frequency shift is set to -0.3.

Manual operation:

See "Cut Off Frequency Shift" on page 235

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:OPTimization <Optimization>
Defines the applied EUTRA/LTE filter. Available are EVM, ACP, ACPN (ACP Narrow),
STD (a trade-off between ACP and EVM) and BENU (Best EVM, no upsampling).
Parameters:
<Optimization>

STD | EVM | ACP | ACPN | BENU


*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

EVM

347

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:LTE:OPT ACPN
selects ACP (Narrow) optimization.

Manual operation:

See "Optimization" on page 233

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:LTE:ROFactor <RollOffFactor>
Sets the roll-off factor for the LTE filter type.
Parameters:
<RollOffFactor>

float
Range:
0.00 to 1.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.1

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:LTE:ROF 0.2
the roll-off factor is set to 0.2.

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:PGAuss <PGauss>
Sets the BxT for the Gauss filter type (pure).
Parameters:
<PGauss>

float
Range:
0.15 to 2.50
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.50

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:PGA 0.5
the BxT is set to 0.5.

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:RCOSine <RCosine>
Sets the roll-off factor for the Root Cosine filter type.
Parameters:
<RCosine>

float
Range:
0.0 to 1.0
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0.22

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:RCOS 0.4
the roll-off factor is set to 0.4.

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

348

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:SPHase <SPhase>
Sets the BxT for the Split Phase filter type.
Parameters:
<SPhase>

float
Range:
0.15 to 2.5
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
2.00

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:SPH 2
the BxT is set to 2.0

Manual operation:

See "Roll Off Factor or BxT" on page 234

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:FILTer:PARameter:USER <Filename>
The command selects the user-defined filter (*.vaf).
The directory applicable to the following command is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, only the file name is required, without the path and the file extension.
Parameters:
<Filename>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:FILT:TYPE USER
selects the User filter type.
MMEM:CDIR '<root>Filter_List'
selects the directory for the user-defined filters.
BB:EUTR:FILT:PAR:USER eutra_user_filter
selects the user-defined filter.

Manual operation:

See "Load User Filter" on page 234

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SRATe:VARiation <Variation>
Enters the output sample rate.
A variation of this parameter only affects the ARB clock rate; all other signal parameters
remain unchanged. If the sampling rate in the "General Settings" menu is changed, this
parameter is reset to the chosen sampling rate.
Parameters:
<Variation>

float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:

400Hz to 40MHz
0.001Hz
15.36MHz
Hz

Example:

BB:EUTR:SRAT:VAR 400Hz
sets the output sample rate to 400 Hz.

Manual operation:

See "Sample Rate Variation " on page 236

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

349

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

9.2.2 Clipping Settings


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:LEVel....................................................................350
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:MODE...................................................................350
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:STATe...................................................................351

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:LEVel <Level>
Sets the limit for level clipping. This value indicates at what point the signal is clipped. It
is specified as a percentage, relative to the highest level. 100% indicates that clipping
does not take place.
Level clipping is activated with the command BB:EUTR:CLIP:STAT ON
Parameters:
<Level>

integer
Range:
0PCT to 100PCT
Increment: 1PCT
*RST:
100PCT

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLIP:LEV 80PCT
sets the limit for level clipping to 80% of the maximum level.
BB:EUTR:CLIP:STAT ON
activates level clipping.

Manual operation:

See "Clipping Level" on page 237

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:MODE <Mode>
Sets the method for level clipping.
Parameters:
<Mode>

VECTor | SCALar
VECTor
The reference level is the amplitude | i+jq |.
SCALar
The reference level is the absolute maximum of the I and Q values.
*RST:

VECT

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLIP:MODE SCAL
selects the absolute maximum of all the I and Q values as the
reference level.
BB:EUTR:CLIP:LEV 80PCT
sets the limit for level clipping to 80% of this maximum level.
BB:EUTR:CLIP:STAT ON
activates level clipping.

Manual operation:

See "Clipping Mode" on page 237

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

350

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:STATe <State>
Activates level clipping (Clipping). The value is defined with the command
[SOURce:]BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:LEVel, the mode of calculation with the command
[SOURce:]BB:EUTRa:CLIPping:MODE.
Parameters:
<State>

ON | OFF
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLIP:STAT ON
activates level clipping.

Manual operation:

See "Clipping State" on page 237

9.2.3 Power Settings


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:STATe.........................................................................351
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:TRTime.......................................................................351
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:LEVReference...........................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:ORTLevel..................................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:REFChannel..............................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:REFSubframe?..........................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:RUE?........................................................................353

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the time domain windowing.
Parameters:
<State>

ON | OFF
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:TDW:STAT ON
activates time domain windowing.

Manual operation:

See "State (Time Domain Windowing)" on page 233

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDW:TRTime <TransitionTime>
Sets the transition time when time domain windowing is active.
Parameters:
<TransitionTime>

float
Range:
0.0us to 10.0us
Increment: 0.1us
*RST:
5.0us

Example:

BB:EUTR:TDW:TDT 2us
sets ths transition time to 2us.

Manual operation:

See "Transition Time" on page 233

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

351

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:LEVReference <LevelReference>
Defines the reference the "Level" display in the status bar is referring to.
Parameters:
<LevelReference>

FRMS | DRMS | URMS | UEBurst


FRMS
The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during the whole
frame.
All frames are considered, not only the first one.
DRMS
The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during the DL part of
the frame (all DL subframes and the DwPTS).
All frames are considered, not only the first one.
URMS
The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during the UL part of
the frame (all UL subframes and the UpPTS).
All frames are considered, not only the first one.
UEBurst
The displayed RMS and PEP are measured during a single subframe of a certain UE.
*RST:

FRMS

Example:

BB:EUTR:POWC:LEVR UEB
sets level reference to UE Burst RMS Power

Manual operation:

See "Power Reference" on page 239

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:ORTLevel <OffsRelatLevel>
Sets the power offset of the according baseband relative to the RMS level displayed in
the instrument's global Level display in the header of the instrument.
Parameters:
<OffsRelatLevel>

float
Range:
-20.00dB to 0dB
Increment: 0.001dB
*RST:
0dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:POWC:ORTL -1.0 dB
sets the power offset of the baseband part

Manual operation:

See "Power Offset Relative to Level Display" on page 239

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:REFChannel <RefChannel>
Queries the channel type the measured RMS and PEP is referring to, if the Level Reference is set to "UE Burst RMS Power"

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

352

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Filter/Clipping/Power Settings

Parameters:
<RefChannel>

NF | PUSCH | PUCCH | PRACH | SRS | PUCPUS


*RST:

NF

Example:

BB:EUTR:POWC:LEVR UEB
sets level reference to UE Burst RMS Power
BB:EUTR:POWC:RUE?
queries the channel type

Manual operation:

See "Reference Channel" on page 240

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:REFSubframe?
Queries the subframe the measured RMS and PEP is referring to, if the Level Reference
is set to "UE Burst RMS Power"
Return values:
<RefSubframe>

integer
Range:
0 to 39
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:POWC:LEVR UEB
sets level reference to UE Burst RMS Power
BB:EUTR:POWC:REFS?
queries the reference subframe

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Reference Subframe" on page 240

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:POWC:RUE?
Queries the UE the measured RMS and PEP is referring to, if the Level Reference is set
to "UE Burst RMS Power".
Return values:
<ReferenceUe>

UE1 | UE2 | UE3 | UE4


*RST:

UE1

Example:

BB:EUTR:POWC:LEVR UEB
sets level reference to UE Burst RMS Power
BB:EUTR:POWC:RUE?
queries the reference UE

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Reference UE" on page 240

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

353

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings

9.3 Clock Settings


This section lists the remote control commands, necessary to configure the clock.
The clock settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MODE......................................................................354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:CUSTom..................................................................354
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SOURce...................................................................355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MULTiplier................................................................355
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SYNChronization:EXECute.........................................356
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SYNChronization:MODE............................................356

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MODE <Mode>
Enters the type of externally supplied clock (BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal).
Parameters:
<Mode>

SAMP | MSAMp | CUSTom


SAMPle
The sample clock is supplied via the correspondent clock connector.
MSAMple
A multiple of the clock is supplied and the clock is derived internally
from it.The multiplier is entered with the command
BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MULTiplier.
CUSTom
(not for R&S SMBV)
An external customer specific clock is supplied vie the CLOCK
connector. The sample clock is derived internally from it.
Note: Custom External Clock source in baseband B is only supported if baseband A is configured with EUTRA/LTE too. Furthermore the same settings for clock source and clock mode have to
be set in baseband A and B. The user needs to take care of the
correct settings.
*RST:

SAMP

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLOC:MODE SAMP
selects clock type "SAMPle", i.e. the supplied clock is a sample
clock.

Manual operation:

See "Clock Mode" on page 251

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:CUSTom <Custom>
Specifies the sample clock for clock type Custom (BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MODE CUSTom)
in the case of an external clock source.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

354

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings

Note: Custom External Clock source in baseband B is only supported if baseband A is


configured with EUTRA/LTE too. Furthermore the same settings for clock source and
clock mode have to be set in baseband A and B. The user needs to take care of the
correct settings.
Parameters:
<Custom>

integer
Range:
*RST:

25000 to 40E6
38.4E6

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLOC:SOUR EXT
selects an external clock reference.
BB:EUTR:CLOC:MODE CUSTom
selects clock type Custom.
BB:EUTR:CLOC:CUSTom 38400000
the custom external clock is 38.4MHz.

Manual operation:

See "Custom External Clock" on page 252

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
Selects the clock source.
Parameters:
<Source>

INTernal | EXTernal
INTernal
The internal clock reference is used.
EXTernal
The external clock reference is supplied to the CLOCK connector.
The type of the external clock is specified with command
BB:EURA:CLOCk:MODE
*RST:

INTernal

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLOC:SOUR EXT
selects an external clock reference. The clock is supplied via the
CLOCK connector.
BB:EUTR:CLOC:MODE SAMP
specifies that a sample clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector:

Manual operation:

See "Clock Source" on page 251

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MULTiplier <Multiplier>
Specifies the multiplier for clock type "Multiplied" (BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:MODE MSAMple)
in the case of an external clock source.
Parameters:
<Multiplier>

integer
Range:
1 to 64
Increment: 1
*RST:
4

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

355

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Clock Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:CLOC:SOUR EXT
selects the external clock source.
BB:EUTR:CLOC:MODE MSAM
selects clock type "Multiplied", i.e. the supplied clock has a rate
which is a multiple of the sample rate.
BB:EUTR:CLOC:MULT 12
the multiplier for the external clock rate is 12.

Manual operation:

See "Clock Multiplier" on page 252

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SYNChronization:EXECute
For R&S SMBV only
Performs automatically adjustment of the instrument's settings required for the synchronization mode, set with the command BB:EUTR:SYNC:MODE.
Example:

BB:EUTR:CLOC:SYNC:MODE MAST
the instrument is configured to work as a master one.
BB:EUTR:CLOCK:SYNC:EXEC
all synchronization's settings are adjusted accordingly.

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:CLOCk:SYNChronization:MODE <Mode>
For R&S SMBV only
Selects the synchronization mode.
This parameter is used to enable generation of very precise synchronous signal of several
connected R&S SMBVs.
Note: If several instruments are connected, the connecting cables from the master
instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must
have the same length and type.
Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points.
Parameters:
<Mode>

NONE | MASTer | SLAVe


NONE
The instrument is working in stand-alone mode.
MASTer
The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchronisation (including the trigger signal) and reference clock signal.
SLAVe
The instrument receives the synchronisation and reference clock
signal from another instrument working in a master mode.
*RST:

Example:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

NONE

BB:EUTR:CLOC:SYNC:MODE MAST
the instrument is configured to work as a master one.

356

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Timing Configuration

Manual operation:

See "Sync. Mode" on page 250

9.4 Timing Configuration


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TIMC:NTAoffset <NtaOffset>
For R&S SMU and R&S AMU instruments only
Sets the parameter NTA offset as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.211.
Parameters:
<NtaOffset>

NTA0 | NTA624 | 0
*RST:

NTA0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TIMC:NTA NTA0
sets parameter NTA offset

Manual operation:

See "Signal Advance N_TA_offset" on page 247

9.5 Trigger Settings


The trigger settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.

EXTernal<ch>
The numeric suffix to EXTernal<ch> distinguishes between the external trigger via the
TRIGGER 1 (suffix 1) and TRIGGER 2 (suffix 2) connector.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa[:TRIGger]:SEQuence............................................................358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute........................................................358
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:DELay:UNIT............................................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXECute.................................................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal<ch>:RDELay?..........................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal<ch>:TDELay.............................................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut...............................360
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay.................................................361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit.................................................361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:RDELay?.............................................361
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:TDELay...............................................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:RMODe?................................................................362
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SLENgth.................................................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SLUNit....................................................................363
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SOURce.................................................................364
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:DELay.............................................365
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:INHibit.............................................365

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

357

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa[:TRIGger]:SEQuence <TriggerMode>
Selects the trigger mode.
Parameters:
<TriggerMode>

AUTO | RETRigger | AAUTo | ARETrigger | SINGle


AUTO
The modulation signal is generated continuously.
RETRigger
The modulation signal is generated continuously. A trigger event
(internal or external) causes a restart.
AAUTo
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. After the trigger event the signal is generated continuously. Signal generation is stopped with command
BB:EUTR:TRIG:ARM:EXEC and started again when a trigger
event occurs.
This mode is used for example for Base Station Tests if a frame
marker from the device under test starts the signal output. Subsequent frame markers will not cause a restart of the signal.
ARETrigger
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. The device automatically toggles to RETR mode. Every
subsequent trigger event causes a restart.
Signal generation is stopped with command
BB:EUTR:TRIG:ARM:EXEC and started again when a trigger
event occurs.
SINGle
The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event
occurs. Then the signal is generated once to the length specified
with command BB:EUTR:TRIG:SLEN. Every subsequent trigger
event causes a restart.
*RST:

AUTO

Example:

BB:EUTR:SEQ AAUT
sets the "Armed_auto" trigger mode; the device waits for the first
trigger (e.g. with *TRG) and then generates the signal continuously.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Mode" on page 242

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:ARM:EXECute
Stops signal generation for trigger modes "Armed_Auto" and "Armed_Retrigger". A subsequent internal or external trigger event restarts signal generation.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

358

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR INT
sets internal triggering.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SEQ ARET
sets Armed_Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal
generation to restart.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:EXEC
executes a trigger, signal generation is started.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:ARM:EXEC
signal generation is stopped.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:EXEC
executes a trigger, signal generation is started again.

Usage:

Event

Manual operation:

See "Arm" on page 80

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:DELay:UNIT <DelUnit>
Defines the unit of the external and other baseband trigger delay.
Parameters:
<DelUnit>

SAMPle | TIME
Range:
*RST:

eIdEUtraDelUnitSample to eIdEUtraDelUnitTime
eIdEUtraDelUnitSample

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:DEL:UNIT SAMP
sets the external trigger delay to samples.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Delay Unit" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXECute
Executes a trigger. The internal trigger source must be selected using the command
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR INT and a trigger mode other than AUTO must be selected using
the command BB:EUTR:TRIG:SEQ.
Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR INT
sets internal triggering.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SEQ RETR
sets Retrigger mode, i.e. every trigger event causes signal generation to restart.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:EXEC
executes a trigger.

Usage:

Event

Manual operation:

See "Execute Trigger" on page 80

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal<ch>:RDELay?
Queries the actual external trigger delay (expressed in time unit).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

359

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

Return values:
<ExtResultDelay>

float
Range:
0 to 688
Increment: 250E-12
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:EXT:RDEL?
Response: 5.12E-6 the resulting delay of the external trigger
signal is 5.12 micro seconds.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Actual External Delay" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal<ch>:TDELay <Delay>
Defines the trigger delay (expressed in time units) for external triggering.
Parameters:
<Delay>

float
Range:
0 to 688
Increment: 250E-12
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:EXT:TDEL 5E-6
sets a delay of 5 micro seconds for the trigger.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Delay" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:EXTernal:SYNChronize:OUTPut
<OutputState>
(enabled for Trigger Source External)
Enables/disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event.
For R&S SMBV instruments:
See also section "Sync. Output to External Trigger" on page 244 for a detailed description
of the applications of this setting.
Parameters:
<OutputState>

ON | OFF
ON
The signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger event but because of the instruments processing time the first
samples are cut off and no signal is outputted. After elapsing of
the internal processing time, the output signal is synchronous to
the trigger event.
OFF
The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and
starts with sample 0, i.e. the complete signal is outputted.
*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

ON

360

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets external triggering.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:EXT:SYNC:OUTP ON
enables synchrounous output to external trigger

Manual operation:

See "Sync. Output to External Trigger" on page 244

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:DELay <Delay>
Specifies the trigger delay (expressed as a number of samples) for triggering by the trigger signal from the second path (two-path instruments only).
Parameters:
<Delay>

integer
Range:
0 to 65535
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OBAS:DEL 50
sets a delay of 50 samples for the trigger.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Delay" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:INHibit <Inhibit>
Specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger
event. This command applies only for triggering by the second path.
Parameters:
<Inhibit>

integer
Range:
0 to 2^26-1
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OBAS:INH 200
sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Inhibit" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:RDELay?
Queries the actual trigger delay (expressed in time units) of the trigger signal from the
second path (two-path instruments only).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

361

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

Return values:
<IntOthRDelay>

float
Range:
0 to 688
Increment: 250E-12
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OBAS:RDEL?
Response: 3.2E-6 the resulting delay of the internal trigger signal
is 3.2 micro seconds.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Actual External Delay" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OBASeband:TDELay <IntOthTDelay>
Specifies the trigger delay (expressed in time units) for triggering by the trigger signal
from the second path (two-path instruments only).
Parameters:
<IntOthTDelay>

float
Range:
0 to 688
Increment: 250E-12
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR OBAS
sets for path A the internal trigger executed by the trigger signal
from the second path (path B).
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OBAS:TDEL 1.5E-6
sets a delay of 1.5 micro seconds for the trigger.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Delay" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:RMODe?
The command queries the current status of signal generation for all trigger modes with
EUTRA/LTE modulation on.
Return values:
<RunMode>

RUN | STOP
RUN
the signal is generated. A trigger event occurred in the triggered
mode.
STOP
the signal is not generated. A trigger event did not occur in the
triggered modes, or signal generation was stopped by the command BB:EUTRa:TRIG:ARM:EXECute (armed trigger modes
only).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

362

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets external triggering .
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SEQ ARET
selects the Armed_Retrigger mode.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:RMOD?
queries the current status of signal generation.
Response: RUN
the signal is generated, an external trigger was executed.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Running/Stopped" on page 243

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SLENgth <SequenceLength>
Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the "Single" trigger mode
(BB:EUTRa:TRIG:SEQ SING).
It is possible to output deliberately just part of the frame, an exact sequence of the frame,
or a defined number of repetitions of the frame. The unit is defined with command
BB:EUTRa:TRIG:SLUNit. If the selected unit is changed, the selected sequence length
will be automatically recalculated in the new unit.
Parameters:
<SequenceLength>

integer
Range:
*RST:

1 to 4294967295
1

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SEQ SING
sets the trigger mode Single.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SLUN FRAM
sets the unit Frame length for the entry of the sequence length.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SLEN 200
sets a sequence length of 200 frames. The first 200 samples of
the current frame will be output after the next trigger event.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SLUN SLOT
sets the unit slot length for the entry of the sequence length
BB:EUTR:TRIG:SLEN?
queries the sequence length.
Response: 40

Manual operation:

See "Signal Duration" on page 243

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SLUNit <SeqLenUnit>
Defines the unit for the entry of the length of the signal sequence
(BB:EUTRa:TRIG:SLEN) to be output in the "Single" trigger mode
(BB:EUTRa:TRIG:SEQ SING).

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

363

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Trigger Settings

Parameters:
<SeqLenUnit>

SEQuence | FRAMe | SUBFrame | SLOT | SAMPle


FRAMe
Unit Frame. A single frame is generated after a trigger event.
SEQuence
Unit Sequence Length. A single sequence is generated after a
trigger event.
SUBFrame
Unit Subframe. A single subframe is generated after a trigger
event.
SLOT
Unit Slot. A single slot is generated after a trigger event.
SAMPle
Unit Sample. Number of samples are generated after a trigger
event.
*RST:

Manual operation:

SEQuence

See "Signal Duration Unit" on page 243

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source.
Parameters:
<Source>

INTernal | EXTernal | BEXTernal | OBASeband


INTernal
Triggering is executed by means of the Trigger command
BB:EUTR:TRIGger:EXECute or *TRG in the case of remote
control and by means of "Execute Trigger" in the case of manual
operation.
EXTernal
Triggering is executed by means of the signal on the TRIGGER 1
connector.
BEXTernal
Triggering is executed by means of the signal on the TRIGGER 2
connector.
OBASeband
Triggering is executed by means of the trigger signal from the
second path (two-path instruments only).
*RST:

INTernal

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets external triggering via the TRIGGER 1 connector.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Source" on page 244

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

364

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:DELay <Delay>
Specifies the trigger delay (expressed as a number of samples) for external triggering.
Parameters:
<Delay>

float
Range:
0 to 65535
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR EXT
sets an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:DEL 50
sets a delay of 50 samples for the trigger.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Delay" on page 246

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger[:EXTernal<ch>]:INHibit <Inhibit>
Specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger
event. This command applies only in the case of external triggering.
Parameters:
<Inhibit>

integer
Range:
0 to 2^26-1
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:SOUR EXT
selects an external trigger via the TRIGGER 1 connector
BB:EUTR:TRIG:INH 200
sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event.

Manual operation:

See "Trigger Inhibit" on page 246

9.6 Marker Settings


This section lists the remote control commands, necessary to configure the markers.
The marker delay settings are available for R&S SMx and R&S AMU instruments only.

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed..............................................366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay................................................366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum?...............................366
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum?................................367
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE................................................367
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:FOFFset.............................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ROFFset.............................................369

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

365

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime............................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime..............................................369
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod...............................................369

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed <Fixed>
For R&S SMx/AMUinstruments only.
The command restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range. In this range
the delay can be set without restarting the marker and signal. If a delay is entered in
setting ON but is outside this range, the maximum possible delay is set and an error
message is generated.
Parameters:
<Fixed>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.

Manual operation:

See "Fix marker delay to current range" on page 250

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay <Delay>
Defines the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the signal,
expressed in terms of samples. Command
BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed can be used to restrict the range of values to the dynamic range, i.e. the range within which a delay of the marker signals can
be set without restarting the marker and signal.
Parameters:
<Delay>

integer
Range:
0 samples to 2^24-1 samples
Increment: 1 sample
*RST:
0 samples

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP2:DEL 1600
sets a delay of 1600 samples for the corresponding marker signal.

Manual operation:

See "Marker x Delay" on page 250

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MAXimum?
The command queries the maximum marker delay for setting
BB:EUTRa:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON.
Return values:
<Maximum>

float
Range:
0 to max
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
2000

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

366

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:MAX?
queries the maximum of the dynamic range.
Response: 20000
the maximum for the marker delay setting is 2000 samples.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Current Range without Recalculation" on page 250

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:DELay:MINimum?
The command queries the minimum marker delay for setting
BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut:DELay:FIXed ON.
Return values:
<Minimum>

float
Range:
0 to max
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:FIX ON
restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic
range.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:DEL:MIN?
queries the minimum of the dynamic range.
Response: 0
the minimum for the marker delay setting is 0 samples.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Current Range without Recalculation" on page 250

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:MODE <Mode>
Defines the signal for the selected marker output.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

367

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings

Parameters:
<Mode>

SUBFram | FRAM | RESTart | PERiod | RATio | FAP | INTernal |


| TRIGger
SUBFram
A marker signal is generated at the start of each subframe. The
rise and fall offsets are defined with the commands [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:FOFFset
and [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:
ROFFset.
FAP
The marker signal is high whenever a burst is active and low during
inactive signal parts (such as the gaps between bursts in uplink
mode or the uplink subframe in downlink TDD mode).
This marker can be used to decrease the carrier leakage during
inactive signal parts by feeding it into the pulse modulator.
FRAM
A marker signal is generated at the start of each radio frame. The
rise and fall offsets are defined with the commands [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:FOFFset
and [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:
ROFFset.
RESTart
A marker signal is generated at the start of each ARB sequence.
The rise and fall offsets are defined with the commands [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:FOFFset
and [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:
ROFFset.
PERiod
A marker signal is generated at the beginning of every userdefined period. The period is defined with the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod
on page 369.
RATio
A marker signal corresponding to the Time Off / Time On specifications in the commands [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:
TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime and [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime is generated.
INTernal
Special marker signal for the real time feedback mode (chapter 6,
"Realtime Feedback for Closed Loop BS Tests", on page 63) or
for SFN Restart Period "3GPP (1024 Frames)".
TRIGer
A received internal or external trigger signal is output at the marker
connector.
*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

FRAM

368

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
Marker Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:MODE FRAMe
selects the frame marker for the corresponding marker signal.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:ROFF 20
sets a rise offset of 20 samples for the corresponding marker signal.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:FOFF 2000
sets a fall offset of 2000 samples for the corresponding marker
signal on path A.

Manual operation:

See "Marker Mode" on page 248

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:FOFFset <FallOffset>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ROFFset <RiseOffset>
Sets the rise offset for on/off ratio marker in number of samples.
Parameters:
<RiseOffset>

integer
Range:
-64000 samples to 64000 samples
Increment: 1 sample
*RST:
0 samples

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP2:ROFF 20
sets a rise offset of 20 samples for marker signal 2.

Manual operation:

See "Rise/Fall Offset" on page 249

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:OFFTime <OffTime>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:ONTime <OnTime>
Sets the number of samples in a period (ON time + OFF time) during which the marker
signal in setting BB:EUTR:TRIGger:OUTPut:MODE RATio on the marker outputs is
ON.
Parameters:
<OnTime>

integer
Range:
1 sample to 2^24-1 samples
Increment: 1 sample
*RST:
1 sample

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:MODE RAT
selects the ratio marker for the corresponding marker signal.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:ONT 200
sets an ON time of 200 samples for the corresponding marker
signal.

Manual operation:

See "Marker Mode" on page 248

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TRIGger:OUTPut<ch>:PERiod <Period>
Sets the repetition rate for the signal at the marker outputs, expressed in terms of samples. The setting is only valid for selection "USER" in BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP:MODE.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

369

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Settings

Parameters:
<Period>

unsigned integer
Range:
1 sample to 2^32-1 samples
Increment: 1 sample
*RST:
2 samples

Example:

BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP2:MODE PER
selects the user marker for the corresponding marker signal.
BB:EUTR:TRIG:OUTP2:PER 1600
sets a period of 1600 samples, i.e. the marker signal is repeated
every 1600th sample.

Manual operation:

See "Marker Mode" on page 248

9.7 General EUTRA/LTE Settings


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:SPSConf......................................................................370
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:UDConf........................................................................370

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:SPSConf <SpecSubfrConf>
(enabled for TDD duplexing mode only)
Sets the Special Subframe Configuration number, i.e. together with the parameter [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CPC defines the lengths of the DwPTS, the Guard
Period and the UpPTS.
Parameters:
<SpecSubfrConf>

integer
Range:
0 to 8
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:TDD:SPSC 2
sets the special subframe configuration

Manual operation:

See "Configuration of Special Subframes" on page 118

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:TDD:UDConf <ULDLConf>
(enabled for TDD duplexing mode only)
Sets the Uplink-Downlink Configuration number, i.e. defines which subframe is used for
downlink respectively uplink, and where the special subframes are located.
Parameters:
<ULDLConf>

integer
Range:
0 to 6
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

370

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:TDD:UDC 2
sets the UL/DL configuration

Manual operation:

See "UL/DL Configuration" on page 118

9.8 General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CONF:MODE..................................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:CONFiguration.......................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTenna...............................................................372
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTA....................................................................373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTB....................................................................373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP4:TX<ch>:IMAGinary..................................373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP4:TX<ch>:REAL.........................................373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP6:TX<ch>:IMAGinary..................................373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP6:TX<ch>:REAL.........................................373
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:MAPCoordinates............................................374
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:REFSig:POWer...............................................................374
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:REFSig:EPRE.................................................................374
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:TXANtenna............................................................374
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:PPOWer...............................................................375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:SPOWer...............................................................375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BW.................................................................................375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:NORB.............................................................................375
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SRATe?..........................................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:FFT................................................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:OCCBandwidth?..............................................................376
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:OCCSubcarriers?.............................................................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:LGS?..............................................................................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:RGS?.............................................................................377
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CID.......................................................................378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup..............................................................378
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:PLID.....................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CSETtings:RARNti...........................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CPC...............................................................................379
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:RATBa..................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDCCh:RATBa................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDSCh:PB......................................................................380
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDSCh:RATBa................................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:DURation..............................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:NGParameter........................................................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:BW.......................................................................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:CI.........................................................................382
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:DPRS?..................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:NPRS...................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:POW.....................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:STATe..................................................................383
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:TPRS?..................................................................384

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

371

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CONF:MODE <Scheduling>
Determines whether the configuration and scheduling of the different PDSCH allocations
inside of the DL allocation table is performed manually or according to the configuration
made for the DCIs.
Parameters:
<Scheduling>

MANual | AUTO
MANual
No cross-reference between the settings made for the PDCCH
DCIs and the PDSCHs settings. Configure the PDSCH allocations
manually.
AUTO
Precoding for spatial multiplexing according to 3GPP TS 36.211
and the selected parameters.
*RST:

MANual

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:CONF:MODE AUTO
enables the generation of 3GPP compliant EUTRA/LTE signal and
the PDSCH allocations are configured automatically according to
the configuration of the PDCCH DCIs.

Manual operation:

See "PDSCH Scheduling" on page 118

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:CONFiguration <Configuration>
Sets the global MIMO configuration.
Parameters:
<Configuration>

TX1 | TX2 | TX4 | SIBF


*RST:

TX1

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:CONF TX2
sets the MIMO configuration to 2 TxAntennas.

Manual operation:

See "Global MIMO Configuration" on page 119

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTenna <Antenna>
Queries the simulated antenna.
This command is allowed for simulation mode set to 1 Tx Antenna only.
Parameters:
<Antenna>

ANT1 | ANT2 | ANT3 | ANT4


*RST:

Example:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

ANT1

BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:CONF TX1
sets 1 TxAntenna simulation mode.
BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:ANT?
queries the simulated antenna.
Response: ANT1

372

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Manual operation:

See "Simulated Antenna" on page 120

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTA <AntennaA>
Sets the simulated antenna for path A. The available selections depend on the current
MIMO configuration.
Parameters:
<AntennaA>

ANT1 | ANT2 | ANT3 | ANT4 | NONE | ALL


*RST:

ANT1

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:CONF TX2
sets the MIMO configuration to 2 TxAntennas.
BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:ANTA ANT2
sets the configuration to antenna 2.

Manual operation:

See "Simulated Antenna Path A" on page 120

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:ANTB <AntennaB>
Sets the simulated antenna for path B. The available selections depend on the current
MIMO configuration.
Parameters:
<AntennaB>

NONE | ANT1 | ANT2 | ANT3 | ANT4


*RST:

NONE

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:CONF TX4
sets the MIMO configuration to 2 TxAntennas.
BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:ANTB ANT3
sets the configuration to antenna 3.

Manual operation:

See "Simulated Antenna Path B" on page 120

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP4:TX<ch>:IMAGinary <Imaginary>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP4:TX<ch>:REAL <Real>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP6:TX<ch>:IMAGinary <Imaginary>
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:AP6:TX<ch>:REAL <Real>
These commands define the mapping of the antenna ports (AP4 and AP6) to the physical
antennas.
Parameters:
<Real>

float
Range:
-1.00 to 1.00
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Antenna Port Mapping (General DL Settings)" on page 173

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

373

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MIMO:APM:MAPCoordinates <Type>
Switches between the Cartesian (Real/Imag.) and Cylindrical (Magn./Phase) coordinates
representation.
Parameters:
<Type>

CARTesian | CYLindrical
*RST:

CART

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Antenna Port Mapping (General DL Settings)" on page 173

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:REFSig:POWer <Power>
Sets the reference signal power.
Parameters:
<Power>

float
Range:
-80.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001 dB
*RST:
0.00 dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:REFS:POW -10.00
sets the reference signal power to -10.00dB.

Manual operation:

See "Reference Signal Power" on page 125

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:REFSig:EPRE <RelToLevelDispl>
Queries the RS Power per RE relative to Level Display.
Parameters:
<RelToLevelDispl>

float
Range:
-80.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001 dB
*RST:
0.00 dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:REFS:EPRE?
queries the RS Power per RE relative to Level Display.

Manual operation:

See "RS Power per RE relative to Level Display" on page 125

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:TXANtenna <TxAntenna>
Defines on which antenna port the P-/S-SYNC is transmitted.
The available values depend on the number of configured antennas.
Parameters:
<TxAntenna>

ANT1 | ANT2 | ANT3 | ANT4 | NONE | ALL


*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

ALL

374

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SYNC:TXAN ALL
enables all antenna ports to transmit P-/S-SYNC

Manual operation:

See "P-/S-SYNC Tx Antenna" on page 125

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:PPOWer <PPower>
Sets the power of the primary synchronization signal (P-SYNC).
Parameters:
<PPower>

float
Range:
-80.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001 dB
*RST:
0 dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SYNC:PPOWer -10.00
sets the P-SYNC power to -10.00dB.

Manual operation:

See "P-SYNC Power" on page 125

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SYNC:SPOWer <SPower>
Sets the power of the secondary synchronization signal (S-SYNC).
Parameters:
<SPower>

float
Range:
-80.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001 dB
*RST:
0 dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SYNC:SPOWer -10.00
sets the S-SYNC power to -10.00dB.

Manual operation:

See "S-SYNC Power" on page 125

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BW <Bw>
Sets the DL channel bandwidth.
Parameters:
<Bw>

USER | BW1_40 | BW3_00 | BW5_00 | BW10_00 | BW15_00 |


BW20_00
*RST:

BW10_00

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:BW BW20_00

Manual operation:

See "Channel Bandwidth" on page 116

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:NORB <Norb>
Selects the number of physical resource blocks per slot.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

375

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Parameters:
<Norb>

integer
Range:
6 to 110
Increment: 1
*RST:
50

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:BW USER
sets the bandwidth mode to USER in downlink.
BB:EUTR:DL:NORB 7
sets the number of resource blocks to 7.

Manual operation:

See "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot" on page 116

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SRATe?
Queries the sampling rate. The value for the sampling rate is set automatically according
to the selected number of resource blocks per slot.
Return values:
<SampleRate>

float
Range:
1.92 MHz to 30.72 MHz
Increment: 0.001 MHz
*RST:
15.36 MHz

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SRAT?
queries the automatically set sampling rate.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Sampling Rate" on page 117

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:FFT <Fft>
Sets the FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) size. The available values depend on the
selected number of resource blocks per slot.
Parameters:
<Fft>

integer
Range:
*RST:

128 to 2048
1024

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:FFT?
Queries the automatically set fast Fourier transformation parameter.

Manual operation:

See "FFT Size" on page 117

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:OCCBandwidth?
Queries the of occupied bandwidth. This value is set automatically according to the
selected number of resource blocks per slot.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

376

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Return values:
<OccupBandwidth>

float
Range:
*RST:

1.095 MHz to 19.815 MHz


9.015 MHz

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:OCCB?
queries the automatically set occupied bandwidth in downlink.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Occupied Bandwidth" on page 117

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:OCCSubcarriers?
Queries the occupied subcarriers. The value is set automatically according to the selected
number of physical resource blocks.
Return values:
<OccupSubcarr>

integer
Range:
*RST:

72 to 1321
601

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:OCCS?
queries the number of occupied subcarriers.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number Of Occupied Subcarriers" on page 117

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:LGS?
Queries the number of left guard subcarriers. The value is set automatically according to
the selected number of physical resource blocks.
Return values:
<Lgs>

integer
Range:
*RST:

28 to 364
212

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:LGS?
queries the number of left guard subcarriers.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number Of Left Guard Subcarriers" on page 117

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:RGS?
Queries the number of right guard subcarriers. The value is set automatically according
to the selected channel bandwidth and the number of physical resource blocks.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

377

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Return values:
<Rgs>

integer
Range:
*RST:

27 to 364
211

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:RGS?
queries the number of right guard subcarriers.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number Of Right Guard Subcarriers" on page 117

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CID <CellId>
Sets the cell identity.
There are 504 unique physical layer cell identities (Cell ID), grouped into 168 unique
physical cell identity groups that contain three unique identities each. The Cell ID is calculated as following:
Cell ID = 3*Physical Cell ID Group + Physical Layer ID,
where Physical Cell ID Group is set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:
DL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup and Physical Layer ID with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:PLID respectively.
Parameters:
<CellId>

float
Range:
0 to 503
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PLC:CID 100
sets the Cell ID.

Manual operation:

See "Cell ID" on page 121

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup <CellIdGroup>
Sets the ID of the physical cell identity group.
There are 504 unique physical layer cell identities, grouped into 168 uniquie physical cell
identity groups that contain three unique identities each.
To configure these identities, use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:
PLCi]:PLID.
Parameters:
<CellIdGroup>

integer
Range:
0 to 167
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

378

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PLC:CIDG 100
sets the ID of the physical cell identity group.

Manual operation:

See "Physical Cell ID Group" on page 121

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:PLID <PhysLayId>
Sets the identity of the physical layer within the selected physical cell identity group, set
with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup.
Parameters:
<PhysLayId>

integer
Range:
0 to 2
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PLC:PLID 2
sets the identity of the physical layer.

Manual operation:

See "Physical Layer ID" on page 122

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CSETtings:RARNti <RaRnti>
Sets the random-access response identity RA-RNTI.
The value selected here determines the value of the parameter "UE_ID/n_RNTI" in case
a RA_RNTI "User" is selected.
Parameters:
<RaRnti>

integer
Range:
1 to 60
Increment: 1
*RST:
1

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PLC:CSET:RARN 5
sets the RA-RNTI

Manual operation:

See "RA_RNTI" on page 124

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CPC <CyclicPrefix>
Sets the cyclic prefix length for all subframes.
Parameters:
<CyclicPrefix>

NORMal | EXTended | USER


*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

NORM

379

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:CPC NORM
a normal prefix is used in all subframes in downlink.
BB:EUTR:DL:CPC USER
the cyclic prefix has to be adjusted on subframe basis.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF6:CYCP NORM
a normal prefix is used in subframe 6 in downlink.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:CYCP EXT
an extended prefix is used in subframe 1 in downlink.

Manual operation:

See "Cyclic Prefix (General DL Settings)" on page 122

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:RATBa <RatioPbPa>
Sets the transmit energy ratio among the resource elements allocated for PBCH in the
OFDM symbols containing reference signal (P_B) and such not containing one (P_A).
Parameters:
<RatioPbPa>

float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:

-10.00 to 10.00
0.001
0
dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PBCH:RATB -5.0
sets the transmit energie ratio

Manual operation:

See "PBCH Ratio rho_B/rho_A" on page 123

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDCCh:RATBa <RatioPbBa>
Sets the transmit energy ratio among the resource elements allocated for PDCCH in the
OFDM symbols containing reference signal (P_B) and such not containing one (P_A).
Parameters:
<RatioPbBa>

float
Range:
-10.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0 dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PDCC:RATB -5.0
sets the transmit energie ratio

Manual operation:

See "PDCCH Ratio rho_B/rho_A" on page 123

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDSCh:PB <Pb>
Sets the parameter PDSCH P_B and defines the cell-specific ratio rho_B/rho_A according to 3GPP TS 36.213, Table 5.2-1.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

380

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

Parameters:
<Pb>

integer
Range:
0 to 3
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PDSC:PB 1
sets the parameter PDSCH P_B

Manual operation:

See "PDSCH P_B" on page 122

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PDSCh:RATBa <RatioPbPa>
Sets the transmit energy ratio among the resource elements allocated for PDSCH in the
OFDM symbols containing reference signal (P_B) and such not containing one (P_A).
Parameters:
<RatioPbPa>

float
Range:
-10.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0 dB

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PDSC:RATB -5.0
sets the transmit energie ratio

Manual operation:

See "PDSCH Ratio rho_B/rho_A" on page 122

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:DURation <Duration>
Sets the PHICH duration, i.e. the allocation of the PHICH resource element groups over
the OFDM symbols.
The value selected puts the lower limit of the size of the Control Region for PUCCH (
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PCFich:CREGion) that is
signaled by the PCFICH.
Parameters:
<Duration>

NORMal | EXTended
NORMal
All ressource element groups of PHICH ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:NOGRoups) are allocated on the first OFDM symbol (OFDM Symbol 0).
EXTended
The ressource element groups of PHICH are distributed over three
OFDM symbol (OFDM Symbols 0 .. 2).
*RST:

NORMal

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PHIC:DUR NORM
sets PHICH normal duration

Manual operation:

See "PHICH Duration" on page 123

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

381

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PHICh:NGParameter <NgParameter>
Sets the parameter N_g according to 3GPP TS 36.211, section 6.9 or enables the selection of user-defined value for the parameter "Number of PHICH Groups" (command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PHICh:NOGRoups
on page 436).
Parameters:
<NgParameter>

NG1_6 | NG1_2 | NG1 | NG2 | NGCustom


NG1_6 | NG1_2 | NG1 | NG2
the actual "Number of PHICH Groups" for the different subframes
is calculated according to 3GPP TS 36.211, section 6.9.
NGCustom
enables the selection of user-defined value for the parameter
"Number of PHICH Groups".
*RST:

NG1_6

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PHIC:NGP NG1_2
sets PHICH N_g

Manual operation:

See "PHICH N_g" on page 123

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:BW <PrsBandwidth>
Defines the bandwidth in which the PRS is transmitted.
Parameters:
<PrsBandwidth>

BW1_40 | BW3_00 | BW5_00 | BW10_00 | BW15_00 |


BW20_00
*RST:

BW10_00

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:PRSS:BW BW1_40
Sets the bandwidth in which the PRS is transmitted to 1.4 MHz.

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "PRS Bandwidth" on page 127

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:CI <ConfIdx>
Sets the PRS Configuration Index IPRS as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211, table 6.10.4.3-1.
Parameters:
<ConfIdx>

integer
Range:
0 to 2399
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "PRS Configuration Index" on page 127

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

382

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Downlink Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:DPRS?
Queries the subframe offset of the PRS generation (DeltaPRS) as defined in 3GPP TS
36.211, table 6.10.4.3-1.
Return values:
<DeltaPRS>

integer
Range:
0 to 1279
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Usage:

Query only

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "PRS Subframe offset Delta_PRS" on page 127

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:NPRS <NumberPRS>
Defines the number of consecutive DL subframes in that PRS are transmitted.
Parameters:
<NumberPRS>

integer
Range:
*RST:

1 to 6
1

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Number of PRS DL Subframes (N_PRS)" on page 127

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:POW <PrsPower>
Sets the power of a PRS resource element relative to the power of a common reference
signal resource element.
Parameters:
<PrsPower>

float
Range:
-80.000 to 10.000
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "PRS Power" on page 127

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:STATe <PrsState>
Enables the generation of the PRS.
Parameters:
<PrsState>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

OFF

383

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "PRS State" on page 126

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PRSS:TPRS? <PeriodicityTPRS>
Queries the periodicity of the PRS generation (TPRS) as defined in 3GPP TS 36.211, table
6.10.4.3-1.
Parameters:
<PeriodicityTPRS>

integer
Range:
*RST:

160 to 1280
160

Usage:

Query only

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "PRS Periodicity T_PRS" on page 127

9.9 General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings


[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:BW.................................................................................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:NORB.............................................................................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:SRATe............................................................................385
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:FFT................................................................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:OCCBandwidth?..............................................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:OCCSubcarriers?.............................................................386
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:LGS?..............................................................................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RGS?.............................................................................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CID.......................................................................387
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup..............................................................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:PLID.....................................................................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:CPC...............................................................................388
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:DLCPc............................................................................389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:GRPHopping.......................................................389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SEQHopping.......................................................389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:DSSHift...............................................................389
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:DMRS.................................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:ANSTx........................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:MUPTs........................................................390
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:CSRS..........................................................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:DSFC?........................................................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:SUConfiguration...........................................391
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:TSFC?........................................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:CONFiguration.....................................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:FOFFset..............................................................392
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:RSET..................................................................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:FHMode..............................................................393
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:FHOFfset............................................................393

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

384

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:NOSM.................................................................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:NORB.................................................................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:DESHift...............................................................394
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:DEOFfset............................................................395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1CS..................................................................395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N2RB..................................................................395
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1NMax..............................................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1EMax..............................................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N2Max................................................................396
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N3Max................................................................397

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:BW <BandWidth>
Sets the UL channel bandwidth.
Parameters:
<BandWidth>

USER | BW1_40 | BW3_00 | BW5_00 | BW10_00 | BW15_00 |


BW20_00
*RST:

BW10_00

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:BW BW1_40
selects a uplink frequency band of 1.4 MHz.

Manual operation:

See "Channel Bandwidth (UL)" on page 178

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:NORB <NumResBlocks>
Selects the number of physical resource blocks per slot.
Parameters:
<NumResBlocks>

integer
Range:
6 to 110
Increment: 1
*RST:
50

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:BW USER
sets the bandwidth mode to USER in downlink.
BB:EUTR:UL:NORB 7
sets the number of resource blocks to 7.

Manual operation:

See "Number of Resource Blocks Per Slot (UL)" on page 179

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:SRATe <SampRate>
Queries the sampling rate. The value for the sampling rate is set automatically according
to the selected number of resource blocks per slot.
Parameters:
<SampRate>

float
Range:
1.92 MHz to 30.72 MHz
Increment: 0.001 MHz
*RST:
15.36 MHz

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

385

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:SRAT?
queries the automatically set sampling rate.

Manual operation:

See "Sampling Rate (UL)" on page 180

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:FFT <FftSize>
Sets the FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) size. The available values depend on the
selected number of resource blocks per slot.
Parameters:
<FftSize>

integer
Range:
*RST:

128 to 2048
1024

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:FFT?
queries the automatically set FFT size.

Manual operation:

See "FFT Size (UL)" on page 179

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:OCCBandwidth?
Queries the occupied bandwidth. This value is set automatically according to the selected
number of resource blocks per slot.
Return values:
<OccBandwidth>

float
Range:
1.080 to 19.800
*RST:
9.000
Default unit: MHz

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:OCCB?
queries the automatically set occupied bandwidth in uplink.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Occupied Bandwidth (UL)" on page 180

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:OCCSubcarriers?
Queries the occupied subcarriers. The value is set automatically according to the selected
number of resource blocks per slot.
Return values:
<OccSubcarriers>

integer
Range:
*RST:

72 to 1320
600

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:OCCS?
queries the number of occupied subcarriers.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number Of Occupied Subcarriers (UL)" on page 180

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

386

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:LGS?
Queries the number of left guard subcarriers. The value is set automatically according to
the selected number of resource blocks per slot.
Return values:
<LgSubCarr>

integer
Range:
*RST:

28 to 364
212

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:LGS?
queries the number of left guard subcarriers.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number Of Left Guard Subcarriers (UL)" on page 180

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:RGS?
Queries the number of right guard subcarriers. The value is set automatically according
to the selected number of resource blocks per slot.
Return values:
<RgSubCarr>

integer
Range:
*RST:

28 to 364
212

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:RGS?
queries the number of right guard subcarriers.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number Of Right Guard Subcarriers (UL)" on page 180

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CID <CellId>
Sets the cell identity.
There are 504 unique physical layer cell identities (Cell ID), grouped into 168 unique
physical cell identity groups that contain three unique identities each. The Cell ID is calculated as following:
Cell ID = 3*Physical Cell ID Group + Physical Layer ID,
where Physical Cell ID Group is set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:
UL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup and Physical Layer ID with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:
BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:PLIDrespectively.
Parameters:
<CellId>

integer
Range:
0 to 503
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

387

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PLC:CID 100
sets the Cell ID.

Manual operation:

See "Cell ID (UL)" on page 181

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup <PhysCellIdGroup>
Sets the ID of the physical cell identity group.
Parameters:
<PhysCellIdGroup>

integer
Range:
0 to 167
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PLC:CIDG 100
sets the UL physical cell ID group

Manual operation:

See "Physical Cell ID Group (UL)" on page 181

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:PLID <PhysicalLayerId>
Sets the identity of the physical layer within the selected physical cell identity group, set
with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL[:PLCi]:CIDGroup.
Parameters:
<PhysicalLayerId>

integer
Range:
0 to 2
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PLC:PLID 2
sets the UL physical layer ID

Manual operation:

See "Physical Layer ID (UL)" on page 182

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:CPC <CyclicPrefix>
Sets the cyclic prefix length for all subframes.
Parameters:
<CyclicPrefix>

NORMal | EXTended | USER


*RST:

NORM

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:CPC NORM
a normal prefix is used in all subframes in uplink.

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:CPC USER
the cyclic prefix has to be adjusted on subframe basis.
BB:EUTR:UL:SUBF6:CYCP NORM
a normal prefix is used in subframe 6 in uplink.
BB:EUTR:UL:SUBF1:CYCP EXT
an extended prefix is used in subframe 1 in uplink.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

388

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Manual operation:

See "Cyclic Prefix (General UL Settings)" on page 182

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:DLCPc <GSCpcOppDir>
In TDD mode, determines the cyclic prefix for the appropriate opposite direction.
Parameters:
<GSCpcOppDir>

NORMal | EXTended
*RST:

NORM

Example:

:SOURce1:BB:EUTRa:DUPLexing TDD
:SOURce1:BB:EUTRa:UL:DLCPc EXTended

Manual operation:

See "DL Cyclic Prefix" on page 182

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:GRPHopping <GroupHopping>
Enables/disables group hopping for the uplink reference signals demodulation reference
signal (DRS) and sounding reference signal (SRS).
Parameters:
<GroupHopping>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:GRPH ON
enables group hopping

Manual operation:

See "Group Hopping" on page 182

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SEQHopping <SequenceHopping>
Enables/disables sequence hopping for the uplink reference signals demodulation reference signal (DRS) and sounding reference signal (SRS).
Parameters:
<SequenceHopping> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SEQH ON
enables sequence hopping

Manual operation:

See "Sequence Hopping" on page 182

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:DSSHift <DeltaSeqShift>
Sets the delta sequence shift for PUSCH needed for the calculation of the group hopping
pattern.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

389

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Parameters:
<DeltaSeqShift>

integer
Range:
0 to 29
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:DSSH 3
sets the delta sequence shift for PUSCH

Manual operation:

See "Delta Sequence Shift for PUSCH" on page 183

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:DMRS <DrsDmrs>
Sets the part of the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) index which is broadcasted
and therefore valid for the whole cell. This index applies when multiple shifts within a cell
are used and is used by the calculation of the DMRS sequence.
Parameters:
<DrsDmrs>

integer
Range:
0 to 11
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:DMRS 4
sets the demodulation reference signal index to 4

Manual operation:

See "n(1)_DMRS" on page 183

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:ANSTx <AnSrsSimTxState>
Enables/disables simultaneous transmission of SRS (sounding reference signal) and
ACK/NACK messages, i.e. transmission of SRS and PUCCH in the same subframe.
Parameters:
<AnSrsSimTxState> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:ANST ON

Manual operation:

See "A/N + SRS simultaneous Tx" on page 188

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:MUPTs <MaxUpPts>
Enables/disables the cell specific parameter srsMaxUpPts.
If enabled, a SRS transmission in the UpPTS field (TDD) is made only in the frequency
area that does not overlap with the frequency resources reserved for a possible PRACH
preamble format 4 transmission.
This is done by reconfiguring the number of SRS resource blocks in the special subframes, which would otherwise be determined by C_SRS and B_SRS.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

390

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Parameters:
<MaxUpPts>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:MUPT ON
enables the parameter srsMaxUpPts

Manual operation:

See "SRS MaxUpPTS" on page 189

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:CSRS <Csrs>
Sets the cell specific parameter SRS Bandwidth Configuration (CSRS).
Parameters:
<Csrs>

integer
Range:
0 to 7
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:CSRS 4
sets the SRS bandwidth configuration

Manual operation:

See "SRS Bandwidth Configuration C_SRS" on page 188

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:DSFC?
Queries the value for the cell specific parameter transmission offset DeltaSFC in subframes, depending on the selected SRS Subframe Configuration ([:SOURce<hw>]:
BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:CSRS)and the Duplexing mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
EUTRa:DUPLexing).
Return values:
<DeltSFC>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:SUC 4
sets the SRS configuration
BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:DSFC?
queries the Delta_SFC parameter

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Transmission Offset Delta_SFC" on page 188

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:SUConfiguration <SubFrameConfig>
Sets the cell specific parameter SRS subframe configuration.
Parameters:
<SubFrameConfig>

integer
Range:
0 to 15
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

391

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:SUC 4
sets the SRS configuration

Manual operation:

See "SRS Subframe Configuration" on page 188

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:TSFC?
Queries the value for the cell specific parameter configuration period TSFC in subframes,
depending on the selected SRS Subframe Configuration ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
EUTRa:UL:REFSig:SRS:CSRS)and the Duplexing mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:BB:
EUTRa:DUPLexing).
Return values:
<Tsfc>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:SUC 4
sets the SRS configuration
BB:EUTR:UL:REFS:SRS:TSFC?
queries the T_SFC parameter

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Configuration Period T_SFC" on page 188

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:CONFiguration <Configuration>
Sets the PRACH configuration number as defined in the 3GPP TS 36.211, i.e. defines
the time and frequency resources in which random access preamble transmission is
allowed.
Parameters:
<Configuration>

integer
Range:
0 to 63
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PRAC:CONF 10
sets the PRACH configuration

Manual operation:

See "PRACH Configuration" on page 183

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:FOFFset <FrequencyOffset>
For preamble formats 0-3, sets the prach-FrequencyOffset nRAPRBoffset as defined in the
3GPP TS 36.211, i.e. determines the first physical resource block available for PRACH
expressed as a physical resource block number that fulfills the equation:
0 <= nRAPRBoffset <= Number of UL Resource Blocks - 6

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

392

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Parameters:
<FrequencyOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to 104
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PRAC:FOFF 2
sets the frequency offset

Manual operation:

See "PRACH Frequency Offset" on page 183

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PRACh:RSET <RestrictedSet>
Enables/disables using of a restricted preamble set.
Parameters:
<RestrictedSet>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

ON

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PRAC:RSET ON
enables using of restricted set

Manual operation:

See "Restricted Set (High Speed Mode)" on page 185

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:FHMode <FreqHoppingMode>
Sets the frequency hopping mode for PUSCH.
Frequency hopping is applied according to 3GPP TS36.213.
Parameters:
<FreqHoppingMode> INTRa | INTer
INTer
An inter subframe hopping is performed.
INTRa
Both intra- and inter-subframe subframe hopping are performed.
*RST:

INTRa

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUSC:FHM INT
selects inter subframe hopping mode

Manual operation:

See "Frequency Hopping Mode" on page 185

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:FHOFfset <FHoppOffset>
Sets the PUSCH Hopping Offset NRBHO.
The PUSCH Hopping Offset determines the first physical resource block and the maximum number of physical resource blocks available for PUSCH transmission if PUSCH
frequency hopping is used.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

393

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Parameters:
<FHoppOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to max
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUSC:FHOF 2
set the PUSCH hopping offset

Manual operation:

See "PUSCH Hopping Offset" on page 185

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUSCh:NOSM <SubBandCount>
Sets the number of sub-bands (Nsb) into that the total range of physical resource blocks
available for PUSCH transmission is devided. The frequency hopping is performed at
sub-band level.
Parameters:
<SubBandCount>

integer
Range:
1 to 4
Increment: 1
*RST:
4

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUSC:NOSM 3
sets the number of sub-bands

Manual operation:

See "Number of Sub-bands" on page 185

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:NORB <RbCount>
Sets the PUCCH region in terms of reserved resource blocks, located at the edges of the
channel bandwidth.
Parameters:
<RbCount>

integer
Range:
0 to 110
Increment: 1
*RST:
4

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUCC:NORB 3
reserves 3 RBs for PUCCH

Manual operation:

See "Number of RBs used for PUCCH" on page 185

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:DESHift <DeltaShift>
Sets the delta shift parameter.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

394

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Parameters:
<DeltaShift>

integer
Range:
1 to 3
Increment: 1
*RST:
2

Example:

BB:EUTR:PUCC:DESH 3
sets the delta shift parameter

Manual operation:

See "Delta Shift" on page 186

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:DEOFfset <DeltaOffset>
The parameter is provided for backward compatibility. To test according to newer versions of 3GPP specification TS 36.211, use the defalt value of 0.
For tests according to former versions of the 3GPP specification (up to version 8.4.0),
use the parameter to set the cyclic shift offset.
Parameters:
<DeltaOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to 2
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Manual operation:

See "Delta Offset" on page 186

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1CS <N1Cs>
Sets the number of cyclic shifts used for PUCCH format 1/1a/1b in a resource block used
for a combination of the formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b.
Parameters:
<N1Cs>

integer
Range:
0 to 8
Increment: 1
*RST:
6

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUCC:N1CS 5
5 cyclic shifts will be used for PUCCH format 1/1a/1b in a RB used
for a combination of the PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b and 2/2a/2b

Manual operation:

See "N(1)_cs" on page 186

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N2RB <N2Rb>
Sets bandwidth in terms of resource blocks that are reserved for PUCCH formats 2/2a/
2b transmission in each subframe.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

395

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
General EUTRA/LTE Uplink Settings

Parameters:
<N2Rb>

integer
Range:
0 to 5
Increment: 1
*RST:
1

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUCC:N2RB 3
reserves 3 RB for PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b

Manual operation:

See "N(2)_RB" on page 187

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1NMax <N1NormCP>
Queries the range of the possible PUCCH format 1/1a/1b transmissions from different
users in one subframe and in case of normal CP.
Parameters:
<N1NormCP>

integer
Range:
0 to 2639
Increment: 1
*RST:
44

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUCC:N1NM?
queries the range of the possible PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b transmissions.
Response: 24

Manual operation:

See "Range n(1)_PUCCH (Normal CP)" on page 187

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N1EMax <N1emax>
Queries the range of the possible PUCCH format 1/1a/1b transmissions from different
users in one subframe and in case of extended CP.
Parameters:
<N1emax>

integer
Range:
0 to 2639
Increment: 1
*RST:
29

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUCC:N1EM?
queries the range of the possible PUCCH formats 1/1a/1b transmissions.
Response: 10

Manual operation:

See "Range n(1)_PUCCH (Extended CP)" on page 187

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N2Max <N2Max>
Queries the range of possible number of PUCCH format 2/2a/2b transmissions from different users in one subframe.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

396

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

Parameters:
<N2Max>

integer
Range:
0 to 1319
Increment: 1
*RST:
15

Example:

BB:EUTR:UL:PUCC:N2M?
queries the range of the possible PUCCH formats 2/2a/2b transmissions.
Response: 16

Manual operation:

See "Range n(2)_PUCCH" on page 187

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:UL:PUCCh:N3Max <N3Max>
Queries the range of possible number of PUCCH format 3 transmissions from different
users in one subframe.
Parameters:
<N3Max>

integer
Range:
0 to 549
Increment: 1
*RST:
19

Manual operation:

See "Range n(3)_PUCCH" on page 187

9.10 DL Frame Configuration


SUBF<st0>
Defines the subframe number. Value range <st0>= 0 .. 39. The maximum value depends
on the selected sequence length (see [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:SLENgth
on page 341).
ALLoc<ch0>
Determines the allocation number.
Value range

for subframes with PBCH, i.e. SUBF0, SUBF10, SUBF20 and SUBF30:
<ch0> = 0 .. 111

for all other subframes:


<ch0> = 0 .. 110

CW<user>
Determines the code word. Value range <user>= 1 | 2
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:VIEW:MODE...................................................................398
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BUR...............................................................................398
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CONSubframes...............................................................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:RSTFrame......................................................................399

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

397

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SFSelection.....................................................................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:CYCPrefix....................................................399
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALCount......................................................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CODWords...............................400
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:MODulation............401
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:GAP.......................401
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:RBCount................402
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:SYMCount..............402
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:RBOFfset...............403
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:SYMoffset...............403
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:AOC......................404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:PHYSbits?..............404
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:DATA.....................405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:PATTern................405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:DSELect.................405
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:POWer...................406
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:CONType...............406
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:STATe...................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:CONFlict................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:TXM..............................................................407
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:UEC..............................................................408
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:USER<ch>:PHYSbits?..................................408

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:VIEW:MODE <Mode>
Determines whather the time plan shows the allocated Virtual Resource Blocks (VRBs)
or the Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs).
Parameters:
<Mode>

PRB | VRB
*RST:

Manual operation:

PRB

See "View Mode" on page 177

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:BUR <Bur>
Selects either to fill unscheduled resource elements and subframes with dummy data or
DTX.
Parameters:
<Bur>

DUData | DTX
*RST:

DUData

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:BUR DUD
the unscheduled resource elements are filled with dummy data.

Manual operation:

See "Behavior In Unscheduled REs (OCNG)" on page 129

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

398

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:CONSubframes <ConSubFrames>
Sets the number of configurable subframes. All downlink/special subframes are filled
periodically with the configured subframes with the exception of the SYNC signals which
are set globally in the "General Settings" menu and the PBCH channel, which can only
be configured in subframe 0.
Parameters:
<ConSubFrames>

integer
Range:
1 to 40
Increment: 1
*RST:
10

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:CONS 10
ten subframes are configurable in downlink.

Manual operation:

See "No Of Configurable (DL) Subframes" on page 128

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:RSTFrame
Resets all subframe settings of the selected link direction to the default values.
Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:RSTF
resets the downlink subframe parameters of path A to the default
settings.

Manual operation:

See "Reset Subframe Configuration" on page 128

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:SFSelection <SubFrameSel>
Sets the subframes to be configured in the resource allocation table.
Parameters:
<SubFrameSel>

integer
Range:
0 to 39
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SFS 0
displays subframe 0 in the allocation list view.

Manual operation:

See "Subframe Selection" on page 129

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:CYCPrefix <CycPrefix>
(enabled for BB:EUTR:DL:CPC USER only)
Sets the cyclic prefix for the according subframe.
Parameters:
<CycPrefix>

NORMal | EXTended
*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

NORMal

399

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:CPC USER
the cyclic prefix has to be adjusted on subframe basis.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF6:CYCP NORM
a normal prefix is used in subframe 6 in downlink.

Manual operation:

See "Cyclic Prefix" on page 129

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALCount <AllocCount>
Sets the number of scheduled allocations in the selected subframe. The maximum number of allocations that can be scheduled depends on the number of the selected resource
blocks.
Parameters:
<AllocCount>

integer
Range:
0 to 112
Increment: 1
*RST:
2 (SUBF0, SUBF10,SUBF20,SUBF30); 1(all other
subframes)

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALC 5
five scheduled allocations are assigned to subframe four.

Manual operation:

See "No. Of Used Allocations" on page 129

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>:CODWords
<CodeWords>
Sets the number of code word for an allocation.
Two ocde words are available for global MIMO configuration with two or more antennas.
Parameters:
<CodeWords>

1|2
Range:
1 to 2
Increment: 1
*RST:
1

Example:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

BB:EUTR:DL:MIMO:CONF TX2
sets the MIMO configuration to 2 TxAntennas.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CODW?
queries the number of code words used for allocation 5 in subframe 4.
Response: 2
two code words are used for allocation 5 in subframe 4.

400

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

Example:

In case the data source for an allocation is set to User, changing


this parameter will set also the parameter "Code Word" of all allocations, belonging to the same User in the corresponding subframe.
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL5:CODW 2
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL5:CW:DATA USER3
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL7:CW:DATA USER3
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL7:CODW?
Response: 2

Manual operation:

See "Codeword" on page 130

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
MODulation <Modulation>
Selects the modulation scheme for the allocation.
Parameters:
<Modulation>

QPSK | QAM16 | QAM64


*RST:

QPSK

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW2:MOD QPSK
selects QPSK as modulation scheme for the allocation.

Example:

In case the data source for an allocation is set to User, changing


this parameter will set also the parameter "Modulation" of all allocations, belonging to the same User in the corresponding subframe.
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL5:CW2:MOD QPSK
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL5:CW:DATA USER3
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL7:CW:DATA USER3
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL5:CW2:MOD?
Response: QPSK

Manual operation:

See "Mod." on page 130

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:GAP
<VrbGap>
Enables/disabless the utimization of distributed Virtual Resource Blocks (VBR) and
determines whether the first or the second VRB gap is applied. The VRB-to-PRB mapping
and the calculation of the VRB gap values are performed according to 3GPP TS 36.211.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

401

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

Parameters:
<VrbGap>

integer
0
A localized distribution is applied, i.e. the PDSCH mapping is
performed on a direct VRB-to-PRB mapping.
1
Enables a distributed ressource block allocation. The first VRB
gap is used.
2
Enabled for "Channel Bandwidths" grater than 50 RBs.
The mapping is based on the second (smaller) VRB gap.
Range:
0 to 2
Increment: 0
*RST:
0

Example:

SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:BW BW10_00
SOUR:BB:EUTR:SUBF0:ALL2:GAP2

Manual operation:

See "VRB Gap" on page 131

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:RBCount
<ResBlockCount>
Sets the size of the selected allocation in resource blocks (per slot).
For allocations with two code words, the number of resource blocks for the second code
word is automatically set to the number of resource blocks set for CW#1.
Parameters:
<ResBlockCount>

integer
Range:
0 to 110
Increment: 1
*RST:
1

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:RBC 3
the size of allocation five for subframe 4 is set to three resource
blocks.

Manual operation:

See "No. RB (Resource Blocks)" on page 133

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
SYMCount <SymCount>
Sets the size of the selected allocation in OFDM symbols.
For content type PBCH, PDCCH and PDSCH, this value is set automatically.
For allocations with two code words, the number of symbols for the second code word is
automatically set to number of symbols set for CW#1.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

402

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

Parameters:
<SymCount>

integer
Range:
1 to 14
Increment: 1
*RST:
6 (PBCH); 12 (PDSCH)

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:CONT RSVD
selects reserved as type for the selected allocation.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:SYMC 6
the size of allocation five for subframe 4 is set to six OFDM symbols.

Example:

For FDD mode and content type PDSCH, this value is set automatically in a way that the allocation always fills the complete subframe with consideration of the symbol offset.
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:CYCP NORM
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF2:ALL2:CW2:SYM 2
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL2:CW2:SYMC 12

Manual operation:

See "No. Sym." on page 134

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:RBOFfset
<ResBlockOffset>
Queries the start resource block of the selected allocation.
This parameter is only configurable for content type Reserved.
Note: If the Auto Offset Calculation mode is activated, this value is read only.
Parameters:
<ResBlockOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to 109
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:CONT RSVD
selects reserved as type for the selected allocation.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:RBOF 6
resource block six is the start resource block for allocation five in
subframe four.

Manual operation:

See "Offs RB" on page 134

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:SYMoffset
<SymOffset>
Sets the start OFDM symbol of the selected allocation.
The allowed values depend on the selected Content Type, Number of Symbols and Cyclic
Prefix.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

403

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

For allocations with two code words, the symbol offset for the second code word is automatically set to the symbol offset set for CW#1.
Note: If the Auto Offset Calculation mode is activated, this value is read only.
Parameters:
<SymOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to 13
Increment: 1
*RST:
2(PDSCH)

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:SYM 5
OFDM symbol five is the start OFDM symbol for allocation five in
subframe four.

Manual operation:

See "Offs Sym." on page 135

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:AOC
<Aoc>
Sets whether automatic offset calculation is used or not.
Parameters:
<Aoc>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

ON

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:AOC ON
activates the automatic offset calculation for the selected allocation.

Manual operation:

See "Auto" on page 135

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:
PHYSbits?
Queries the number of physical bits for the selected allocation. The value is set automatically according to the current allocation settings.
Return values:
<PhysicalBits>

integer
Range:
0 to 105600
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:PHYS?
queries the number of physical bits for allocation five in subframe
four.

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Phys. Bits" on page 135

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

404

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:DATA
<Data>
Sets the data source for the selected allocation.
For allocations with two code words, the data source for the second code word is automatically set to the data source set for CW#1.
Parameters:
<Data>

USER1 | USER2 | USER3 | USER4 | PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 |


PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | PATTern | DLISt | ZERO | ONE | MIB
MIB
for PBCH allocation only
Indicates that the PBCH transmits real MIB data (see also [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:PBCH:MIB on page 422).
*RST:

PN9

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:DATA PN9
PN9 is the data source for the selected allocation.

Example:

PBCH
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:PBCH:MIB ON
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF0:ALL0:CW:DATA?
Response: MIB

Manual operation:

See "Data List Management" on page 77

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:PATTern
<Pattern>
Selects the bit pattern for the PATTern selection. The maximum length is 64 bits.
For allocations with two code words, the data source for the second code word is automatically set to the data source set for CW#1.
Parameters:
<Pattern>

<bit pattern>
*RST:

#H0,1

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:DATA PATT
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:PATT #H3F,8
defines the bit pattern.

Manual operation:

See "DList/Pattern" on page 136

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:DSELect
<DSelect>
Selects the data list for the DLISt data source selection.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

405

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

The lists are stored as files with the fixed file extensions *.dm_iqd in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the following commands is defined with the
command MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, you only have to give the
file name, without the path and the file extension.
For allocations with two code words, the data source for the second code word is automatically set to the data source set for CW#1.
Parameters:
<DSelect>

string

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF2:ALL5:CW:DATA DLISt
selects the Data Lists data source.
MMEM:CDIR '<root>Lists'
selects the directory for the data lists.
BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF2:ALL5:CW:DSELect 'eutra_list1'
selects file 'eutra_list1' as the data source. This file must be
in the directory <root>Lists and have the file extension
*.dm_iqd.

Manual operation:

See "Data List Management" on page 77

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:POWer
<Power>
Sets the power PPDSCH respectively PPBCH for the selected allocation. The power of the
PDCCH allocation PPDCCH is read-only. The value is set with the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ENCC:PDCCh:POWer.
For allocations with two code words, the power for the second code word is automatically
set to the power set for CW#1.
Parameters:
<Power>

float
Range:
-80.00 dB to 10.00 dB
Increment: 0.001 dB
*RST:
0 dB

Example:

PPDSCH, PPBCH
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL2:POW 10.00

Example:

PPDCCH
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ENCC:PDCC:POW 2.00
SOUR:BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:ALL1:POW?
Response: 2

Manual operation:

See "Rho A" on page 136

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:CONType
<ConType>
Selects the type for the selected allocation.

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

406

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL Frame Configuration

PBCH can be configured in subframe 0 only.


Parameters:
<ConType>

PDSCh | PBCH | PDCCh | RSVD | PMCH


*RST:

PDSCh

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:CONT PDSC
selects PDSCH as type for the selected allocation.

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Content Type" on page 136

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:STATe
<State>
Sets the allocation state to active or inactive.
Parameters:
<State>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW:STAT OFF
deactivates the selected allocation.

Manual operation:

See "State" on page 136

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:ALLoc<ch0>[:CW<user>]:CONFlict
<Conflict>
Indicates a conflict between two allocations.
Parameters:
<Conflict>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF4:ALL5:CW2:CONF?
queries for the selected allocation whether there is a conflict with
another allocation.

Manual operation:

See "Conflict" on page 136

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:TXM <TxMode>
(enabled for "Auto/DCI" scheduling mode)
Sets the transmission mode of the according user as defined in 3GPP TS 36.213, section
7.1.
Parameters:
<TxMode>

USER | M1 | M2 | M3 | M4 | M5 | M6 | M7 | M8
*RST:

Options:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

USER

Tx Mode 8 requires R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

407

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL MBFSN Settings

Manual operation:

See "Tx Mode" on page 170

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:USER<ch>:UEC <UECategory>
Sets the UE Category.
Parameters:
<UECategory>

USER | C1 | C2 | C3 | C5 | C4
*RST:

Manual operation:

USER

See "UE Category" on page 170

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL[:SUBF<st0>]:USER<ch>:PHYSbits?
Queries the size of the selected allocation in bits and considering the subcarriers that are
used for other signals or channels with higher priority.
If a User 1...4 is selected for the "Data Source" in the allocation table for the corresponding
allocation, the value of the parameter "Number of Physical Bits" is the sum of the "Physical
Bits" of all single allocations that belong to the same user in the selected subframe.
Return values:
<PhysicalBits>

integer
Range:
0 to 100000
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Example:

BB:EUTR:DL:SUBF1:USER3:PHYS?
queries the number of phisycal bits

Usage:

Query only

Manual operation:

See "Number of Physical Bits (DL)" on page 143

9.11 DL MBFSN Settings


PMCH<ch0>
Defines the PM channel number. Value range <ch0>= 0 .. 15.
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:ID...................................................................409
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:AVAL?..................................................409
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:DATA...................................................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:DLISt....................................................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MCS.....................................................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MODulation?.........................................410
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MPER...................................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NOFFset...............................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NPATtern..............................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NRC.....................................................411
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NSI......................................................412

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

408

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL MBFSN Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:OFFS...................................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:PATTern...............................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:RPER...................................................412
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:STATe..................................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:TBSize?................................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:NIND...............................................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:NMRL.............................................................413
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:MODE.................................................................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:MTCH:CSAP.......................................................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:MTCH:NPMChs...................................................414
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:DATA..............................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:DLISt...............................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:MCS................................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:PATTern..........................................415
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:SPERiod..........................................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:SASTart...........................................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:PMCH<ch0>:SAENd............................................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:RHOA.................................................................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:AMODe..........................................................416
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:AOFFset........................................................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:APER............................................................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:SC:AVAL.............................................................417
[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:UEC....................................................................417

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:ID <AreaID>
Defines the MBSFN area ID, parameter NidMBSFN.
Parameters:
<AreaID>

integer
Range:
0 to 255
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:AVAL? <AllocationValue>
Indicates the subframes of the radio frames indicated by the "MCCH repetition period"
and the "MCCH offset", that may carry MCCH.
Parameters:
<AllocationValue>

float
*RST:

Usage:

Query only

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

409

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL MBFSN Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:DATA <DataSource>
Sets the data source used for the MCCH.
Parameters:
<DataSource>

PN9 | PN11 | PN15 | PN16 | PN20 | PN21 | PN23 | PATTern |


DLISt | ZERO | ONE
*RST:

PN9

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:DLISt <DataList>
Sets the data list used as data source for MCCH.
Parameters:
<DataList>

string

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MCS <MCS>
Defines the Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) applicable for the subframes indicated by the "MCCH Allocation value" and for the first subframe of each MCH scheduling
period (which may contain the MCH scheduling information provided by MAC).
Parameters:
<MCS>

MCS19 | MCS13 | MCS7 | MCS2


*RST:

MCS2

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MODulation? <Modulation>
Queries the values as determined by the "MCCH MCS".
Parameters:
<Modulation>

QPSK | QAM16 | QAM64


*RST:

QPSK

Usage:

Query only

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

410

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL MBFSN Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:MPER <ModifPeriod>
Sets the MCCH Modification Period.
Parameters:
<ModifPeriod>

MP512 | MP1024
*RST:

MP512

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NOFFset <NotifOffset>
Defines, together with the [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NRC,
the radio frames in which the MCCH information change notification is scheduled.
Parameters:
<NotifOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to 10
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NPATtern <NotifPattern>
Sets the pattern for the notification bits sent on PDCCH DCI format 1c.
Parameters:
<NotifPattern>

integer
*RST:

#H1,2

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NRC <NotifRepetCoeff>
Selects the current change notification repetition period common for all MCCHs that are
configured.
Parameters:
<NotifRepetCoeff>

NRC2 | NRC4
*RST:

NRC2

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

411

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL MBFSN Settings

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:NSI <Index>
Defines the subframe used to transmit MCCH change notifications on PDCCH.
In FDD: Value 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 correspond with subframe #1, #2, #3, #6, #7 and #8
respectively
In TDD: Value 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 correspond with subframe #3, #4, #7, #8 and #9respectively
Parameters:
<Index>

integer
Range:
0 to 10
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:OFFS <McchOffset>
Indicates, together with the [:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:
RPER, the radio frames in which MCCH is scheduled.
Parameters:
<McchOffset>

integer
Range:
0 to 10
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:PATTern <Pattern>
Sets the pattern used as data source for the MCCH.
Parameters:
<Pattern>

integer
*RST:

#H0,1

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:RPER <RepetPeriod>
Defines the interval between transmissions of MCCH information in radio frames.
Parameters:
<RepetPeriod>

RP64 | RP32 | RP128 | RP256


*RST:

Operating Manual 1171.5177.12 18

RP32

412

EUTRA/LTE

Remote-Control Commands
DL MBFSN Settings

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:STATe <McchState>
Enables/disables the MCCH.
Parameters:
<McchState>

0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:

OFF

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:MCCH:TBSize? <TB_Size>
Queries the values as determined by the "MCCH MCS".
Parameters:
<TB_Size>

integer

Usage:

Query only

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBSFn:AI:NIND <NotifIndicator>
Defines which PDCCH bit is used to notify the UE about change of the MCCH applicable
for this MBSFN area.
Parameters:
<NotifIndicator>

integer
Range:
0 to 7
Increment: 1
*RST:
0

Options:

R&S SMx/AMU-K84/-K284

Manual operation:

See "Area Info (SIB Type 13)" on page 110

[:SOURce<hw>]:BB:EUTRa:DL:MBS